Seat Arona 2018 User Manual

Owner’s manual

SEAT Arona

6F9012720BD

Inglés

6F9012720BD (11.18)

SEAT Arona Inglés (11.18)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,

that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no

right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or

omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

Vehicle identiﬁcation data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification

number:

Date of vehicle registration

or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Conﬁrmation of receipt of documentation

and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered

with the vehicle:

YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was

checked

Location:

Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction

Thank you f

or your trust choosing a SEAT v

hicl

With your ne

w SEAT, you will be able to enjoy

a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology

and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-

ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle

so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily

driving.

Information about handling is complemented

with instructions regarding the operation and

maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure

its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we

want to give you valuable advice and tips to

drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting

the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety infor-

mation concerning the passenger's

front airbag

›››

page 81, Important in-

formation regarding the front passeng-

er's airbag.

About this manual

This manual describes the f

eat

of the v

hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of

the features described below will be intro-

duced in the future or will only be available in

certain markets.

Some of the features described here are

not included in all the types or variations

of the model and they can be varied or

modified based on technical or marketing

requirements without it being considered

misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from

its vehicle and must be interpreted as a

standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,

backwards) in this manual refer to the travel

direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-

ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to

help the users better understand some fea-

tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the

instruction manual. Access the instruction

manual to see the complete information and

warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk

are included by default only in certain

versions of the model, supplied as op-

tional only for certain versions or only of-

fered in certain countries.



Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-

sence of this symbol does not guarantee

that the term is not a trademark.

It indicates that the section continues on

the next page.

Important warnings on the page.

Related video

Fig. 54 Air conditioning

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic control

panel.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opriat

e butt

on. Pr

ess the butt

on again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Temperature

The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Fan

The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

Air distribution

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons

4 Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.



Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the

windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperat

ures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.



The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

The essentials



Air distribution towards the footwell.



Upward air distribution.



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.



Air recirculation

 

Seat heating buttons



Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.



Press the  butt

on to apply the driver-side settings t

o the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side in

order to set a different temperature.



Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off

Press the  button or manually set the fan to .



›››

in General notes on page 161



›››

page 168

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* and the heating and fresh air system work?

Fig. 56

In the centre console:  contr

s f

or the manual air conditioning;



heating and fresh air system controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opriat

e butt

on. Pr

ess the butt

on again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Fan

Level 0: blower and manual air conditioning/heating off

Level 4: maximum fan l

evel.

Air distribution



: Defrost function. The airflow is direct

ed at the windscreen.

Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the wind-

screen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.



: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.



: Air distribution t

owards the f

ootwell.



: Air distribution towards the windscr

een and the footwell.

The essentials



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.



Manual air conditioning: Air r

ecir

cul

ation



Manual air conditioning:

ess the butt

on t

o s

wit

ch on or off the cooling system.

 

Manual air conditioning: Seat heating butt

ons



›››

in General notes on page 161



›››

page 164,

›››

page 166

The essentials

Fluid level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and diesel

engines

40 l, 7 l reserve

Natural gas en-

gine

approx. 11.6 kg

The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-

teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-

cat

ed is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200

bar.

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-

tainer

Windscreen washer

fluid container

approx. 3 litres

Fuel

Fig. 57

Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The tank flap is released electronically by

means of the centr

al l

ocking and is l

ocat

at the r

ear of the vehicle, on the right. The

tank holds approximately 40 litres.

Opening the fuel tank cap

●

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the

left side.

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

●

Place it in the space on the hinge of the

open flap

›››

Fig. 57.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as

far as it will go.

●

Close the lid.



›››

in Refuelling on page 309



›››

page 308

Oil

Fig. 58

Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 59

In the engine compartment: Engine oil

fill

er cap

The essentials

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-

ed in the engine compartment

›



page 31

The oil indicator must be between zones

and

. It can never go above zone

●

Zone

: do not add oil.

●

Zone

: you can add oil but keep the level

in that z

one

●

one

: add oil until zone

opping up engine oil

●

Unscr

w cap fr

om oil fill

er opening.

●

Add oil slowly.

●

At the same time, check the level to ensure

you do not add too much.

●

When the oil level reaches at least zone

unscr

w the engine oil fill

er cap car

efully.

Engine oil additiv

No type of additive should be mixed with the

engine oil. The deterioration caused by these

additives is not covered by the warranty.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type

Type of

Service

Specifica-

tion

With particulate

filter (DPF)

Set Service

and Flexible

Service Inter

vals

VW 507 00

Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may

damage the engine.

If the engine oil level is t

oo low

You can get information about the correct en-

gine oil for your vehicle in your specialised

shop. If you have to change your engine oil,

use this oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-

ble, in the event of an emergency you can

change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L

of the next oil until the next oil change:

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,

VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or

API SN.

Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,

VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-

shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW

504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00

–

could increase consumption and the vehicle’s

emissions.



Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to

guarant

ee high SEAT engine performance.



›››

in Changing engine oil on

page 320



›››

page 318

Coolant

Fig. 60

Engine compartment: coolant expan-

sion t

ank cap

The coolant tank is located in the engine

compartment

›



page 31

The essentials

When the engine is cold, replace the coolant

when the l

el is bel

w .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from

the factory with a specially treated mixture of

water and at least 40 % of the additive G13

(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the

necessary frost protection down to -25°C

(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of

the engine cooling system against corrosion.

It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-

ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-

age of additive must always be at least 40 %,

even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-

tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is

necessary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-

tifreeze protection will diminish and this will

worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture

of distilled water and at least 40 % of the

G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive

(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-

corrosion protection

›››

in Topping up

cool

ant on page 32

. The mixt

e of G13

with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11

(green-blue) engine coolants will significantly

reduce anti-corrosion protection and should

therefore be avoided

›››

in Topping up

cool

ant on page 32



›

in Topping up coolant on

page 321



›››

page 320

Brake fluid

Fig. 61 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser-

oir cap

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-

gine compartment

›



page 31

The level should be between the  and 

marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical

Service.



›››

in Changing the brake fluid on

page 322



›››

page 32

Windscreen washer

Fig. 62

In the engine compartment: cap of the

windscr

een w

asher t

ank

The windscreen washer reservoir is located in

the engine compartment

›



page 31

To top up, mix water with a product recom-

mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win-

dows.

The essentials



›››

in Checking and topping up the

windscreen washer reservoir w

ater

on page 322



›››

page 322

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment

›››



page 317

. It does not require

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-

spection Service.



›››

in Symbols and warnings on

handling the battery on page 323



›››

page 323

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse l

ocation

Fig. 63

On the dashboard on the driver side:

lid of the fuse bo

Fig. 64

In the engine compartment: lid of the

fuse bo

Opening and closing the fuse box situated

bel

w the dash panel

●

Open: r

emo

e the fuse box cover in the di-

rection indicated

›››

Fig. 63.

●

Close: click the cover back into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

●

Raise the bonnet.

●

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse

box cover

›››

Fig. 64

●

Then lift the cover out.

●

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.

Push the locking tabs down until they click

audibly into place.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash

panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Colour Amp rating

Green 30

Orange 40



›››

in Introduction on page 91



›››

page 91

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 65 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation

●

Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-

cal equipment.

●

Open the corresponding fuse box

›



page 91

The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is bl

wn if its met

al strip is rupt

›››

Fig. 65.

●

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has

blown.

To replace a fuse

●

Remove the fuse.

●

Replace the blown fuse by one with an

identical amperage rating (same colour and

markings) and identical size.

●

Replace the cover again or close the fuse

box lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: Depending on the l

el of equipment

fitt

ed in the v

ehicle, LEDs may be used for

part or all of the interior and/or exterior light-

ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds

that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to

an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Halogen headlights. Type

Main beam headlights H7

Side light/DRL (daytime running

light)

W21W

Turn signal PY 21W

Halogen headlight with

LED DRL

Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Turn signal PY 21W

Side light/DRL (daytime running

light)

LED

In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised work-

shop t

o hav

e it r

epl

aced.

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with

LEDs. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised

orkshop to have it replaced.

Bulb light

Left Right

Brake lights

2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light P21 WLL –

Reverse light – P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi-

cle. The position of lights may vary according t

o the

country.

Light with

LEDs

Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED –

Reverse light – P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi-

. The position of lights may v

ary accor

ding t

o the

country.



›››

page 93

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc-

ed video

Fig. 66 Wheels

What to do first

●

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and

in a saf

e pl

ace as f

ar aw

ay fr

om traffic as

possible.

●

Apply the handbrake.

●

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

●

Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.

●

Automatic transmission: Move the selector

lever to position P.

●

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from

your vehicle.

●

Have the vehicle tool kit*

›››

page 53 and

the spare wheel

›››



page 330 ready.

●

Observe the applicable legislation for each

country (reflective vest, warning triangles,

etc.).

●

All occupants should leave the vehicle and

wait in a safe place (for instance behind the

roadside crash barrier).

WARNING

●

Always observe the abov

e steps and pro-

tect yourself and other road users.

●

If you change the wheel on a slope, block

the wheel on the opposite side of the car

with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-

cle from moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-

e kit

Fig. 67

Standard display: contents of the anti-

punct

e kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under the

oor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the t

●

Unscr

w the tyre valve cap and insert. Use

the

›››

Fig. 67

tool to remove the insert.

ace it on a cl

ean surf

ace

●

Shak

e the tyre sealant bottle vigorously

›››

Fig. 67

●

Screw the inflator tube

›

Fig. 6

into the

seal

ant bottl

. The bottl

e's seal will br

eak au-

tomatically.

●

Remove the lid from the filling tube

›››

Fig. 67

and screw the open end of the

ube int

o the t

e v

alve.

●

With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill

the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot-

tle.

●

Remove the bottle from the valve.

●

Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-

ing the tool

›››

Fig. 67

Infl

ating the t

●

Scr

w the compressor tyre inflator tube

›››

Fig. 67

into the tyre valve.

●

Check that the air bleed screw is closed

›

Fig. 6

●

Start the engine and leave it running.

●

Insert the connector

›

Fig. 6

into the

ehicl

e's 12-v

olt sock

›

››



page 154.

●

Turn the air compressor on with the

ON/OFF switch

›››

Fig. 67

The essentials

●

eep the air compr

essor running until it r

ea-

ches 2.

0 t

o 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).

A maximum of 8 minutes.

●

Disconnect the air compressor.

●

If it does not reach the pressure indicated,

unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

●

Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is

distributed throughout the tyre.

●

Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the

valve.

●

Repeat the inflation process.

●

If the indicated pressure still cannot be

reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop

and request assistance from an authorised

technician.

●

Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew

the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

●

When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and

2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding

80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Attach the sticker

›››

Fig. 67

to the instru-

ment clust

, within the driv

's visual fiel

●

Check the pressure again after 10 minutes

›››



page 86.



›››

in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

on page 85



›››

page 85

Changing a wheel

ed video

Fig. 68 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 69

Underneath the floor panel of the lug-

gage compartment: on-boar

d t

ool

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

wline anchor

age

x spanner f

or wheel bolts*

Crank handle for jack

Jack*

Hook f

or e

xtr

acting the centr

al wheel

trims*

Clip f

or removing the wheel bolt caps.



›››

in Vehicle tools on page 84



›››

page 84

Central trim for steel rims*

Fig. 70 Correct positioning of the central

wheel trim f

or st

eel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access

o the wheel bolts.

The essentials

Removing

●

Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools

›

Fig. 69

) to one of the chambers of the

centr

al wheel trim.

●

Insert the bo

x spanner thr

ough the hook

supporting it on the t

yre and remove the

wheel trim.

Fitting

●

Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The

bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should

align with the inflation valve

›››

Fig. 70

●

Press the central trim firmly until it locks in

with an audibl

e click

Note

There is also a valve mark on the back of

the central wheel trim that indicates the

correct alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 71

Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

●

Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the

cap until it clicks int

o pl

ace

›

Fig. 71.

●

Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Wheel bolts

Fig. 72

Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 73

Tyre change: tyre valve

and the cor-

ect position f

or the anti-theft wheel l

ocking

bolt

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the

car t

o l

oosen the wheel bolts.

oosen the wheel bolts only about one t

urn

bef

ore raising the vehicle with the jack.

The essentials

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push

on the end of the wheel wr

ench with your

oot. Hol

d on t

o the v

ehicle for support and

take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel bolts

●

Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go

›››

Fig. 72.

●

Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the

bolt approximately one turn anticlock-

wise

›››

in Removing and fitting the

wheel on page 56.

The caps pr

ect the wheel bolts and shoul

be pushed fully on again aft

er changing the

yre.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt

●

Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel

bolts out of the vehicle tool kit.

●

Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theft

wheel bolt

›››

Fig. 73.

●

Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go over

the adapter.

●

Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the

bolt approximately one turn anticlock-

wise

›››

in Removing and fitting the

wheel on page 56.

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a diff

ent

cap

. This cap only fits on anti-theft l

ocking

bolts and is not f

or use with standard wheel

bolts.

Important information about wheel bolts

Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-

cially matched during construction. There-

fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct

wheel bolts with the right length and heads

must be used. This ensures that wheels are

fitted securely and that the brake system

functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not even

use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same

model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft

locking bolt must be threaded onto positions

›››

Fig. 73

, taking the tyre valve’s po-

sition as r

ence

. Otherwise it will not be

possibl

e t

o mount the hubcap

aising the v

ehicle

Fig. 74 Jack position points.

Fig. 75 Fitting the jack.

●

Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm

ound. If necessary use a l

, str

ong

board or similar support. If the surface is slip-

pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a

rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-

ping

›››

●

Find the support point on the strut (sunken

ea) cl

osest t

o the wheel t

o be changed

›

››

Fig. 74.

●

Turn the jack* crank handle, located below

the strut support point, to raise it until the

tab

›

Fig. 75

is bel

ow the housing provi-

ded.

●

Align the jack* so that tab

“grips” onto

the housing pr

vided on the strut and the mo-

bil

e base

is resting on the ground. The

base pl

should fall vertically with re-

spect t

o the support point

●

Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is

slightly lift

ed off the gr

ound.

The essentials

WARNING

●

Make sure that the jack* remains stabl

If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*

could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-

sultant risk of injury.

●

Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-

plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,

even those approved for other SEAT mod-

els could slip, with the consequent risk of

injury.

●

Only mount the jack* on the support

points designed for this purpose on the

strut, and always align the jack correctly. If

you do not, the jack* could slip as it does

not have an adequate grip on the vehicle:

risk of injury!

●

The height of the parked vehicle can

change as a result of variations in tempera-

ture and loading.

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be raised on the

crossbar. Only place the jack* on the

points designed for this purpose on the

strut. Otherwise

, the vehicle may be dam-

aged.

Removing and fitting the wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel

bolts and r

aising the v

ehicl

e with the jack

aking off the wheel

●

Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box

spanner and place them on a clean surface.

●

Take off the wheel

›››

Putting on the spar

e wheel

When fitting t

es with a compul

sory r

otation

direction, observe the instructions in

›››

page 57.

●

Mount the wheel.

●

Screw on the wheel bolts in position and

tighten them loosely with a box spanner.

●

Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

●

Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs

using the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turn

easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect

the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-

ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-

ting the wheel.

Wheel bolt tightening torque

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel

bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. Af-

ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-

que checked immediately with a torque

wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any

rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re-

placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to

the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have

been tightened to the prescribed torque, they

could come loose while driving.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not properly tight-

ened, they could come loose while driving

and cause an accident, serious injury and

loss of v

ehicle control.

●

Use only wheel bolts which correspond

to the rim in question.

●

Never use different wheel bolts.

●

Wheel bolts and threads should be clean,

free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-

sible to screw them easily.

●

To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only

use the wheel wrench that came with the

car from the factory.

●

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one

turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

●

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts

or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the

bolts have been tightened to the prescri-

bed torque, they could come loose while

driving.

●

Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel

rims with bolted ring trims.

●

If wheel bolts are tightened below the

prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could

come loose while driving. If tightening tor-

que is too high, the wheel bolts or threads

can be damaged.

The essentials

CAUTION

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim

may hit and damage the brake disc. For this

reason, pl

ease take care and get a second

person to assist you.

Tyres with compulsory direction of

rotation

A directional tread pattern can be identified

by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the

dir

ection of rotation. Always observe the di-

rection of rotation indicated when fitting the

wheel to guarantee optimum properties of

this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises,

wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare

tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive

with care as this means the tyre does not of-

fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-

ticular importance when the road surface is

wet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace the

punctured tyre as soon as possible and re-

store the obligatory direction of rotation of all

tyres.

Subsequent work

●

Alloy wheels: r

epl

ace the wheel bolt caps.

●

e wheel

s: replace the wheel hubcap.

●

Return all tools to their proper storing loca-

tion.

●

If the replaced wheel does not fit in the

spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-

gage compartment

›››



page 155.

●

Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-

ted tyre as soon as possible.

●

In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-

tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory

›››



page 329.

●

Have the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-

que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile,

drive carefully.

●

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as

possible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the front

wheel

●

Check that they ar

e corr

ectly seat

ed aft

driving for a few yards; correct the position if

necessary, in accordance with the manufac-

turer's fitting instructions.

●

Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

●

If there is a danger of being trapped de-

spite having mounted the chains, it is best to

disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC

›››



page 226.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as

well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only

be used with the following wheel rim/tyre

combination.

195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5

205/60 R16

Chains with links of maximum 9 mm205/55 R17

215/45 R18

Remove wheel covers and any integral trim

ring bef

e fitting sno

w chains.

emo

ve the chains when roads are free of

snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the

wheels become damaged quickly and may

even be rendered unusable.

WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened

in accordance with the manufacturer

's in-

structions. This will prevent the chains

coming into contact with the wheel hous-

ing.

The essentials

Emergency towing of the ve-

hicl

wing

Fig. 76

Right side of the front bumper: towline

anchor

age

Fig. 77

Right side of the rear bumper: towline

anchor

age

Towline anchorages

Att

ach the bar or r

ope t

o the t

wline ancho-

rages.

The towline anchorages are located under

the floor panel in the luggage compartment,

next to the vehicle tools

›››

page 53.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw

connection

›››

Fig. 76 or

›››

Fig. 77 and tight-

en it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-

ed using a tow bar. You should only use a

tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-

duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-

able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-

bre or similarly elastic material.

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the

towline anchorages provided or a towing

bracket.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

●

The tow rope must be taut before you drive

off.

●

Release the clutch very carefully when

starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac-

celerate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especially

when using a tow rope. Both drivers should

realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex-

perienced drivers should not attempt to tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle

and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.

When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-

ways a risk of overloading and damaging the

anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must

be switched on to prevent the steering wheel

from locking and also to allow the use of the

turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and

washers.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles

with a manual gearbox. With an automatic

gearbox, place the lever in N.

The brake servo only works when the engine

is running. When not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake

pedal.

As the power assisted steering does not work

if the engine is not running, you will need

more strength to steer than you normally

would.



›››

in General information on

page 87



›››

page 87

The essentials

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting it

using the battery of another vehicle

››

›

page 59. You should only attempt to

tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery

does not work. This is done by leveraging

wheel movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-

gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-

tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the

catalytic converter.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-

started:

●

Engage 2

or 3

gear.

●

Keep the clutch pr

essed down.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Once both vehicles are moving, release the

clutch.

●

As soon as the engine starts, press the

clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.

This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.



›››

in General information on

page 87



›››

page 87

How to jump start

Jump l

eads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire

cross section.

If the engine fails to st

art because of a dis-

charged battery, the battery can be connec-

ted to the battery of another vehicle to start

the engine.

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN

72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-

tions). The wire cross section must be at least

25 mm

for petrol engines and at least

35 mm

for diesel engines.

Note

●

The vehicles must not touch each other,

otherwise el

ectricity could flow as soon as

the positive terminals are connected.

●

The discharged battery must be properly

connected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 78

Diagram of connections for vehicles

without St

art

-St

op syst

em.

Fig. 79

Diagram of connections for vehicles

with St

art

-St

op syst

em.

Jump lead terminal connections

wit

ch off the ignition of both v

ehicl

›

››

The essentials

Connect one end of the r

jump l

ead t

the positiv

terminal of the vehicle

with the fl

at batt

ery

›

Fig. 7

Connect the other end of the

red jump

lead to the positive terminal

in the ve-

hicl

e pr

viding assist

ance

In v

ehicl

es without a St

art

-St

op system:

connect one end of the black jump lead

to the negative terminal

–

of the vehicle

viding the curr

ent

›

Fig. 7

In v

ehicles with a Start-stop system:

connect one end of the black jump lead

to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of met

al in the engine bl

ock

, or

o the engine bl

ock itself

›››

Fig. 79.

Connect the other end of the black jump

lead

to a solid metal component bol-

ed t

o the engine bl

ock or t

o the engine

ock itself of the vehicle with the flat

battery. Do not connect it to a point near

the battery

osition the l

eads in such a w

ay that

they cannot come int

o cont

act with any

moving parts in the engine compart-

ment.

Starting

Start the engine of the vehicle with the

boosting battery and let it run at idling

speed.

4a.

4b.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the

flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes

until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

Before you remove the jump leads,

switch off the dipped beam headlights if

they are switched on.

Turn on the heater blower and heated

rear window in the vehicle with the flat

battery. This helps minimise voltage

peaks which are generated when the

leads are disconnected.

When the engine is running, disconnect

the leads in reverse order to the details

given above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient

metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-

minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-

onds, switch off the starter and try again after

about 1 minute.

WARNING

●

Please note the safety w

arnings referring

to working in the engine compartment

›››



page 315, Working in the engine

compartment.

●

The battery providing assistance must

have the same voltage as the flat battery

(12 V) and approximately the same capaci-

10.

11.

ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-

ply could result in an explosion.

●

ver use jump leads when one of the

batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!

Even after the battery has thawed, battery

acid could leak and cause chemical burns.

If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

●

Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-

rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-

plosion. Failure to comply could result in an

explosion.

●

Observe the instructions provided by the

manufacturer of the jump leads.

●

Do not connect the negative cable from

the other vehicle directly to the negative

terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-

ted from the battery could be ignited by

sparks. Danger of explosion.

●

Never attach the negative cable to fuel

system components or the brake lines in

the other vehicle.

●

The non-insulated parts of the battery

clamps must not be allowed to touch. The

jump lead attached to the positive battery

terminal must not touch metal parts of the

vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

●

Position the leads in such a way that they

cannot come into contact with any moving

parts in the engine compartment.

●

Do not lean on the batteries. This could

result in chemical burns.

The essentials

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other,

otherwise electricity could flo

w as soon as

the positive terminals are connected.

Changing the windscreen

wiper blades

Changing the wiper blades

Fig. 80

Wipers in service position.

Fig. 81 Changing the windscreen wiper blade.

To change the blades it is necessary to move

the wipers fr

om the r

est position int

o the serv-

ice position.

Do not change the windscr

een wipers when

out of the service position, as it coul

d cause

paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction

with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper

blades)

●

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

●

Turn the ignition on and off and then (within

approximately 9 seconds) push the wind-

screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The

windscreen wipers will move to the service

position

›››

Fig. 80.

Removing the wiper blade

●

Lift the windscreen wiper arm.

●

Press the securing tab down

›

Fig. 81

●

Extr

act the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blade

●

Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

●

Place the windscreen wiper arms to their

initial position.

●

Turn the ignition on, push the windscreen

wiper lever down (touch wipe) and then turn

the ignition off.



›››

in Changing the windscreen

and rear window wiper blades on

page 87



››

›

page 87

The essentials

Changing the rear window wiper

ade

Fig. 82

Removing and fitting the rear window

wiper bl

ade

Removing the wiper blade

●

Lift the wiper arm away from the glass

●

Slide the blade adapter in the direction of

the arr

w and r

emo

e the blade

›››

Fig. 82 A.

Fitting the wiper blade

●

With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-

er arm.

●

Place the blade as shown in

›››

Fig. 82 B

and slide the adapter along until it engages.



›››

in Changing the windscreen

and rear window wiper blades on

page 87



››

›

page 87

Safe driving

Safety

Saf

e driving

Advice about driving

Saf

y first

This chapter contains important information,

tips, suggestions and warnings that you

should read and consider for both your o

safety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

●

This manual contains important informa-

tion about the oper

ation of the vehicle,

both for the driver and the passengers. The

other sections of the on-board documenta-

tion also contain further information that

you should be aware of for your own safety

and for the safety of your passengers.

●

Ensure that the on-board documentation

is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-

pecially important when lending or selling

the vehicle to another person.

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of your

passengers, al

ays not

e the f

oll

owing points

before every trip:

–

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn

signals are working properly.

–

Check tyre pressure.

–

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and

good view of the surroundings.

–

Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured

›››

page 155.

–

Make sure that no objects can interfere with

the pedals.

–

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors

properly according to your size.

–

Ensure that the passenger in the central

rear seat always has the head restraint in

the correct position for use.

–

Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-

straints according to their height.

–

Protect children with appropriate child

seats and properly applied seat belts

›››

page 80.

–

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct

your passengers also to assume a proper

sitting position

›››

page 64.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your

passengers also to fasten their seat belts

properly

›››

page 69.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself

and your passengers. When your concentra-

tion or driving safety is affect

ed by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as

others on the road

›››

, for this reason:

–

Always pay attention to traffic and do not

get distracted by passengers or telephone

call

–

Never drive when your driving ability is im-

paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

–

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

–

Always reduce your speed as appropriate

for road, traffic and weather conditions.

–

When tr

avelling long distances, take breaks

regularly - at least every two hours.

–

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired

or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a

trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa-

ses.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your

passengers in danger

. In the e

ent of an acci-

dent, the saf

y equipment may reduce the

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part

of the saf

y equipment in your SEAT

●

thr

ee-point seat belts,

●

Belt t

ension limit

er for the front and rear

side seats

●

belt tensioners for the front and rear seats,

●

front airbags,

●

side airbags in the front seat backrests,

●

“ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear

child seat system

●

height-adjustable front head restraints,

●

Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po-

sition and non-use position

●

adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above

works together to provide you and your pas-

sengers with the best possible protection in

the event of an accident. However, these

safety systems can only be effective if you

and your passengers are sitting in a correct

position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehi-

cle occupants

Correct sitting position for the driv-

Fig. 83

The proper distance between driver

and st

eering wheel

Fig. 84 Correct head restraint position for the

driver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of

injury in the e

ent of an accident, w

e r

ecom-

mend the f

ollowing adjustments for the driver:

–

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a

distance of at least 25 cm between the

steering wheel and the centre of your chest

›››

Fig. 83.

–

Move the driver's seat forwards or back-

wards so that you are able to press the ac-

celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the

floor with your knees still slightly angled

›››

–

Ensure that you can reach the highest point

of the st

eering wheel.

–

Adjust the head r

estr

aint so that its upper

edge is at the same l

vel as the top of your

Depending on the version/market.

Safe driving

head, or as close as possible to the same

el as the t

op of your head

›

››

Fig. 84.

–

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

tion so that your back rests completely

against it.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely

›››

page 69.

–

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you

have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat

›››

page 148.

WARNING

●

An incorrect sitting position of the driver

can lead to se

vere injuries.

●

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at

least 25 cm distance between the centre of

the chest and the centre of the steering

wheel

›››

Fig. 83. If distance is less than 25

cm, the airbag system may not protect you

properly.

●

If your physical constitution prevents you

from maintaining the minimum distance of

25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.

The workshop will help you decide if spe-

cial specific modifications are necessary.

●

When driving, always hold the steering

wheel with both hands on the outside of the

ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-

tions. This reduces the risk of injury when

the driver airbag is triggered.

●

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12

o'cl

ock position, or in any other manner

(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In

such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you

may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and

head.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver

during sudden braking manoeuvres or an

accident, never drive with the backrest til-

ted far back! The airbag system and seat

belts can only provide optimal protection

when the backrest is in an upright position

and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt

correctly.

●

Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-

ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel posi-

tion

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20

WARNING

●

Never adjust the position of the steering

wheel when the vehicl

e is moving, as this

could cause an accident.

●

Move the lever up firmly so the steering

wheel position does not accidentally

change during driving. risk of accident!

●

Make sure you are capable of r

eaching

and firmly holding the upper part of the

steering wheel: risk of accident!

●

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it

points towards your face, the driver airbag

will not protect you properly in the event of

an accident. Make sure that the steering

wheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front pas-

senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of

injury in the e

ent of an accident, w

e r

ecom-

mend the f

ollowing adjustments for the front

passenger:

–

Move the front passenger seat back as far

as possible

›››

–

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

tion so that your back r

ests compl

ely

against it.

–

Adjust the head r

estr

aint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of your

head, or as close as possible to the same

level as the top of your head

›››

page 67.

–

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of the front passenger seat.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely

›››

page 69.

Safety

It is possible to deactivate the front passen-

ger airbag in e

ceptional cir

cumst

ances

›

››

page 78.

Adjusting the front passenger seat

›››



page 19.

WARNING

●

An incorrect sitting position of the front

passenger can lead to se

vere injuries.

●

Adjust the front passenger seat so that

there is at least 25 cm between your chest

and the dash panel. If distance is less than

25 cm, the airbag system may not protect

you properly.

●

If your physical constitution prevents you

from maintaining the minimum distance of

25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.

The workshop will help you decide if spe-

cial specific modifications are necessary.

●

Always keep your feet in the footwell

when the vehicle is moving; never rest them

on the dash panel, out the window or on the

seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes

you to an increased risk of injury in case of

a sudden braking or an accident. If the air-

bag is triggered, you could sustain severe

injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the front

passenger in events such as sudden brak-

ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav-

el with the backrest tilted far back! The air-

bag system and seat belts can only pro-

vide optimal protection when the backrest

is in an upright position and the front pas-

senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop-

erly. The further the seat backrests ar

e til-

ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury

due to incorrect positioning of the belt web

or to the incorrect sitting position!

●

Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-

der to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear

seat passengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a

sudden br

aking manoeuvr

e or an accident,

passengers on the r

ear seat bench must con-

sider the f

oll

owing:

–

Sit up straight.

–

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-

sition

›››

page 67.

–

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of the rear seat.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely

›››

page 69.

–

Use an appropriate child restraint system

when you take children in the vehicle

›››

page 80.

WARNING

●

If the passengers in the rear seats are not

sitting properly, they could sust

ain severe

injuries.

●

Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-

der to achieve maximum protection.

●

Seat belts can only provide optimal pro-

tection when seat backrests are in an up-

right position and the vehicle occupants

are wearing their seat belts correctly. If

passengers In the rear seats are not sitting

in an upright position, the risk of injury due

to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in-

creases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-

tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-

ly when the belt w

ebs ar

e pr

operly posi-

tioned. Incorr

ect sitting positions subst

antially

reduce the protective function of seat belts

and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect

seat belt position. As the driver, you are re-

sponsible for all passengers, especially chil-

dren.

–

Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect

sitting position in the vehicle while travelling

›››

The f

oll

wing list cont

ains e

xamples of sitting

positions that could be dangerous for all

Safe driving

vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,

but w

e w

oul

d lik

e t

o make you aware of this

issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo-

tion:

●

Never stand in the vehicle.

●

Never stand on the seats.

●

Never kneel on the seats.

●

Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

●

Never lean against the dash panel.

●

Never lie on the rear bench.

●

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

●

Never sit sideways.

●

Never lean out of a window.

●

Never put your feet out of a window.

●

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

●

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

●

Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-

well.

●

Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

●

Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-

gage compartment.

WARNING

●

Any incorrect sitting position increases

the risk of sever

e injuries.

●

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes

the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if

airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle

occupant who has assumed an incorrect

sitting position.

●

Before the vehicl

e moves, assume the

proper sitting position and maintain it

throughout the trip. Before every trip, in-

struct your passengers to sit properly and

to stay in this position during the trip

›››

page 64, Correct position of the vehicle

occupants.

Correct adjustment of front head

estr

aints

Fig. 85

Correctly adjusted head restraint as

vie

ed fr

om the fr

ont and the side

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-

port

ant part of passenger pr

ection and can

educe the risk of injuries in most accident sit

uations.

–

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is, as far as possible, at the same level

as the top of your head, or at the very least,

at eye level

›››

Fig. 85.

WARNING

●

Travelling with the head restr

aints re-

moved or improperly adjusted increases

the risk of severe injuries. An improper ad-

justment of the head restraints may cause

death in an accident and increase the risk

of suffering injuries during abrupt braking

actions or unexpected manoeuvres.

●

The head restraints must always be ad-

justed according to the height of the pas-

senger.

Safety

Correct adjustment of rear head

estr

aints

Fig. 86

Head restraints in the correct position.

Fig. 87 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-

port

ant part of the passenger pr

ection and

can r

educe the risk of injuries in most acci-

dent sit

uations

Rear head restraints

–

The rear head restraints have 2 positions:

use and non-use.

–

One position for use (head restraint raised)

›››

Fig. 86. In this position, the head re-

straints are used normally, protecting pas-

sengers along with the rear seat belts.

–

And one position for non-use (head re-

straint lowered).

–

To fit the head restraints in position for use,

pull on the edges with both hands in the di-

rection of the arrow.

WARNING

●

Under no circumstances should the rear

passengers tr

avel while the head restraints

are in the non-use position. See the warn-

ing label located on the rear side fixed win-

dow

›››

Fig. 87.

●

Do not swap the centre rear head re-

straint with either of the outer seat rear

head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an

accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment of

the head restraints

›››

page 148.

Pedal area

edal

–

Ensure that you can always press the ac-

celerator, br

ake and clutch pedals unim-

paired to the floor.

–

Ensure that the pedals can return unim-

paired to their initial positions.

–

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-

tened during the trip and do not obstruct

the pedals

›››

Only use fl

oor mats which l

eav

e the pedal

ear and which are secured to prevent them

from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor

mats from a specialised dealership.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be

pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the

vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feet

properly and give you a good feeling for the

pedals.

WARNING

●

If the pedals are obstructed, an accident

may occur. Risk of serious injuries.

●

ver lay or fit floor mats or other floor

coverings over the original floor mats. This

Seat belts

would reduce the pedal area and could ob-

struct the pedals. Risk of accident.

●

Never place ob

jects in the driver footwell.

An object could move into the pedal area

and impair pedal operation. In the event of

a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre,

you will not be able to operate the brake,

clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci-

dent!

Seat belts

Why w

ear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front

and thr

ee in the rear. Each seat is equipped

with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

●

Never transport mor

e than the permitted

amount of people in your vehicle.

●

Every vehicle occupant must properly

fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to

his or her seat. Children must be protected

with an appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp*

Fig. 88

Dashboard: right rear seat occupied

and corr

esponding seat belt f

ast

ened displ

ay.



It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp illuminates to remind the

driv

er t

o f

ast

en his seat belt.

Bef

ore starting the vehicle:

●

Fasten your seat belt securely.

●

Instruct your passengers to fasten their

seat belts properly before driving off.

●

Protect children by using a child seat ac-

cording to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed

surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the

seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened

during the drive, a warning sound will be

Safety

heard for a few seconds. The warning light

will al

so fl

ash



The l

amp  goes out when the driver and

passenger seat belts are fastened with the

ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when the

ignition is switched on, the seat belt status

display

›››

Fig. 88 on the instrument panel in-

forms the driver whether the passengers in

the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

The  symbol indicates that the passenger in

this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened

or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-

played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-

dication can be hidden by pressing the 

button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of

30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats

is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An

audible warning will also be heard if the vehi-

cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

The protective function of seat

belts

Fig. 89

Drivers with properly worn seat belts

will not be thr

wn f

orw

d in the event of sud-

den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants

in the pr

oper position. These al

so help pr

ent uncontr

olled movements that may result

in serious injury and reduce the risk of being

thrown out of the vehicle.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts

correctly benefit greatly from the ability of

the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,

the front part of your vehicle and other pas-

sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-

gy released in a collision. Taken together, all

these features reduce the releasing kinetic

energy and consequently, the risk of injury.

This is why it is so important to fasten seat

belts before every trip, even when "just driving

around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat

belts as well. Accident statistics have shown

that wearing seat belts is an effective means

of substantially reducing the risk of injury and

improving the chances of survival when in-

volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,

properly worn seat belts improve the protec-

tion provided by airbags in the event of an

accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt

is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-

bags, the seat belts must be fastened and

worn. The front airbags, for example, are only

triggered in some cases of head-on collision.

The front airbags will not be triggered during

minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-

sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-

bag trigger threshold value in the control unit

is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat

belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants

have fastened their seat belts properly before

you drive off!

Important safety instructions for

the use of seat belts

–

Always wear the seat belt as described in

this section.

Seat belts

–

Ensur

e that the seat belts can be f

ast

ened

at all times and ar

e not damaged.

WARNING

●

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at

all, the risk of sev

ere injuries increases. The

optimal protection from seat belts can be

achieved only if you use them properly.

●

Fasten your seat belt before every trip -

even when driving in town. Other vehicle

occupants must also wear the seat belts at

all times, otherwise they run the risk of be-

ing injured.

●

The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-

tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor-

rectly.

●

Never allow two passengers (even chil-

dren) to share the same seat belt.

●

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in

motion.

●

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-

hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

●

The seat belt must never be twisted while

it is being worn.

●

The seat belt should never lie on hard or

fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,

etc.) because this can cause injuries.

●

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged

or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

●

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or

in any other incorrect position.

●

Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as

an o

vercoat over a sweater) impairs the

proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-

ducing their capacity to protect.

●

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not

be blocked with paper or other objects, as

this can prevent the latch plate from en-

gaging securely.

●

Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings

or similar items to alter the position of the

belt webbing.

●

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to

the connections, belt retractors or parts of

the buckle could cause severe injuries in

the event of an accident. Therefore, you

must check the condition of all seat belts

at regular intervals.

●

Seat belts which have been worn in an

accident and have been stretched must be

replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-

newal may be necessary even if there is no

apparent damage. The belt anchorage

should also be checked.

●

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat

belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-

moved or modified in any way.

●

The belts must be kept clean, otherwise

the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of

physics

Fig. 90

A driver not wearing a seat belt is

thr

wn f

orw

d violently.

Fig. 91

The unbelted passenger in the rear

seat is thr

wn f

orw

d violently, hitting the driv-

er who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case

of a head-on collision ar

e easy t

o e

xpl

ain: the

Safety

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-

gy call

ed “kinetic ener

gy” st

arts acting on

both the v

ehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on

the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of

the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher

the speed and the greater the weight, the

more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an

accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the

speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles

from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),

for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-

gy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-

ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the

event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-

cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed

solely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to

50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-

ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne

(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are

not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on

collision, they will move forward at the same

speed their vehicle was travelling just before

the impact. This example applies not only to

head-on collisions, but to all accidents and

collisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the

body in a collision are so great that it is not

possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In

a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are

thrown forward and will make violent contact

with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-

screen or whatever else is in the way

›››

Fig. 90.

It is also important for rear passengers to

wear seat belts properly, as they could other-

wise be thrown forward violently through the

vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in

the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-

danger not only themselves but also the front

occupants

›››

Fig. 91.

How to properly adjust your

seat belt

Fastening and unfastening your

seat belt

Fig. 92 Positioning and removing the seat belt

buckl

Seat belts

Fig. 93

Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 19

asten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if

the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

●

Adjust the seat and head restraint correct-

ly.

●

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch

plate and pull it slowly across your chest and

lap.

●

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the

appropriate seat and push it down until it is

securely locked with an audible click

›››

Fig. 92.

●

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is

securely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an auto-

matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full

freedom of movement is permitted when the

shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-

ing sudden braking, during travel in steep

areas or bends and during acceleration, the

automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front

seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners

›››

page 73.

Releasing the seat belt

●

Press the red button on the belt buckle

›››

Fig. 92. The latch plate is released and

springs out

›››

●

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls

up easily and the trim is not damaged.

ositioning seat belts

Seat belts off

er their maximum pr

ection on-

ly when they ar

e properly positioned.

WARNING

●

The seat belts offer best protection only

when the backrests ar

e in an upright posi-

tion and the seat belts have been fastened

properly.

●

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of

another seat. If you do this, the seat belt

will not protect you properly and the risk of

injury is increased.

●

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the v

hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase

the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

●

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause

severe injuries in the event of an accident.

●

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie

on the centre of the shoulder, never across

the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit

comfortably on the torso

●

The lap part of the seat belt must lie

across the pelvis, never across the stom-

ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-

fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if

necessary to take up any slack.

●

For pregnant women, the lap part of the

seat belt must lie as low as possible over

the pelvis, never across the stomach, and

always lie flat so that no pressure is exer-

ted on the abdomen

›››

Fig. 93.

●

Always engage the retractor lock when

you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+

or 1

›››

page 80.

●

Read and observe the warnings

›››

page 70.

Seat belt tensioners*

w the seat belt t

ensioner w

orks

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20

Safety

The seat belts for the front and side rear oc-

cupants ar

e equipped with belt t

ensioners.

The belt t

ensioners ar

e activ

ated by sensors,

although only in severe head-on and lateral

collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat

belts, reducing the forward motion of the oc-

cupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the

event of minor collisions, if the vehicle over-

turns, or in accidents where no major forces

act on the vehicle.

Note

●

If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a

fine dust is produced. This is normal and it

is not an indication of fir

e in the vehicle.

●

The relevant safety requirements must be

observed when the vehicle or components

of the system are scrapped. Specialised

workshops are familiar with these regula-

tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belt

ensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the

seat belts that ar

e inst

all

ed in the seats of

your v

ehicl

e. If you work on the belt tension-

ers or remove and install parts of the system

when performing other repair work, the seat

belt may be damaged. The consequence

may be that, in the event of an accident, the

belt tensioners function incorrectly or may

not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-

sioner is not reduced and that removed parts

do not cause any injuries or environmental

pollution, regulations, which are known to the

specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

●

Improper use or repairs not carried out by

qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-

ver

e or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners

may fail to trigger or may trigger in the

wrong circumstances.

●

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or

install parts of the belt tensioners or seat

belts.

●

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-

tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.

●

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat

belts, including the removal and refitting of

system parts in conjunction with other re-

pair work, must be performed by a special-

ised workshop only.

●

The belt tensioners will only provide pro-

tection for one accident and must be

changed if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief intr

oduction

Why is it so impor

ant t

o w

ear a

seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best

protection, the seat belt must always be w

orn

properly and the correct sitting position must

be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat

belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's

overall passive safety system. Please bear in

mind that the airbag system can only work

effectively when the vehicle occupants are

wearing their seat belts correctly and have

adjusted the head restraints properly. There-

fore, it is most important to properly wear the

seat belts at all times, not only because this is

required by law in most countries, but also for

your safety

›››

page 69, Why wear a seat

belt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so

if you are not properly seated when the air-

bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-

ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle

occupants assume a correct sitting position

while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause

a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

Airbag system

thrown forward into the area of the deploying

airbag. In this case

, the infl

ating airbag may

inflict critical or f

al injuries on the occupant.

This al

so applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-

tance between yourself and the front airbag.

This way, the front airbags can completely

deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-

mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering the

airbag are the type of accident, the angle of

impact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-

pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration

rate resulting from the collision and detected

by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration

occurring during the collision and measured

by the control unit remains below the speci-

fied reference values, the front, side and/or

curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into

account that the visible damage in a vehicle

involved in an accident, no matter how seri-

ous, is not a determining factor for the air-

bags to have been triggered.

WARNING

●

Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-

suming an incorrect sitting position can

lead t

o critical or fatal injuries.

●

All vehicle occupants, including children,

who are not properly belted can sustain

critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old should

always travel on the r

ear seat. Never trans-

port children in the vehicle if they are not

restrained or the restraint system is not ap-

propriate for their age, size or weight.

●

If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if

you lean forward or to the side while travel-

ling or assume an incorrect sitting position,

there is a substantially increased risk of in-

jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-

ther increased if you are struck by an inflat-

ing airbag.

●

To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-

ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-

erly.

●

Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 2

The airbag system is not a substitute for the

seat belts. The airbag system offers addition-

al protection for the driver and passenger in

combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system mainly comprises (as

per vehicle equipment):

●

an electronic control and monitoring sys-

tem (control unit)

●

frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

●

side airbags,

●

curtain airbags,

●

a control lamp  on the dash panel

›››

page 79.

●

key-operated switch for front passenger

airbag,

●

a control lamp for disabling/enabling the

front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored

electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-

luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-

nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control

lamp :

●

does not light up when the ignition is

switched on

›››

page 79,

●

turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is

switched on,

●

turns off and then lights up again after the

ignition is switched on,

●

illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is

moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

●

the ignition is switched off

●

there is a minor frontal collision

●

there is a minor side collision

●

there is a rear-end collision

Safety

●

the v

ehicl

e t

urns o

er.

WARNING

●

The seat belts and airbags can only pro-

vide maximum protection if the occupants

are seat

ed correctly

›››

page 64, Correct

position of the vehicle occupants.

●

If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-

tem, have the system checked immediately

by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, dur-

ing a frontal collision the system might not

trigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within

thousandths of a second, t

o pr

vide addition-

al pr

ection in the event of an accident. A

fine dust may develop when the airbag de-

ploys. This is normal and it is not an indication

of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function

when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-

bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-

sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-

over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag system

activating in each situation cannot be gener-

alised. Some factors play an important role,

such as the properties of the object the vehi-

cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle

speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-

vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-

tory and activates the respective restraint

system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-

fined reference value in the control unit the

airbags will not be triggered, even though the

accident may cause extensive damage to the

car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-

ous head-on collisions:

●

Driver airbag.

●

Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri-

ous side-on collisions:

●

Front side airbag on the side of the acci-

dent.

●

Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-

cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

●

the interior lights switch on (if the interior

light switch is in the courtesy light position);

●

the hazard warning lights switch on;

●

all doors are unlocked;

●

the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Safety instructions about

airbags

Front airbags

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 2

WARNING

●

The seat belts and airbags can only pro-

vide maximum protection if the occupants

are seat

ed correctly

›››

page 64, Correct

position of the vehicle occupants.

●

The deployment space between the front

passengers and the airbags must not in

any case be occupied by other passenger,

pets and objects.

●

The airbags provide protection for just

one accident; replace them once they have

deployed.

●

It is also important not to attach any ob-

jects such as cup holders or telephone

Airbag system

mountings to the surfaces covering the air-

bag units.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 22.

WARNING

●

If you do not w

ear a seat belt, if you l

ean

orw

d, or are not seated correctly while

the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater

risk of injury if the side airbag system is

triggered in an accident.

●

In order for the side airbags to provide

their maximum protection, the prescribed

sitting position must always be maintained

with seat belts fastened while travelling.

●

Occupants of the outer seats must never

carry any objects or pets in the deploy-

ment space between them and the airbags,

or allow children or other passengers to

travel in this position. It is also important

not to attach any accessories (such as cup

holders) to the doors. This would impair the

protection offered by the side airbags.

●

The built-in coat hooks should be used

only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave

any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the

pockets.

●

Great forces, such as hard bl

ows or kicks,

must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-

ster because the system may be damaged.

In this case, the side airbags would not be

triggered.

●

Under no circumstances should protec-

tive covers be fitted over seats with side

airbags unless the covers have been ap-

proved for use in your vehicle. Because the

airbag deploys from the side of the back-

rest, the use of conventional seat covers

would obstruct the side airbag, seriously

reducing the airbag's effectiveness.

●

Any damage to the original seat uphols-

tery or around the seams of the side airbag

units must be repaired immediately by a

specialised workshop.

●

The airbags provide protection for just

one accident; replace them once they have

deployed.

●

Any work on the side airbag system or re-

moval and installation of the airbag com-

ponents for other repairs (such as removal

of the front seat) should only be performed

by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,

faults may occur during the airbag system

operation.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

●

The side and head airbags are managed

through sensors located in the interior of

the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-

ation of the side and curtain (head) airbags

neither the doors nor the door panels

should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting

loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-

aged, the airbag system may not w

ork cor-

rectly. All work carried out on the front door

must be done in a specialised workshop.

●

In a side-on collision the side airbags will

not work if the sensors do not correctly

measure the pressure increase on the inte-

rior of the doors, due to air escaping

through the areas with holes or openings in

the door panel.

●

Never drive if the interior door panels

have been removed or if the panels have

not been correctly fitted.

●

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-

ers in the door panels have been removed,

unless the holes left by the loudspeakers

have been closed properly.

●

Always check that the openings are

closed or covered if additional loudspeak-

ers or other equipment are fitted inside the

door panels.

●

Any work carried out to the doors should

be made in an authorised specialised work-

shop.

Head-protection airbags*

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 23

Safety

WARNING

●

In order for the head-protection airbags

o provide their maximum protection, the

prescribed sitting position must always be

maintained with seat belts fastened while

travelling.

●

For safety reasons, the curtain airbag

must be disabled in those vehicles fitted

with a screen dividing the interior of the ve-

hicle. See your technical service to make

this adjustment.

●

There must be no other persons, animals

or objects between the occupants of the

outer seats and the deployment space of

the head-protection airbags so that the

head-protection airbag can deploy com-

pletely without restriction and provide the

greatest possible protection. Therefore,

sun blinds which have not been expressly

approved for use in your vehicle may not be

attached to the side windows

●

The built-in coat hooks should be used

only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave

any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the

pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on

coat hangers.

●

The airbags provide protection for just

one accident; replace them once they have

deployed.

●

Any work on the head-protection airbag

system or removal and installation of the

airbag components for other repairs (such

as removal of the roof lining) should only

be performed by a specialised workshop.

Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-

bag system operation.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag syst

em in any way.

●

The side and head airbags are managed

through sensors located in the interior of

the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-

ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-

ther the doors nor the door panels should

be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-

speakers). If the front door is damaged, the

airbag system may not work correctly. All

work carried out on the front door must be

done in a specialised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Activ

ation and deactiv

ation of fr

ont

passenger airbag*

Fig. 94 Switch for activating and deactivating

the fr

ont passenger airbag.

Fig. 95

Centre of the instrument panel: control

amp f

or deactiv

ed fr

ont passenger airbag in

centre console.

Airbag system

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag

only if you hav

e t

o use a r

ear

-f

acing child

seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the

rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the

front passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switch

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-

vated, this means that only the front passen-

ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other

airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front air-

bag

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the door on the front passenger side.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

›››

Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter;

this is as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If you

have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted

the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp remains lit where it

says      in the centre of the

dash panel

›››

Fig. 95.

Connect the front passenger front airbag

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the front passenger door.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

›››

Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter,

as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If you

have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted

the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp is not lit where it says

     in the centre of the dash

panel

›››

Fig. 95. The   control lamp lights

up for 60 seconds and then goes off.

WARNING

●

The driver of the vehicle is responsibl

e for

disabling or switching on the airbag.

●

Always switch off the ignition before dis-

abling the front passenger airbag! Failure

to do so could result in a fault in the airbag

deactivation system.

●

Never leave the key in the airbag disa-

bling switch as it could get damaged or en-

able or disable the airbag during driving.

●

If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,

reactivate it as soon as possible so that it

can fulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps



It lights up on the combi-instru-

ment

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.

Have the system checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.

 

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag disabled.

Check whether the airbag should remain disabled

 

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger airbag enabled.

The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec-

onds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system

control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi-

cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat

belt tensioner system

›››

. Have the system

check

ed immediat

ely by a specialised w

ork

shop

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,

the warning lamp      re-

mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that

Safety

the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front

passenger airbag deactiv

ed, this l

amp

does not r

emain lit or if it is lit t

ogether with

the control lamp  on the dash panel, there

is a fault in the airbag system

›››

. If the con-

ol l

amp is fl

ashing, ther

e is a f

ault in the dis-

abling of the airbag system

›››

. Have the

syst

em check

ed immediat

ely by a special

ised w

orkshop.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat

belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat

belts may not trigger correctly, may fail t

trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.

●

The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-

taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the

system checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.

●

Do not mount a child seat in the front

passenger seat or remove the mounted

child seat! The front passenger front airbag

may deploy during an accident in spite of

the fault.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control

lamps and to the corresponding descrip-

tions and instructions to av

oid damage to

the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Transporting children

saf

ely

Saf

y f

or chil

dren

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from

accident statistics, we recommend that chil-

en under 12 years of age travel in the rear

seats. Depending on their age, height and

weight, children travelling in rear seats must

use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-

sons, the child seat should be installed in the

rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or

in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces

acting in a collision apply also to children

›››

page 71. But unlike adults, children do not

have fully developed muscle and bone struc-

tures. This means that children are subject to

a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-

ways use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-

ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-

gramme, which includes systems for all ages

made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see

www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-

signed and approved, complying with the

ECE-R44. regul

ation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats

shown on the website as described below:

●

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-

el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket

(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).

●

Child seats in the direction of travel (group

1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX

DUO Plus).

●

Child seats directed towards the front of

the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX

(RÖMER KIDFIX XP

●

Child seats directed towards the front of

the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX

(TATAKI MAXI PLUS

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

observe any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats. Always read

and note

›››

page 81.

We recommend you always carry the manu-

facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-

gether with the on-board documentation.

Transporting children safely

Important information regarding

the fr

ont passenger

's airbag

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 24

Read and always observe the safety informa-

tion included in the following chapters:

●

Safety distance with respect to the passen-

ger airbag

›››

page 74.

●

Objects between the passenger and the

passenger side airbag

›››

in Front airbags

on page 76.

The passenger side fr

ont airbag, when ena-

ed, is a serious risk f

or a chil

d that is f

acing

backward since the airbag can strike the seat

with such force that it can cause serious or

fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old

should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to

transport children on the rear seats. This is

the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-

ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-

bled with a key-operated switch

›››

page 78.

When transporting children, use a child seat

suitable for the age and size of each child

›››

page 82.

WARNING

●

If a child seat is secured to the front pas-

senger seat, the risk t

o the child of sustain-

ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an

accident increases.

●

An inflating front passenger airbag can

strike the r

ear-facing child seat and project

it with great force against the door, the roof

or the backrest.

●

Never install a child seat facing back-

wards on the front passenger seat unless

the front passenger front airbag has been

disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to

the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex-

ceptional cases, to transport a child in the

front passenger seat, the front passenger

front airbag must always be disabled

›››

page 78, Activation and deactivation of

front passenger airbag*. If the passenger

seat has a height adjustment option, move

it to the highest, most upright position. If it

is a fixed seat, it should be moved to the

rearmost position possible.

●

For those vehicles that do not include a

key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,

the vehicle must be taken to a technical

service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-

bag when an adult wants to sit in the front

passenger seat.

●

All vehicle occupants, especially chil-

dren, must assume the proper sitting posi-

tion and be properly belted in while travel-

ling.

●

Never hold children or babies on your lap,

this can result in potentially fatal injuries to

the child!

●

Never allow a chil

d to be transported in a

vehicle without being properly secured, or

to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-

ling. In an accident, the child could be flung

through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal

injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-

cle occupants.

●

If children assume an improper sitting po-

sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex-

pose themselves to greater risk of injury in

the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre

or in an accident. This is particularly impor-

tant if the child is travelling on the front

passenger seat and the airbag system is

triggered in an accident; as this could

cause serious injury or even death.

●

A suitable child seat can protect your

child!

●

Never leave a child alone in the child seat

or inside the vehicle because depending on

the season, very high temperatures may be

reached inside a parked vehicle, which

could be fatal.

●

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall

must not wear a normal seat belt without a

child seat, as this could cause injuries to

the abdominal and neck areas during a

sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-

dent.

●

Do not allow the seat belt to become

twisted and the seat belt should be proper-

ly in place

›››

page 69.

●

Only one child may occupy a child seat

›››

page 82, Child seats.

Safety

●

When a child seat is mounted in the rear

seats, the door child-pr

oof lock should be

activated

›››

page 133.

Child seats

Safety instructions

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 23.

WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured

in the vehicle with a restraint syst

em suita-

ble for age, weight and size.

●

Read and always observe information

and warnings concerning the use of child

seats

›››

page 81.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for

use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system

child seats.

●

ver secure other child seats that do

not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-

tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-

tening rings - this can result in potentially

fatal injuries to the child.

●

Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-

rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

securing rings.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat will

increase the risk of injury in the event of a

crash.

●

ver tie the retainer strap to a hook in

the luggage compartment.

●

Never secure or tie luggage or other

items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or

the upper ones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats into

oups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-

ed and suit

abl

e for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-

R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-

nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-

ries:

Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9

months)

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18

months)

Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4

years old)

Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7

years old)

Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7

years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-

proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129

standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or

ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle

with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

observe any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the

manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual

together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from

the Original Accessories Catalogue. These

child seats have been designed and tested

for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right

child seat for your model and age group at

SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category

Child seats may have the approval category

of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific

(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-

Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

●

Universal: child seats with universal appro-

val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no

need to consult any list of models. In the case

of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child

seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether

belt.

Transporting children safely

●

Semi-univ

ersal

: semi-univ

ersal appr

val,

in addition to the standard requirements of

universal approval, requires safety devices to

lock the child seat, which require additional

testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-

proval include a list of vehicle models for

which they can be installed.

●

Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval

requires a dynamic test of the child seat for

each vehicle model separately. Child seats

with vehicle-specific approval also include a

list of vehicle models for which they can be

installed.

●

i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must

meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-

R 129 standard in relation to installation and

safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you

which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-

cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-

ment syst

ems ar

e used f

or saf

ely inst

alling

child seats.

Attachment systems overview

●

ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-

ment system allowing quick and safe attach-

ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-

tachment establishes a rigid connection be-

tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,

called connectors. These connectors are fit-

ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found

between the seat cushion and the backrest

of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-

FIX attachment systems are used mainly in

Europe

›››



page 27. If necessary, ISOFIX

attachment may have to be supplemented

with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

●

Automatic three-point seat belt. When-

ever possible, it is preferable to attach the

child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than

attaching them with an automatic three-point

seat belt

›››



page 25.

Additional attachment:

●

Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided

over the back of the rear seat and attached

to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points

are located at the back of the rear seat back-

rest on the boot side

›››



page 30. The

rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are

marked with an anchor symbol.

●

Support bracket: some child seats rest on

the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.

The support bracket prevents the child seat

from tipping forward in the event of impact.

Child seats fitted with a support bracket

should only be used in the passenger seat

and side rear seats

›››

. For the assembly of

this t

ype of seat you shoul

d al

so consult the

list of appr

ved vehicles for this assembly,

available in the instructions for child restraint

systems.

Recommended systems for attaching

child seats

SEAT recommends attaching child seats as

follows:

●

Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-

site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support

bracket or iSize.

●

Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-

FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the support bracket can

cause serious or fatal injury.

●

Make sure the suppor

t bracket is correct-

ly and safely installed.

Emergencies

Self

-help

Emer

gency equipment

Emer

gency w

arning triangl

The use of reflective warning triangles is

obligatory in emergencies in some countries.

As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light

bulbs.

The w

arning triangle is under the storage

compartment which is located under the lug-

gage compartment floor.

Note

●

The warning triangle is not part of the ve-

hicl

e's standard equipment.

●

The warning triangle should meet legal

requirements.

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*

The first-aid kit can go in the storage com-

partment which is l

ocat

ed under the luggage

compartment fl

oor

The fir

e extinguisher* is attached to the lug-

gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

Note

●

The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher

are not par

t of the vehicle's standard

equipment.

●

The first aid kit must comply with legal

requirements.

●

Observe the expiry date of the contents

of the first aid kit. After it has expired you

should purchase a new one.

●

The fire extinguisher must comply with le-

gal requirements.

●

Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully

functional. The fire extinguisher should,

therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker

on the fire extinguisher will inform you of

the next date for checking.

●

Before acquiring accessories and emer-

gency equipment see the instructions in

“Accessories and spares”

›››

page 307.

Vehicle tools

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 53

Depending on the equipment, the t

ool

s and

anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor

panel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

●

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

●

Towline anchorage

●

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

●

Jack*

●

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel covers* /

wheel bolt cap clip.

Some of the items listed are only provided in

certain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNING

●

The factory-supplied jack is only de-

signed for changing wheels on this model.

On no account att

empt to use it for lifting

heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-

jury.

●

Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.

●

Never start the engine when the vehicle is

on the jack. Risk of accident.

●

If work is to be carried out underneath the

vehicle, this must be secured by suitable

means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Note

The jack does not generally require any

maintenance. If required, it shoul

d be

greased using universal type grease.

Self-help

Tyre repair

MS (T

e Mobilit

y Syst

em)*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 52

The Anti-punctur

e kit* (Tyre Mobility System)

will reliably seal punctures caused by the

penetration of a foreign body of up to about

4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign

objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,

you must again check the tyre pressure

about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the

vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-

miliar with the procedure and you have the

necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you

should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following

cases:

●

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

●

In outside temperatures below -20°C

(-4°F).

●

In the event of cuts or perforations in the

tyre greater than 4 mm.

●

If you hav

e been driving with very low pres-

sure or a completely flat tyre.

●

If the sealant bottle has passed its use by

date.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-

gerous, especially when filling the tyre at

the roadside

. Please observe the following

rules to minimise the risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-

rounding traffic to fill the tyre.

●

Ensure the ground on which you park is

flat and solid.

●

All passengers and particularly children

must keep a safe distance from the work

area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Use the tyre mobility system only if you

are familiar with the necessary procedures.

Otherwise, you should seek professional

assistance.

●

The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-

porary emergency use only until you can

reach the nearest specialised workshop.

●

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre

mobility set as soon as possible.

●

The sealant is a health hazard and must

be cleaned immediately if it comes into

contact with the skin.

●

Always keep the tyre mobility set out of

the reach of small children.

●

Always stop the engine, apply the hand-

ake lever firmly and engage gear if using

a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the

risk of vehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the

same perf

ormance properties as a conven-

tional t

yre.

●

Never drive faster than 80 km/h

(50 mph).

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering.

●

Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum

speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check

the tyre.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-

ing any legal requirements.

Note

●

A new bottle of sealant can be purchased

at SEAT deal

erships.

●

Take into account the separate instruc-

tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manu-

facturer.

Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility sys-

em*

Fig. 96

Standard display: contents of the anti-

punct

e kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath

the fl

oor co

ering in the luggage compart

ment. It includes the f

ollowing components

›››

Fig. 96:

Valve insert remover

A sticker to be adhered to the instrument

cluster, within the driver's visual field, to

remind that the maximum advisable

speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ON/OFF switch

Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated

in the infl

or t

ube).

arning pr

ovided by tyre pressure moni-

toring system (it can also be integrated in

the inflator tube).

Tube for inflating tyres

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover

has a gap at

the l

er end f

or the v

alve insert. The valve

insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in

this way. This also applies to its replacement

part

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compres-

sor and the inflator tube may become hot.

●

Prot

ect hands and skin from hot parts.

●

Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube

or hot air compressor on flammable mate-

rial.

●

Allow them to cool before storing the de-

vice.

●

If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at

least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is

too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a

good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-

tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-

mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid

verheating! Before switching on the air

compressor again, let it cool for several mi-

nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube

›››

Fig. 96

again

and check the pressure on the gauge

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP

a) and l

er:

●

op the vehicle! The tyre cannot be

sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

●

You should obtain professional assistance

›››

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kP

a) and higher:

●

Set the t

e pr

essur

e to the correct value

again.

●

Carefully resume your journey, without ex-

ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach

the nearest specialised workshop and re-

place the tyre.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous

and can cause accidents and serious in-

jury.

Self-help

●

Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-

sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP

a) and lower.

●

Seek specialist assistance.

Changing the windscreen

wiper blades

Changing the windscreen and rear

window wiper bl

ades

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 61

erfect windscreen wiper blade condition is

essential for clear vision. Damaged wiper

blades should be replaced immediately.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as

standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is

responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.

If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of

the water as it is wiped across the windscreen

will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-

ularly. If the wipers scrape across the

glass, they should be changed if they are

damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty

›››

If this does not pr

oduce the desir

ed r

esults,

the setting angl

e of the windscr

een wiper

arms might be incorrect. They should be

checked by a specialised workshop and cor-

rected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility

through all windows!

●

Clean the windscreen wiper bl

ades and

all windows regularly.

●

The wiper blades should be changed

once or twice a year.

CAUTION

●

Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers

could scr

atch the glass.

●

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint

thinner or similar products to clean the win-

dows. This could damage the windscreen

wiper blades.

●

Never move any windscreen wiper by

hand. This could cause damage.

●

To prevent damage to the bonnet and the

windscreen wiper arms, the latter should

only be lifted off the windscreen when in

service position.

Note

●

The windscreen wiper arms can be

moved to the service position only when

the bonnet is pr

operly closed.

●

You can also use the service position, for

example, if you want to fix a cover over the

windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of

ice.

Towing or tow-starting

General information

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 58.

ow-starting means starting the engine of

the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another

that is not roadworthy.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access

system, towing is only allowed with the igni-

tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is

towed with the engine switched off and the

ignition connected. Depending on the battery

charge status, the drop in voltage may be so

large, even after just a few minutes, that no

electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.

the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheel

could lock up.

WARNING

If the vehicle has no electrical power, the

brake lights, turn signals and all other

Emergencies

lights will no longer function. Do not have

the vehicle tow

ed away. Failure to follow

this instruction could result in an accident.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-

arting, for ex

ample, the towed vehicle

can easily be driven into the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-

cant in the automatic transmission the car

may only be tow

ed with the driven wheels

lifted clear of the road, or transported on a

special car transporter or trailer.

CAUTION

Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in

attempt to start it. Ther

e is risk of damage

to the catalytic converter.

Note

●

Please observe relat

ed legal require-

ments.

●

Switch on the hazard warning lights of

both vehicles. However, observe any regu-

lations to the contrary.

●

The tow rope must not be twisted. Other-

wise the front tow line anchorage could be

pulled off the vehicle.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-

started. The jump star

t should be used in-

stead

›››



page 59.

For technical reasons, towing the following

vehicles is not allowed:

●

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

●

If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-

cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access

locking and ignition system the steering re-

mains locked and the electronic parking

brake cannot be deactivated nor can the

electronic lock of the steering column be re-

leased if they are activated.

●

If the battery is flat, it is possible that the

engine control units may not operate correct

ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be

tow-started (in the case of manual gear-

boxes):

●

Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

●

Keep the clutch pressed down.

●

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-

ing lights.

●

Once both vehicles are moving, release the

clutch.

●

Once the engine starts, press the clutch

and disengage the gear to avoid colliding

with the towing vehicle.

Note

The vehicle can only be tow-started if the

electronic parking brake and, if appr

opri-

ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-

umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no

power supply or there is an electric system

fault, the engine must be tow-started to de-

activate the electronic parking brake and

the electronic lock of the steering column.

Self-help

Anchoring the front tow line

Fig. 97

Right side of the front bumper: remove

the lid.

Fig. 98 Right side of the front bumper: towline

anchor

age scr

ed in.

The front towline anchorage is only mounted

if the v

ehicl

e has t

o be t

wed.

There is a cover with an opening into which

the towline anchorage is screwed on the right

part of the front bumper.

–

Take the towline anchorage from the on-

board tool set.

–

Remove the cover by pressing down on its

right-hand side until it is unclipped

›››

Fig. 97.

–

Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in

the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 98.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and

fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the tow-

line anchorage back in the vehicle tool kit.

The towline anchorage should always be

kept in the vehicle.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 99

Right side of the rear bumper: cover-

cap

Fig. 100 Right side of the rear bumper: towline

anchorage screwed in.

The rear towline anchorage should only be

mount

ed if you wish t

o t

w another v

ehicle.

On the right of the rear bumper there is a

cover which covers a threaded hole.

–

Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-

cle tool set

›››

page 84.

–

Remove the cover by pressing down on its

right-hand side until it is unclipped

›››

Fig. 99.

–

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw

connection as far as it will go

›››

Fig. 100

and tighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and

put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace the

cover on the bumper. The towline anchorage

should always be kept in the vehicle.

Emergencies

WARNING

●

If the towline anchorage is not scre

wed in

as far as the stop, there is a risk of the

screw connection shearing off during tow-

ing (accident risk).

●

If your car has a towing bracket, only use

special towing ropes. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, on-

ly use special tow bars to pre

vent damage

to the ball joint. These tow bars have been

specially approved for use with towing

brackets.

Towing vehicles with a manual

gearbo

Towing is relatively straightforward.

ease observ

e the r

vant instructions

›››

page 87.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or

tow rope in the normal way, with all four

wheels on the road; it can also be towed with

either the front or rear wheels lifted off the

road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h

(30 mph).

Towing a vehicle equipped with au-

tomatic gearbox

Certain restrictions must be observed when

towing your vehicle

Please observe the relevant instructions

›››

page 87.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or

tow rope in the normal way, with all four

wheels on the ground. When doing so, please

note the following points:

●

Make sure the selector lev

er is in the N

position.

●

The vehicle must not be towed faster than

50 km/h (30 mph).

●

The vehicle must not be towed further than

50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine

is not running, the gearbox oil pump does not

work and the gearbox is not adequately lubri-

cated for higher speeds or longer distances.

If the vehicle has to be towed with a break-

down truck, it must only be suspended at the

front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-

cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed

with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.

travelling backwards), the drive shafts also

turn backwards. The planetary gears in the

automatic gearbox then turn at such high

speeds that the gearbox will be severely

damaged in a short time.

Note

●

If it is not possible to tow the v

ehicle in

the normal way, or if it has to be towed fur-

ther than 50 km (30 miles), it must be

transported on a special car transporter or

trailer.

●

Should the power supply to the selector

lever be interrupted in position P, the selec-

tor lever will be locked. Before the vehicle

can be recovered/manoeuvred you must

manually release the selector lever.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Intr

oduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various

electrical components. Likewise, an el

ectrical

component can be protected by several

fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the

problem has been solved. If a newly inserted

fuse blows after a short time, you must have

the electrical system checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system

can give serious electrical shocks, causing

burns and even death!

●

ver touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

●

Take care not to cause short circuits in

the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or

bridging a current circuit without fuses can

cause a fire and serious injury.

●

Nev

er use a fuse with a higher value. Only

replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and

size.

●

Never r

epair a fuse.

●

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-

ple or similar.

CAUTION

●

o prevent damage t

o the vehicle's elec-

tric system, before replacing a fuse always

turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-

trical elements and remove the key from

the ignition.

●

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating

fuse, you could cause damage to another

part of the electrical system.

●

Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-

vent the entry of dust or humidity as they

can damage the electrical system.

●

Always carefully remove the fuse box

covers and refit them correctly to avoid

problems with your vehicle.

Note

●

One component may have more than one

fuse.

●

Sev

eral components may run on a single

fuse.

●

In the vehicle, there are more fuses than

those indicated in this chapter. These

should only be changed by a specialised

workshop.

●

Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-

pear in the follo

wing tables.

●

Some of the equipment listed in the ta-

bles below pertain only to certain versions

of the model or are optional extras.

●

Please note that the above lists, while

correct at the time of printing, are subject

to change.

Fuses to the left of the instrument

panel

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 50

Only r

epl

ace fuses with a fuse of the same

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow Hook 20

2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow Hook 20

Lights switch, steering column LSS

and SML

S, diagnostic port,

ain/light sensor

7.5

Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps

14 Steering Column LSS: wiper control 10

15 Instrument panel 7.5

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 30

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated Rear Window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

Connectivity Box, external audio

sour

ce wiring (Double USB-Aux IN),

telephone amplifier

, MIB display

25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left Lights Power Supply 40

No. Consumer/Amps

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10

Light switch, diagnosis input, head-

lamp range regulat

or, LSS steering

column: lamps, halogen lamps,

switch, reverse gear, electrochromic

mirror, RKA without radio.

7.5

Regulation of unfolded exterior mir-

ors,

7.5

Clut

ch pedal

, ignition r

elays, AA

pressure sensor

7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper

motor, heated nozzles

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5

46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5

Steering Column Lock, Kessy Con-

trol Unit

7.5

49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

58 Double Water Pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

No. Consumer/Amps

60 Tow Hook 30

61 Tow Hook 30

Fuse arrangement in engine com-

partment

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 50

Only repl

ace fuses with a fuse of the same

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

No. Consumer/Amps

MPI Engine Injection Module 10

TSI Engine Injection Module 15

Diesel Engine Injection Module 30

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7),

Low temperat

ure coolant pump

(TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regu-

lating Valve (TJ1), Coolant Valve

AGR (TJ1), High and Low Water

Bumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

Petrol engine pump relay (MPI),

Gauge contr

ol unit (T

SI and diesel)

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps

Pressure transducer, EPW Solenoid

Valve, T

OG Sensor, PWM Electric

fan, Camshaft Control Valve, Active

Carbon Tank Valve and Oil Pressure

Regulating Valve (TSI)

Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 20

Glow plug relay, Suction hose re-

sistance (diesel)

7.5

7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15

Inject

ors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI),

Fuel metering valve (diesel)

Servo sensor 7.5

Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and

BCM

7.5

Engine Injection Module, Main En-

gine Relay, ESC

7.5

Automatic Gearbox DQ200 and

AQ160

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 Starter Motor 30

ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

TH4 Electric fan without A/C for

moderate climate countries

No. Consumer/Amps

TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-

ate climate countries

PTC1 40

J1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric

fan for warm climate countries

TH4 f

an with A/C or T5I for moder-

ate climate countries

PTC2 40

PTC3 40

Changing bulbs

Gener

al not

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 51

Changing bulbs r

equir

es a certain degree of

practical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart-

ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a

dangerous area

›››

in Safety notes for

ork in the engine compar

tment on

page 316

ays use identical bulbs with the same

designation. The name can be found on the

base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,

there are different sets of headlights and tail

lights:

●

Halogen headlights.

●

Full-LED main headlights*

●

Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-

ning lights*

●

Rear bulb light

●

LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions

(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam

and route light) with light emitting diodes

(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the

lifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs cannot

be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to

an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING

●

Take particular car

e when working on

components in the engine compartment if

the engine is warm, there is a risk of burns.

●

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The

glass can break when you touch the bulb,

causing injury.

●

When changing bulbs, please take care

not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the

headlight housing.

Emergencies

CAUTION

●

Remove the ignition key bef

ore working

on the electric system. Otherwise, a short

circuit could occur.

●

Switch off the lights or parking lights be-

fore you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment

Please ask your specialist retailer how to

dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note

●

Depending on weather conditions (cold

or wet), the front lights, the f

og lights, the

tail lights and the turn signals may be tem-

porarily misted. This has no influence on

the useful life of the lighting system. By

switching on the lights, the area through

which the beam of light is projected will

quickly be demisted. However, the edges

may continue to be misted.

●

Please check at regular intervals that all

lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on

your vehicle is functioning properly. This is

not only in the interest of your own safety,

but also that of all other road users.

●

Before changing a bulb, make sure you

have the correct new bulb.

●

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb

with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper

towel instead. The residue left by the fin-

gerprints would vaporise as a result of the

heat generated by the bulb, they will be

deposited on the reflector and will impair

its surf

ace.

●

Depending on the level of equipment fit-

ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for

part or all of the interior and/or exterior

lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that

exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light

fails, go to an authorised workshop for its

replacement.

Change the front bulbs

Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 101

In the engine compartment: main

beam l

amp

–

Raise the bonnet.

–

Turn the cover

anti-clockwise and take it

out

›

Fig. 101

–

emove the bulb connector

by pulling it

outw

ds.

–

emo

e the bulb by pulling it out and fit the

new one.

–

Fit the bulb connector

–

Fit cover

, turning it towards the right.

–

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 102

In the engine compartment: remove

the lid.

Fig. 103 In the engine compartment: dipped

beam l

amp

–

aise the bonnet.

–

e the l

oop

›

››

Fig. 102

in the direc-

tion of the arr

w and r

emo

e the cover.

–

Remove the bulb connector

›››

Fig. 103

–

Unclip the retainer spring

›

Fig. 103

pressing inwards to the right.

–

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so

that the lug on the base fits int

o the r

ecess

on the r

efl

ect

or.

–

Fit the connector.

–

Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure

that the gasket sits well on the casing cover

during the operation.

–

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Turn signal light and DRL (daytime

running light)

Fig. 104

In the engine compartment: turn sig-

nal light bulb

and DRL (daytime running

light) bulb

–

Raise the bonnet.

–

Turn the bulb holder

›

Fig. 104

the l

eft and pull.

–

emo

e the bulb by pr

essing on the bulb

holder and turning it anticlockwise at the

same time.

–

Installation involves all of the above steps in

reverse sequence.

In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light

source cannot be replaced. It is designed to l

ast

the length of the vehicle’s service life. In case of

failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it

replaced.

Emergencies

Fog light bulb

Fig. 105

Fog light: remove the grille

Fig. 106

Fog light: detach the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

er the gr

ve with a screwdriver

›››

Fig. 105 (arrow). Next, unclip the clips

located on the edge of the grille, pulling

on it.

Remove the 3 screws

›››

Fig. 106

and

emo

e the f

og light.

emove the bulb connector

urn the bulb hol

der

to the left and

pull.

emo

e the bulb by pr

essing on it and

urning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Replace the bulb, making sure that the

fixing guides are in the right position and

then press it and turn it clockwise.

To install the headlight go back through

the above steps in reverse.

Check that the bulb works properly.

Change the rear bulbs

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 107

Boot: access to the bolt securing the

ail light unit.

Fig. 108 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail

light.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is def

ectiv

Open the r

ear lid.

emove the lid, levering the flat side of a

screwdriver into the recess

›››

Fig. 107

emo

e the bulb connect

Unscr

w the light securing bolt

hand or using a scr

driv

Remove the light from the body, gently

pulling it toward you, and place on a

clean, smooth surface.

Remove the bulb holder unlocking the

retaining tabs

›››

Fig. 108

Change the damaged bulb

o r

efit f

oll

ow the steps in reverse order,

taking special care when fitting the bulb

Fuses and bulbs

holder. The securing tabs must click into

ace

CAUTION

Take care when removing the rear light unit

to make sure there is no damage t

o the

paintwork or any of its components.

Note

●

Make sure you have a soft cloth r

eady to

place under the glass on the rear light unit,

to avoid any scratches.

●

For LED lights, you can only change the

turn signal and reverse light bulbs.

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 109

Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 110 Remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

Check which of the bulbs is def

ectiv

Open the r

ear lid.

emove the rear lid cover in the direction

indicated

›››

Fig. 109.

Remove the bulb connector

›››

Fig. 110

emo

e the bulb hol

der unl

ocking the

retaining tabs

Change the damaged bulb

Use a cl

oth t

o r

emo

ve any fingerprints

from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse or-

der for assembly and pay special atten-

tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring

that the tabs are properly secured.

Note

●

For LED lights, you can only change the

turn signal and rev

erse light bulbs.

Number plate light

Note

Number plate lights use LED technology.

LEDs have an estimated life that ex

ceeds

than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails,

go to an authorised workshop for replace-

ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 111 Turn signal integrated in the rear view

mirr

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-

ed in the r

ear vie

w mirr

ors.

Emergencies

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-

shop t

o hav

e it r

epl

aced.

Additional br

ake light

Given the difficulty involved in the replace-

ment of this light it should be done by Techni-

cal Services.

Changing the interior bulbs

Interior light and fr

ont reading

lights

Fig. 112

Front reading light.

To remove the glass

–

Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-

ing and the gl

ass

›

Fig. 1

12.

–

Carefully remove the glass, levering it to

avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs

–

Pull the bulbs outwards.

–

To remove the central bulb, hold and press

to one side.

Assembly

–

Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-

tly on the outer edge of the side light.

–

First fit the glass with the fastening tabs

over the frame of the switch. Next press the

front part until the two long tabs click on

the support.

Note

In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to

replace the light sources. If the light does

not work

, take the vehicle to an official

Service.

Luggage compartment light*

Fig. 113

Boot light.

Fig. 114

Boot light.

–

Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside

edge using the fl

at side of a scr

driv

›››

Fig. 113.

–

Disconnect the cable.

–

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from

its housing

›››

Fig. 114.

Fuses and bulbs

–

Change the bulb

–

Connect the cabl

e again.

–

efit the bulb and pr

ess it in until it engages.

Operation

Fig. 115

Dash panel.

100

Controls and displays

Operation

Contr

s and displ

ays

Gener

al instrument panel

Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Door release lever

Control for adjusting electric ext

eri-

or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Air vents

Lever for:

–

urn signals/main beam head-

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

–

Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Depending on equipment fitted:

–

Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Steering wheel with horn and

–

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

–

On-board computer controls . . . . . 116

–

Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

–

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 236

Instrument panel and warning

lamps:

–

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

–

Contr

ol and w

arning l

amps

. . . . . . . 37

ever for:

–

Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 145

–

Wipe and wash system* . . . . . . . . . . . 145

–

Multi-function display control* . . . 108

Infotainment system:

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Depending on the equipment, glove

compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

–

CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 194

Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front passenger airbag disconnec-

tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Switches for:

–

Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

–

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

–

Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Front passenger seat heating con-

trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Gear lever

–

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

–

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Depending on the equipment, but-

tons for:

–

Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

–

Start-Stop operation button . . . . . . . 248

–

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

–

ark assist syst

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

–

e pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . 329

Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-

cess closing and start-up sys-

tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Depending on the equipment:

–

USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

–

Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Driver's seat heating control* . . . . . . . 150

Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-

less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Steering column adjustment lev-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Lever for unlocking the bonnet . . . . . . 17

Light range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Note

●

Some of the equipment listed in this sec-

tion is only fitted on certain model

s or are

optional extras.

●

The arrangement of switches and con-

trols on right-hand drive models* may be

slightly different from the layout shown in

›››

page 101. However, the symbols used to

identify the controls are the same.

101

Operation

Instruments and warn-

ing/contr

ol l

amps

Dashboar

Intr

oduction

Fig. 116 Related video:

Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument

panel digit

al l

ap timer or one Digit

al (SEAT

Cockpit).

Aft

er s

witching the engine on with a 12-volt

battery that is heavily discharged or newly

changed some system settings (such as the

time, the date, the personalised comfort set-

tings and the programming) might be altered

or deleted. Check and correct these settings

once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident,

with the risk of injury.

●

Do not operate the instrument panel con-

trols when driving.

●

To reduce the risk of accident and injury,

only mak

e adjustments to the instructions

on the screen of the instrument panel and

to the instructions on the screen of the Info-

tainment syst

em when the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

102

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 117

Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments

›

Fig. 1

Revolution counter (with the engine run-

ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-

nute)

›››

page 112.

Engine coolant temperature display

›

page 1

or natural gas gauge in

vehicles with natural gas engine (CNG)

›››

page 114

Displays on the screen

›››

page 106.

Adjuster button and display.

Speedomet

Fuel gauge

›

page 113.

103

Operation

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 118 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument

panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:

Engine cool

ant t

emper

e display

›››

page 114

Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-

nute the engine is running

›››

page 112.

Gear engaged or position of the selec-

tor lever currently selected

Screen display

›››

page 106

Speedometer

Digital speed display

Fuel gauge

›››

page 113.

Information Profile

›››

page 104.

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument

panel digit

al with monochr

ome scr

een in col

our high r

esolution. It has a 3 views accessi-

ble using the button 

of the multifunction

eering wheel. By sel

ecting diff

ent inf

or-

mation profiles, indications other than the

classic circular instruments can be displayed,

such as navigation data, multimedia informa-

tion or travel data.

The 3 views are:

Classic View

Digital maps (no information profiles)

Semicircular watches

–

All views will display information on the

screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-

cle status, navigation

and driving aids

In Classic View and Semicircular watches it is

possible to customise the information dis-

played under Information Profiles

›››

Fig. 118

Inf

ormation pr

ofil

With the option

INSTRUMENT PANEL (Inf

otain-

ment button 

/  > Vehicle function

button > View > Instrument cluster)

Depending on the version.

104

Instruments and warning/control lamps

you can choose between the different dis-

ay options of the inf

ormation that appears

in the Digit

al SEAT Cockpit.

assic Vie

The revolutions per minute and speedometer

needles appear along the entire length

›››

Fig. 118.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*

Personalisation of the information that ap-

pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of

these items of information can be displayed

at the same time, but the user chooses which

to display, and in what order, by moving the

finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be

memorised by exiting the menu or keeping

the View button pressed.

●

Consumption. Graphic representation of

the current consumption and digital display

of the average consumption.

●

Audio. Digital display of the current audio

playback.

●

Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-

tude above sea level.

●

Compass. Digital display of the compass.

●

Information about the final destination.

Digital display of the remaining travelling

time, distance to the destination and the esti-

mated time of arrival.

●

Operating range. Digital display of the re-

maining range.

●

Travel time.

●

Route guidance.

●

Journey. Digital display of the distance

travelled.

●

Assistance systems. Graphic representa-

tion of different assistance systems.

●

Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-

ted.

●

Navigation. Graphical representation of

the navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-

ber and the contents of the selectable infor-

mation profiles..

Navigation system in the SEAT

Digital Cockpit*

Fig. 119

Infotainment system: map transfer

butt

Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital

Cockpit can displ

ay a det

ail

ed map

. T

o do

this, select the Navigation option in the

menu menu on the instrument panel

›››

page 107.

Depending on the features or the navigation

map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT

Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on

both at the same time. If it is displayed only in

the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital

Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma-

noeuvres.

Pre-set information depending on the “Driving

mode” selected.

105

Operation

Transfer of navigation map

Using the map tr

ansf

er k

›

Fig. 119, the

map is transferred from the Infotainment sys-

tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver-

sa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-

tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,

you can transfer the map back to the Info-

tainment System.

Display indications

Possible indications on the instrument

panel displ

Diff

ent pieces of inf

ormation can be dis-

ayed on the screen of the instrument panel,

depending on the features of the vehicle.

●

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

●

Warning and information messages

●

Odometer

●

Time

›››

page 111

●

Indications of the radio and navigation sys-

tem

●

Indications of the phone

●

Outside temperature

●

Indications of the compass

●

Selector lever positions

●

Gear-change recommendation

›››

page 240

●

Display of travel data (multifunction dis-

play) and menus for different settings

›››

page 107

●

Service interval display

›››

page 115

●

Speed warning

›››

page 108

●

Speed warning for winter tyres

●

Start-Stop system status display

›››

page 248

●

Indication of the status of active cylinder

management (ACT

)

›››

page 244

●

Low consumption driving 

●

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

●

Driver assistance system display

›››

page 248

●

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-

ing, the instrument panel display shows if any

of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are

opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-

ted by an audible warning. The display may

vary according to the type of instrument pan-

el fitted.

Selector lever positions (dual-clutch

DSG

)

The current position of the selector lever is

shown on the side of the lever and on the in-

strument panel display. When the lever is in

the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in

some cases, the gear engaged in each case

is shown on the instrument panel display.

Outside temperature display

If the outside temperature is lower than ap-

proximately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystal

symbol”  on the outside temperature dis-

play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-

til the outside temperature exceeds +6°C

(+43°F)

›››

When the v

ehicl

e is st

ationary, when the aux-

iliary heat

er is s

witched on or when driving at

very low speeds, the outside temperature in-

dicated may be higher than the actual tem-

perature due to the heat produced by the en-

gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from

-45°C (-49°F) to +76°C (+169°F).

Driving recommendation

While driving, the instrument panel of certain

vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-

tion for saving fuel

›››

page 240.

Odometer

The odometer registers the total distance

travelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-

tance travelled since the last time it was reset

to zero.

106

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:

●

Briefly press the button 0.

0/SET

›››

Fig. 1

to reset the trip recorder to 0.

●

Keep the button 0.

0/SET

pressed for

about 3 seconds and the pr

vious v

alue will

be displ

ayed.

ehicles with digital instrument panel:

●

Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-

ment system or the multifunction steering

wheel

›››

page 108.

Speed warning for winter tyres

If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is

displayed on the instrument panel

›››

page 107.

The speed warning can be adjusted on the

Infotainment system: using button 

/ 

and the SETTINGS > Driver Assistance

›



page 34

butt

on.

Compass indication

Depending on the equipment, when the igni-

tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-

cates the direction in which you are driving

with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and there

is no route guidance active, the graphic rep-

resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving*

Depending on the equipment, when driving,

the  display appears on the instrument

panel when the vehicle is in low consumption

status due to active cylinder management

(ACT

›››

page 244.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:

●

Switch the ignition on, but do not start the

engine.

●

Hold the button 0.0/SET

›

Fig. 1

down for more than 15 seconds to display the

identifying l

ett

ers of the v

ehicl

e engine

Legal text about the property rights and

copyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNING

Even when the outside temperature is high-

er than freezing temperat

ure, some roads

and bridges could be frozen.

●

The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that

there may be a risk of freezing.

●

At outside temperatures above +4°C

(+39°F), there may be ice even when the

“ice crystal symbol” is not on.

●

The outside temperature sensor takes a

guideline measurement.

Note

●

There are different instrument panel

s and

therefore the versions and instructions on

the display may vary. In the case of dis-

plays without warning or information texts,

faults are indicated exclusively by the con-

trol warning lamps.

●

Some indications on the instrument panel

screen may be concealed by a sudden

event, e.g. an incoming call.

●

Depending on the equipment, some set-

tings and instructions can be carried out or

displayed on the infotainment system as

well.

●

If there are several warnings at the same

time, the symbols will be displayed one af-

ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-

bols will stay on until you remove the

cause.

●

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about existing faults, it might not

be possible to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go to a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items

ail

abl

e will depend on the v

ehicl

e’s elec-

tronics and features.

107

Operation

A specialised workshop can programme or

modify additional functions, accor

ding t

o the

ehicl

e equipment. SEAT r

ecommends visiting

a SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read when

the vehicle is stationary.

■

Driving data

›››

page 108

■

Assistance systems.

■

Front Assist On/Off

›››

page 255

■

ACC (only display)

›››

page 259

■

Navigation.

■

Audio.

■

Telephone.

■

Vehicle status

›››

page 110

Service Menu

3 Applies to vehicles with Active Inf

o Display

(Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can be

adjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu

To open up the Service menu, select the

Driving range information profile while in

the Travel data menu, and keep the 

key

essed on the multifunction st

eering wheel

or appr

ximately 4 seconds. When it is re-

leased, the Service menu will be displayed.

Now you can browse through the menu using

the keys on the multifunction steering wheel

as usual.

Restart the service interval display

Select the Service menu and follow the in-

structions on the screen of the instrument

panel.

Restart the oil service

Select the Restore Oil service menu and

follow the instructions on the instrument pan-

el display.

Restart journey data

Select the Reset trip menu and follow the

instructions on the instrument panel display

to reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

Select the menu Engine code. The identify-

ing letters of the engine will be shown on the

instrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clock

Select the Time menu and set the correct

time by turning the right thumbwheel of the

multifunction steering wheel.

Travel data (multifunction indica-

tor)

The display of the travel data (multifunction

display) shows different v

alues about the

journey and the consumption.

Change from one display to another

Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel:

●

press the rocker switch 

on the wind-

screen wiper lever

›

››

page 117.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:

●

Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-

tion steering wheel

›››

page 1

18.

Changing memory (vehicles with ana-

logue instrument cluster)

Press the 

button on the windscreen

wiper l

er or the 

button of the multifunc-

tion st

eering wheel.

108

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Changing memory (vehicles with digital

instrument clust

er)

Whil

e in

Travel data > General infor-

mation pr

ess  on the multi-function steer-

ing wheel t

o s

wit

ch betw

een the 3 memo-

ries

The memory is del

eted if the

journey is interrupted for more than 2

hours.

Display and storage of

the journey data and the consumption

values collected. When refuelling, the

memory is deleted.

This memory contains travel data

up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi-

nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up

to a maximum of 1999.9 km or

9999.9 km. When one of these values is

exceeded (varies depending on the ver-

sion of the instrument panel), the memo-

ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets

●

Select the memory that you wish to erase.

●

Hold the 

button of the multifunction

eering wheel or the 

button of the multi-

Since start

Since refuelling

Long-term

function wheel pressed down for about 2

seconds.

Sel

ect the instructions

In the Inf

ainment syst

em, in the menu V

ehi-

cle settings, you can display different travel

data

›››



page 34.

The current

fuel consumption display operates

throughout the journey, in litres/100 km;

and with the engine running and the ve-

hicle stopped, in litres/hour.

The average

fuel consumption is displayed after driv-

ing for approximately 300 metres.

This indicates the hours

(h) and minutes (min) since the ignition

was switched on.

Approximate distance in

km that can still be travelled if the same

driving style is maintained.

Approxi-

mate distance in km that can still be

travelled with the current level of the

AdBlue

tank with the same driving style.

The indication appears from a range of

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Travelling time

Operating range

Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy 

less than 2,400 km and cannot be de-

activated.

Distance covered in

km (m) after switching on the ignition.

The average speed will be

shown after driving for approximately

100 metres.

Current speed displayed in

digital format.

Displays a list of

the connected comfort systems that in-

crease energy consumption, e.g. air

conditioning.

Set a speed warning

●

Select the display Speed warning at

--- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph.

●

Press the button 

on the windscreen

wiper l

er or the butt

on  on the multifunc-

tion st

eering wheel t

o st

e the curr

ent speed

and activate the warning.

●

Activate: adjust to the desired speed within

5 seconds using the rocker switch 

on the

windscr

een wiper l

er or by t

urning the

thumbwheel on the multifunction steering

wheel. Next, press the button 

or 

Distance travelled

Average speed

Digital speed

Convenience consumers

This will show all data on the display at the

same time: distance travelled, av

erage con-

sumption, average speed and autonomy.

Not available in all countries.

109

Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed is

ed and the w

arning activ

ed.

●

Deactivate: press button 

or button

 . The stored speed is deleted.

The w

arning can be adjust

ed f

or speeds be-

een 30 km/h (

18 mph) and 250 km/h

(155 mph).

Display Oil temperature

The engine reaches its operating tempera-

ture when, under normal driving conditions,

the oil temperature is between 80°C and

120°C. If the engine is under a lot of stress

and the outside temperature is high, the en-

gine oil temperature can increase. This does

not present any problem as long as the warn-

ing lamps  or 

›››

page 318 do not ap-

pear on the display.

Warning and information messages

(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-

nents and functions when the ignition is

wit

ched on and whil

e the v

ehicl

e is moving.

Faults displayed on the instrument panel as

red and yellow warning symbols accompa-

nied with messages and

›››



page 37, de-

pending on the case, even an audible warn-

ing. The representation of the messages and

symbols may vary depending on the version

of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.

To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or

Vehicle

›››

page 107.

The symbol lights

up or flashes (in part accompanied by

audible warnings).  Stop driving! Dan-

ger! Check the fault and eliminate the

cause. If necessary, seek professional

assistance.

The symbol

lights up or flashes (in part accompa-

nied by audible warnings). Operating

faults or the lack of operating fluids can

cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.

Check the faulty function as soon as

possible. If necessary, seek professional

assistance.

It provides informa-

tion about processes in the vehicle.

Note

●

Depending on the equipment, some set-

tings and instructions can be carried out or

displayed on the infotainment syst

em as

well.

●

If there are several warnings at the same

time, the symbols will be displayed one af-

ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-

bols will stay on until you remove the

cause.

Priority 1 warning (red).

Priority 2 warning (yellow).

Information message.

●

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are sho

wn about existing faults, it might not

be possible to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go to a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

Fatigue detection (break recom-

mendation)*

Fig. 120 On the screen of the instrument pan-

: f

atigue det

ection.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver when

their driving behaviour sho

ws signs of f

atigue

Function and oper

ation

atigue detection determines the driving be-

haviour of the driver when starting a journey,

making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-

stantly compared with the current driving be-

haviour. If the system detects that the driver is

110

Instruments and warning/control lamps

tired, an audible warning is given with a

sound and an optic w

arning is sho

wn with a

symbol and compl

ement

ary message on the

instrument panel displ

›››

Fig. 120. The

message on the instrument panel display is

shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-

pending on the case, is repeated. The system

stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display

can be switched off by pressing the 

button on the windscreen wiper lever or the

butt

on 

on the multi function steering

wheel

›

page 1

The message can be recalled to the instru-

ment panel display using the multifunction

display

›››

page 108.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated on

speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to

around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-

vated in the Easy Connect system with the



/  butt

on and the SETTINGS function

button

›



page 34

. A mark indicates

that the adjustment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitations

inherent to the system. The following condi-

tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-

vent it from functioning.

●

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

●

At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

●

When cornering

●

On roads in poor condition

●

In unfavourable weather conditions

●

When a sporty driving style is employed

●

In the event of a serious distraction to the

driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the

vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,

when the ignition is switched off or when the

driver has unbuckled their seat belt and

opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-

od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-

tem automatically re-establishes the tired-

ness calculation. When driving at a faster

speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-

ted.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-

gue detection system tempt you into t

aking

any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,

sufficient in length when making long jour-

neys.

●

The driver always assumes the responsi-

bility of driving to their full capacity.

●

Never drive if you are tir

ed.

●

The system does not detect the tiredness

of the driver in all circumstances. Consult

the information in the section

›››

page 111,

System limitations.

●

In some situations, the system may incor-

rectly interpret an intended driving ma-

noeuvre as driver tiredness.

●

No warning is given in the event of the ef-

fect called microsleep!

●

Please observe the indications on the in-

strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note

●

Fatigue detection has been devel

oped

for driving on motorways and well paved

roads only.

●

If there is a fault in the system, have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-

●

ess the inf

ainment 



/  butt

on.

●

ess the

SETTINGS function butt

on.

●

Sel

ect the menu option Date and time to

set the time

›››



page 34.

111

Operation

Setting the time on analogue the instru-

ment panel

●

To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press

and hol

d the butt

on 0.

0/SET

on the instru-

ment panel until the Time is displ

ayed.

●

ease the butt

on 0.

0/SET

. The time is dis-

ayed on the instrument panel displ

ay and

the hours fiel

d is highlight

ed.

●

Aft

erwards, press the button 0.0/SET

until

the desir

ed time is displ

ayed. T

o scr

oll quick

ly, hold the button 0.0/SET

●

When they have finished setting the hour,

ait until the minut

e fiel

d is mark

ed on the in-

strument panel displ

ay.

●

Immediately after, press the button 0.0/SET

as many times as required until the correct

minut

e is displ

ayed. T

o scr

oll quickly, hol

d the

button 0.0/SET

●

Release the button 0.

0/SET

in order to fin-

ish setting the time

Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digit

Cockpit

●

Whil

e on the

Driving data menu sel

ect

Range (Infotainment button 

/  > View >

Driving data > Range).

●

Press the button 

on the multifunction

eering wheel until the Service menu is dis-

ayed on the instrument panel displ

›

page 108.

●

Select the menu Time.

●

Adjust the correct time by turning the right

thumbwheel of the multifunction steering

wheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-

gine revolutions per minute

Together with the gear-change indicator, the

rev counter offers you the possibility of using

the engine of your vehicle at a suitable

speed.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev

counter indicates the maximum speed in any

gear after running-in and with the engine hot.

However, it is advisable to change up a gear

or move the selector lever to D (or lift your

foot off the accelerator) before the needle

reaches the red zone

›››

e r

ecommend that you av

oid high r

vs and

that you follow the recommendations on the

gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-

al information in

›››

page 240, Gear-change

recommendation.

CAUTION

●

To prevent damage t

o the engine, the rev

counter needle should only remain in the

red zone for a short period of time.

●

When the engine is cold, avoid high revs

and heavy accel

eration and do not make

the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up a gear early will help you to

sav

e fuel and minimise emissions and en-

gine noise.

112

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Fuel level indicator

Fig. 121

Analogue instrument panel: fuel

gauge

Fig. 122 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

Control lamps



It lights up, and in addition, the

lower diode lights up in red

Fuel t

ank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has

been reached

›››

. Refuel as soon as possible.

When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-

es in red.



It lights up yellow

Presence of water in the diesel.

Switch off the engine and request the assistance of

specialised personnel

The display only works when the ignition is

wit

ched on.

The fuel r

ange is displ

ayed on the instrument

panel.

ou can consult the tank capacity of your ve-

hicle in the

›››



page 46 section.

WARNING

When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may

stall in traffic and cause accidents and se-

vere injuries.

●

If the fuel t

ank level is too low, fuel could

reach the engine irregularly, particularly

when driving up or down slopes.

●

The steering system and the driver assis-

tance systems and brakes do not work

when the engine is running irregularly or

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-

lar supply thereof.

●

Alw

ays refuel when there is only one

quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle

to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An

irr

egular fuel supply can cause misfiring

and unburnt fuel could enter the e

xhaust

system. The catalytic converter or the par-

ticulate filter may get damaged!

Note

The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to

the fuel pump symbol points out towards

the side of the v

ehicle with the fuel tank

flap.

113

Operation

Natural gas level (CNG)

3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas en-

gine (CNG)

Fig. 123

Analogue instrument panel: natural

gas gauge

Control lamp



It lights up green

›››

Fig. 123

The vehicle is running with natural gas.

The warning lamp turns off when the natur

al gas runs

out. The engine changes to operate with petrol.



It lights up, and in addition, the

lower diode lights up in red

The fuel r

eserve level has been reached.

When the fuel level is very l

ow, the lower diode flash-

es in red.

The display only works when the ignition is

wit

ched on.

Things t

o not

If the v

ehicle is left parked for a long time im-

mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-

el indicator may not accurately indicate the

same level shown after refuelling when the

vehicle is started up again. This is not due to a

leak in the system, but to a drop in pressure in

the gas tank for technical reasons after a

cooling phase just after refuelling.

Engine coolant temperature dis-

play

Fig. 124

Analogue instrument panel: engine

cool

ant t

emper

e display.

Fig. 125 Digital instrument panel: engine cool-

ant temperature displ

ay.

›››

Fig. 12

›

››

Fig. 125

Cool z

one. The engine has not reached

operating temperature yet. Avoid high en-

gine speeds and stressing the engine if it

has not reached operating temperature.

Normal zone. At high outside tempera-

tures and when making the engine work

hard, the diodes may continue lighting up

and reach the upper zone. This is no

cause for concern, provided the control

lamp does not light up 

Warning area. When the engine is work-

ing hard, especially at high outside tem-

peratures, the diodes may light up in the

warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works

when the ignition is switched on.

114

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Control and warning lamp



It lights up red

 Do not keep driving!

Engine coolant lev

el too low, coolant temperature too

high



Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

●

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and

let it cool down.

●

Check the engine coolant le

vel

›››

page 320.

●

If the w

arning lamp does not switch off even

if the coolant level is correct, request assis-

tance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION

●

To ensure a long useful life f

or the engine,

avoid high revs, driving at high speed and

making the engine work hard for approxi-

mately the first 15 minutes when the engine

is cold. The phase until the engine is warm

also depends on the outside temperature. If

necessary, use the engine oil temperature*

›››

page 110 as a guide.

●

Additional lights and other accessories in

front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-

fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-

atures and high engine loads, there is a risk

of the engine overheating.

●

The front spoiler also ensures pr

oper dis-

tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle

is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can

reduce the cooling effect, which could

cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-

cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on the

instrument panel display and the Infotain-

ment system.

Ther

e are different versions of instrument

panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-

sions and instructions on the screens may

vary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-

gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and

services without engine oil change (e.g. In-

spection).

In vehicles with Services established by

time or mileage, the service intervals are al-

ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-

vals are determined individually. Thanks to

technological progress, maintenance work

has been greatly reduced. Because of the

technology used by SEAT, with this service

you only need to change the oil when the ve-

hicle so requires. To calculate this variation

(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use

and individual driving styles are considered.

The advance warning first appears 20 days

before the dat

e established for the corre-

sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-

maining until the next service are always

rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and

the time is given in complete days. The cur-

rent service message cannot be viewed until

500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-

ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

If a service or an inspection has to be carried

out soon, a service reminder will be dis-

played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres that

can still be travelled or the time until the next

service.

Service due

When the time for a service or an inspec-

tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-

ted when the ignition is switched on and the

fixed key symbol  may appear on the in-

strument panel for a few seconds, along with

one of the following messages:

●

Service now!

●

Request an inspection.

●

Oil service required!

●

Oil service and inspection re-

quired!

115

Operation

Inspection of compressed natural gas

anks (CNG) r

eminder

When l

ess than 90 days f

or the r

eview of the

compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when

the ignition is switched on, the instrument

panel display will a reminder for review of

the gas tanks and an audible warning will be

emitted.

As approaches the service date of inspection

of the gas tanks, the message and the audi-

ble warning will stop modify accordingly.

Check a service warning

With the ignition switched on, the engine off

and the vehicle at a standstill, the current

service notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on the

infotainment system

●

Press the infotainment 

/  butt

on.

●

ess the

SETTINGS function butt

›

››



page 34.

●

Select the Service menu option to display

information about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel

●

Press and hold the button 0.0/SET

›››

Fig. 1

for more than 5 seconds to con-

sult the service message

ehicl

es with digit

al instrument panel

●

The dat

e of the service can only be read

through the Service menu

›››

page 108.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEAT

dealership, the display can be reset as fol-

lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel

●

Switch off the ignition, press and hold the

button 0.0/SET

›

Fig. 1

●

Switch ignition back on.

●

Release the button 0.

0/SET

and press it

again f

or the ne

xt 20 seconds.

ehicl

es with digit

al instrument panel

●

The service interval display can only be re-

set through the Service menu

›››

page 108.

Do not restart the indicator between the

service intervals, otherwise the information

displayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, the

service interval display changes to a fixed

service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible

oil change service.

Note

●

The service message disappears after a

few seconds, when the engine is star

ted or

when OK/RESET

is pressed on the wind-

screen wiper lever, or OK on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel.

●

In vehicles with the LongLif

e system in

which the battery has been disconnected

for a long period of time, it is not possible to

calculate the date of the next service.

Therefore the service interval display may

not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the

maximum service intervals permitted

›››

page 333.

●

If you reset the display manually, the next

service interval will be indicated as in vehi-

cles with fixed service intervals. For this

reason we recommend that the service in-

terval display be reset by a SEAT author-

ised Dealer.

●

If the period of 48 months for an inspec-

tion at a specialised workshop of com-

pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee-

ded, the vehicle may not working in this

mode.

Using the instrument panel

Intr

oduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to

ead the diff

ent functions of the displ

ay by

scr

olling through the menus.

116

Instruments and warning/control lamps

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,

the multifunction displ

ay can only be

oper

ed with the st

eering wheel butt

ons.

Some menu options can only be read when

the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING

Distracting the driver in any way can lead

to an accident and cause injuries.

●

Never use the menus on the instrument

panel display whil

e the vehicle is in motion.

Note

After loading or changing the 12-volt bat-

tery, check the system settings. If the pow-

er supply is interrupt

ed, the system settings

might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the windscreen wip-

er l

Fig. 126

Windscreen wipers lever: control but-

ons.

As long as a priority 1

›

page 1

warning is

active, it will not be possible to access any

menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and

hidden with the button

›››

Fig. 126

Sel

ect a menu or an inf

ormativ

e displ

●

witch the ignition on.

●

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,

press button

; if necessary, several times.

●

To display the menus

›

page 107

or t

o re-

turn to the selection of menus from a menu or

from an informative display, hold down the

rocker button

●

To change from one menu to another, press

the upper or l

er part of the r

ock

er switch.

●

To open the menu or the informative display

shown, press button

or wait a few seconds

until the menu or the inf

ormativ

e displ

opens aut

omatically.

Changing menu settings

●

In the menu displ

ayed, press the upper or

lower part of the rocker switch

until the re-

quir

ed menu option is check

ed. The option

appears fr

amed.

●

ess butt

to make the required modi-

fications. A mark indicat

es that the syst

em or

function is activ

ed.

Back t

o menu selection

Select Back on the corresponding menu to

exit.

Note

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about existing faults, it might not

be possibl

e to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go to a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

117

Operation

Using the multifunction steering

wheel

Fig. 127

Right side of multifunction steering

wheel

: butt

ons t

o the menus and inf

ormativ

e in-

dications on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1

›

page 1

warning is

active, it will not be possible to access any

menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and

hidden with the button 

of the multifunction

eering wheel

›

Fig. 127

Select a menu or an informative display

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,

press the button 

›

Fig. 127

; if necessary,

veral times.

●

To change menus, use buttons  

or  

›

Fig. 127

●

o open the menu or the information dis-

played, press the button 

›

Fig. 127

ait a few seconds until the menu or the in-

formative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings

●

In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-

wheel of the multifunction steering wheel

›››

Fig. 127 until the desired option of the

menu is highlighted. The option appears

framed.

●

Press the button 

›

Fig. 127

o make the

required modifications. A mark indicates that

the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection

Press the button 

or 

›

Fig. 127

Note

If when switching on the ignition warnings

are shown about existing faults, it might not

be possibl

e to change the settings or show

the information as described. In this case,

go to a specialised workshop and request a

repair.

Control and warning lamps

arning symbol

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 37

The contr

ol and w

arning lamps are indicators

of warnings,

›››

, faults

›

or certain func-

tions. Some contr

ol and w

arning l

amps come

on when the ignition is s

wit

ched on, and

switch off when the engine starts running, or

while driving.

Depending on the model, additional text

messages may be viewed on the instrument

panel display. These may be purely informa-

tive or they may be advising of the need for

action

›››

page 102, Dashboard.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the

vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-

times a symbol may be displayed on the in-

strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are

lit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ig-

nored, the vehicle may stall in tr

affic, or

may cause accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or text

messages.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

●

Park the vehicle away from traffic and

ensure that there are no highly flammable

materials under the vehicle that could

come into contact with the exhaust system

(e.g. dry grass, fuel).

118

Instruments and warning/control lamps

●

A faulty vehicle r

epresents a risk of acci-

dent for the driver and for other road users.

If necessary, switch on the hazard warning

lamps and put out the warning triangle to

advise other drivers.

●

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the

engine and allow it to cool.

●

In any vehicle, the engine compartment is

a hazardous area and could cause severe

injuries

›››

page 315.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text

messages when they appear may r

esult in

faults in the vehicle

Multifunction steering

wheel*

Gener

al inf

ormation

The steering wheel includes a multifunction

modul

e fr

om wher

e it is possibl

e t

o control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigation

functions without needing to distract the driv-

er.

There are two versions of the multifunction

module:

●

Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi-

gation version: for controlling the audio

functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,

iPod

®1)

, USB

, SD

) and Bluetooth system

from the steering wheel.

●

Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi-

gation version: for controlling the audio

functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,

iPod

®1)

, USB

, SD

) and Bluetooth system

from the steering wheel.

Depending on the vehicle equipment.

119

Operation

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 128 Controls on the steering wheel.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in telephone

mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need to

be in navigation mode but

there has t

o be an announce-

ment active when you adjust

the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation

announcement.

Activate/deactivate voice control.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicl

e status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s

function is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press: Swit

ch to the

pre

vious/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-

dio/Media functionality (ex-

cept AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other

modes (navigation, assis-

tants, vehicle status, travel

data).

Change instrument panel menu.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicl

e status, travel data).

120

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Coloured instrument panel: change to the previous menu.

Monochrome Instrument panel

: switch to the previous function.

Turn

Coloured instrument panel:

List of stations available (on-

ly if the instrument panel is in

audio menu).

Col

oured instrument panel:

next track (only if the instru-

ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: List

of last calls.

– Active call:

access the call

options list (call on hold,

hang up, mute microphone,

private number, etc.).

– Active route: access the

view to halt guidance to des-

tination.

– No active r

oute: list of previ-

ous destinations.

Press

Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

Applies t

o v

ehicl

es with Activ

e Inf

o Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (radio).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in audio

mode (media).

Turn volume up/down. You

do not need to be in tele-

phone mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need to be in

navigation mode but there has t

be an announcement active

when you adjust the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

Enable/disable voice control

This function can be used from any mode, except with an activ

e call.

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press: Swit

ch to the

pre

vious/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– No active call: Radio/Me-

dia functions (except AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes

(navigation, assistants, vehicle

status, travel data).

121

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Change menu on instrument panel.

Short press

: change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semi-circular clocks

Long press

: access settings of “Individual Profiles”.

Turn

List of sources available

(audio/media).

List of sources available

(audio/media).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-

cent calls list.

– Active call:

go to the call

options list (call in standby,

hang up, mute microphone,

private number, etc.).

If there is a map on the Digital

Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with or

without an active r

oute).

If there is no map on the Digital

Scorecard: the map is transferred

from the Infotainment System dis-

play to the Digital Scorecard

(with and without active route).

Press

No function No function No function No function

Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

122

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system without voice control

Fig. 129 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in telephone

mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need to

be in navigation mode but

there has t

o be an announce-

ment active when you adjust

the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation

announcement.

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long pr

ess).

– Ongoing call: hang up (short press).

– No incoming/ongoing call: open phone menu (short press), repeat last ongoing call (long press).

These functions can be carried out on any mode (audio, media, navigations, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press: Swit

ch to the

pre

vious/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-

dio/Media functionality (ex-

cept AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other

modes (navigation, assis-

tants, vehicle status, travel

data).

Change instrument panel menu.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicl

e status, travel data).

123

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available).

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicl

e status, travel data).

Turn

Coloured instrument panel:

List of stations available (on-

ly if the instrument panel is in

audio menu).

Col

oured instrument panel:

next track (only if the instru-

ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: List

of last calls.

– Active call:

access the call

options list (call on hold,

hang up, mute microphone,

private number, etc.).

– Active route: access the

view to halt guidance to des-

tination.

– No active r

oute: list of previ-

ous destinations.

Press

Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

124

Opening and closing

eys

Set of k

eys

Fig. 130 Set of keys.

The set of keys may consists of the following,

depending on the v

ersion of your v

ehicl

●

a r

emot

e control key

›››

Fig. 130

●

a key without remote control

●

a plastic key tab*

●

two keys with remote control

●

a plastic key tab*

Duplicate keys

If you need a r

epl

acement k

ey, go t

o a T

ech-

nical Service with your vehicle identification

number.

WARNING

●

An incorrect use of the keys can cause

serious injuries.

●

Never l

eave children or disabled persons

in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they

may not be able to leave the vehicle or

manage on their own.

●

An uncontrolled use of the key could start

the engine or activate any electric equip-

ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk

of accident. The doors can be locked using

the remote control key. This could become

an obstacle for assistance in an emergen-

cy situation.

●

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.

An unauthorised use of your vehicle could

result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore

always take the key with you when you

leave the vehicle.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the

steering could suddenly block and it would

be impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

There are electronic components in the re-

mote control key. Avoid w

etting and hitting

the keys.

Remote control*

Fig. 131

Assignment of buttons on the remote

contr

ol k

ey.

Fig. 132 Vehicle key with alarm button.

The radio frequency remote control key is

used t

o l

ock and unl

ock the v

ehicl

e from a

distance.

By using button

›

Fig. 131

on the contr

ol,

the key shaft is released.

Unlocking the vehicle



›››

Fig. 131

125

Operation

Locking the vehicle 

›

Fig. 131

Unl

ocking the r

ear lid. Pr

ess butt



›››

Fig. 131

until all the turn signals on the

ehicl

e fl

ash briefly. When the unl

ocking but

ton 

is pressed, you have 2 minutes to

open the door

. Once this time has passed, it

will l

ock again.

Mor

er, the battery indicator on the key

›››

Fig. 131 (arrow), will flash.

The remote control transmitter and the bat-

teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is

inside the vehicle. The maximum range de-

pends on different factors. The range is re-

duced as the batteries start to lose power.

Alarm button*

Only press alarm button in the event of an

emergency

›››

Fig. 132

! When the al

arm

butt

on is pr

essed, the v

ehicl

e horn is heard

and the turn signals are switched on for a

short time. When the alarm button is pressed

again, the alarm is switched off.

WARNING

Read and observe the relevant warnings

›››

in Set of keys on page 125.

Note

●

The remote control key w

orks only when

you are in its scope.

●

If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or

ocked by using the radio frequency remote

control, the remote control key will have to

be re-synchronised. For this, go to your

technical services.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 133 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-

partment.

Fig. 134

Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised

orkshop t

o r

epl

ace the batt

ery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-

cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››

page 125.

●

Remove the cover from the back of the ve-

hicle key

›››

Fig. 133 in the direction of the ar-

row

›››

●

Extract the battery from the compartment

using a suit

abl

e thin ob

ject

›

Fig. 134.

●

Place the new battery in the compartment

as shown

›››

Fig. 134, pressing in the opposite

direction to that shown by the arrow

›››

●

Fit the cover as shown

›

Fig. 133

, pr

essing

it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite

direction to that shown by the arrow until it

clicks into place.

CAUTION

●

If the battery is not changed correctly,

the vehicle k

ey may be damaged.

●

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage

the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

place the dead battery with another of the

same voltage, size and specifications.

●

When fitting the battery, check that the

polarity is correct.

126

Opening and closing

For the sake of the environment

Please dispose of your used batteries cor-

rectly and with respect for the environ-

ment.

Synchronising the remote control

key

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door

with the remote control, it should be r

synchronised.

While the vehicle is open:

–

Press button 

›

Fig. 131

on the r

emote

control.

–

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft

within one minute.

While the vehicle is closed:

–

Press button 

›

Fig. 131

on the r

emote

control.

–

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft

within one minute.

If the  is pressed repeatedly outside the

range of action of the remote control, the ve-

hicle may not open or close when using the

remote control. The remote control key will

have to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are available at

your Technical Service, where they must be

matched to the locking system.

Up to five remote control keys can be used.

Central locking system

Description

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 15.

The centr

al locking system enables you to

lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by

just pushing the button.

Central locking can be activated by using

any of the following options:

●

the key, by inserting it into the driver door

cylinder and rotating it in the opening dir

ec-

tion. Depending on the vehicle version, either

all doors will be unlocked or only the driver

door will be unlocked. All doors will be locked

on locking the vehicle using the key.

●

the interior central lock button

›››

page 129.

●

the radio frequency remote control, us-

ing the buttons on the key

›››

page 125.

Various functions are available to improve the

vehicle safety:

Locking system “Safe*”

Selective* unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involunta-

ry unlocking

Automatic speed dependent locking and

unlocking system*

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press the  button

›››

Fig. 131 on the re-

mote control to unlock all the doors and

the rear lid.

Locking the vehicle*

Press the  button

›››

Fig. 131 on the re-

mote control to lock all doors and the

rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock

all doors and the rear lid.

WARNING

●

Locking from the outside carelessly or

without good visibilit

y may lead to bruising,

particularly in the case of children.

●

When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-

dren unaccompanied inside, as from the

outside it will be difficult to provide assis-

tance if required.

●

Having the doors locked prevents intrud-

ers from getting in, for example when stop-

ped at a traffic light.

–

127

Operation

Note

For anti-theft security, only the driver door

is fitted with a lock cylinder.

“Safe” security system*

This is an anti-theft device which consists of a

double lock for the door locks and a deacti-

ation function for the boot in order to prevent

forced entry.

Activation

The “safe” system is activated when the vehi-

cle is locked using the key or the remote con-

trol.

To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in-

serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking

direction.

To activate the system using the remote con-

trol, press the lock button once  on the re-

mote.

Once this system is activated, opening doors

from the outside and the inside is not possi-

ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen-

tral lock button does not work.

When the ignition is switched off, the instru-

ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”

system is on.

Deactiv

ation

Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder

twice towards the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con-

trol, press the lock button  on the remote

twice in less than 5 seconds.

On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm

volumetric sensor is also deactivated.

With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be

opened from the interior but not from the ex-

terior.

See “Selective unlocking system*”

“Safe” status

On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-

ble from outside the vehicle through the win-

dow which shows the “Safe” system status.

We will know that “Safe” system is activated

by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator

will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted

with an alarm, until they unlock.

Remember:

Safe enabled with or without alarm: con-

tinuous flashing of warning lamp.

Safe disabled without alarm: the warning

lamp stays off.

Safe disabled with alarm: the warning lamp

stays off.

WARNING

No one should remain inside the vehicle if

the “Safe” system is activated because

opening the doors will not be possibl

e in

the event of an emergency neither from the

inside nor the outside and help from the

outside is made difficult. Danger of death.

Passengers could become trapped inside

in case of emergency.

Selective unlocking system*

This system allows to unlock either just the

driv

er door or all the v

ehicl

Driv

er door unlock button

Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote

control.

Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder,

rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver

door will remain without “Safe” and unlocked.

Available depending on market and version.

128

Opening and closing

In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see the Anti-

theft Al

arm section

›

page 133

Using the remote control, press the unlock

button on the remote  once. The “Safe” sys-

tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the

driver door is unlocked and both the alarm

and the warning lamp are also turned off.

Unlocking all doors and the luggage com-

partment

The unlock button on the remote control 

must be pressed twice so that all doors and

the luggage compartment can be opened.

Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate

the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all

doors and to use the luggage compartment.

The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi-

cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Unlocking the luggage compartment

See

›››



page 16.

Self-locking system to prevent in-

voluntary unlocking

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-

int

entional unl

ocking of the v

ehicl

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the

doors (including the boot) are opened within

30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Automatic speed-dependent lock-

ing and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevents access

to the vehicle from the outside when it is run-

ning (e

.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors will lock automatically if the speed

of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid

will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h

(4 mph) is exceeded.

If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors

open, when starting again and exceeding the

mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.

Unlocking

On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle

will returns to its status prior to self-locking.

Each door can be unlocked and opened in-

dependently from the inside (for example,

when a passenger gets out). To do it, simply

operate the lever inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated

when the vehicle is running: the door would

open.

Note

If the airbags are triggered during an acci-

dent, the vehicle is unlocked, e

xcept for the

luggage compartment. It is possible to lock

the vehicle from inside with the central

locking, after turning the ignition off and

back on again.

Central lock button*

Fig. 135

Central lock button.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 15

The centr

al l

ock button allows you to lock

and unlock the vehicle from the inside.

The central lock button also works with the

ignition switched off, except when the “safe”

system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your ve-

hicle with the central lock button:

129

Operation

●

ocking the doors and r

ear lid pr

ents ac-

cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.

when stopped at a traffic light).

●

The driver door cannot be locked while it is

open. This avoids the user from forgetting his

key inside the vehicle.

●

All doors can be unlocked separately from

inside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door re-

lease lever once.

WARNING

●

If the vehicle is locked, chil

dren and disa-

bled people may be trapped inside it.

●

Repeated operation of central locking

will prevent the central lock button from

working for a few seconds. Then, it can only

be unlocked in case it has been previously

locked. After few seconds, the central lock-

ing becomes operative again.

●

The central lock button is not operative

when the vehicle is locked from the outside

(with the remote control or the key).

Related videos Keyless Access

Fig. 136 Convenience

Fig. 137 Technology

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

with Keyless Access*

Fig. 138

Keyless Access locking and ignition

syst

em: In the pr

ximit

y of the car

Fig. 139 Locking and ignition system without

Keyless Access: sensor surface

for unlock-

ing inside the door handle and sensor surface

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle

may hav

e the K

eyl

ess Access syst

em.

eyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-

tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle

without actively using its key. To do this, all

that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in

the detection area where you are attempting

to access the vehicle

›››

Fig. 138 and to touch

one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles

›››

Fig. 139

›››

The v

ehicl

e can be unl

ock

ed and l

ocked via

the driver door only. When doing so, the re-

mote control key must be no further than ap-

prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,

for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket

or in a briefcase.

130

Opening and closing

Once the doors have been locked, they can-

not be opened again immediat

ely. This will

enabl

e you t

o check that the doors ar

e pr

op-

erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock

only the driver’s door, the side being un-

locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessary

adjustments can be performed in vehicles

with a driver information system

›››



page 34.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of the

car

›››

Fig. 138, the Keyless Access locking

and starting system gives the key entry as

soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the

driver door handle is touched. The following

features are then available without having to

use the vehicle key actively:

●

Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using

the handle of the front driver’s door or the

softtouch/handle on the rear lid.

●

Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the

sensor on the driver door handle.

●

Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine

with the starter button

›››

page 220.

The central locking and locking systems op-

erate in the same way as a normal locking

and unlocking system. Only the controls

change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a

double flash of the indicator lights; locking by

a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and

the rear lid are closed leaving the last key

used inside the vehicle and none outside, the

vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-

hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.

The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if

you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-

onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open

any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Key-

less-Entry)

●

Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, the

sensor surface

›››

Fig. 139

(arrow) on the

handl

e is t

ouched and the v

ehicl

e unl

ocks.

●

Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-

tainment system configuration, pulling the

door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without safety system “Safe”:

closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-

it)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface

(arrow) on the driver door handle. The door

that is used must be cl

osed.

In v

ehicl

es with saf

y system “Safe”:

closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-

it)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface

(arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehicle

ocks with the “Saf

e” securit

y syst

›

››

page 128. The door that is used must be

closed.

●

Touch (twice) the sensor surface

(arrow)

of the driv

er door handl

e t

o l

ock the v

ehicle

without activating the “Safe” security system

›››

page 128.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-

matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-

id vehicle key in the proximity

›››

Fig. 138.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If

the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid

will not lock automatically after closing it.

131

Operation

What happens when locking the vehicle

with a second k

If ther

e is a v

ehicl

e k

ey inside the vehicle and

it is locked from the outside with a second ve-

hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked

for engine ignition

›››

page 217. In order to

enable engine ignition, press the  button on

the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a

long period of time, the proximity sensors on

the passenger doors are automatically disa-

bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles is often activated in an unusual manner

with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity

sensors are disabled for a certain period of

time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

●

After a time.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-

ton  on the key.

●

OR: if the boot is opened.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with

the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection

function*

You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-

cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking

cycle.

●

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-

hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-

wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

●

Close the door.

●

Push the central locking button  on the re-

mote control and touch the locking sensor

surface of the driver door handle

›››

Fig. 139

within the following 5 seconds.

Do not gr

asp the door handl

e; otherwise the

ehicl

e will not unl

ock. Deactivation is also

possible if the vehicle is locked through the

driver’s door lock.

●

To check that the function has been deacti-

vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

on the door handle. The door should not

open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked

via the remote control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,

Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows using the

convenience function, keep a finger on the

locking sensor surface

(arrow) of the door

handle for a few seconds until the windows

hav

e cl

osed.

The

doors opened

by t

ouching the sensor

surface of the door handle depend on the

settings that have been activated in the Easy

Connect system with the 

/  butt

on and

the

SETTINGS > Opening and closing

function butt

ons.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handles

could engage if hit with a water jet or high

pressur

e steam if there is a valid vehicle

key in the proximity. If at least one of the

electric windows is open and the sensor

surface

(arrow) on the handle is activa-

ted continuously, all windows will close.

Note

●

If the vehicle battery has little or no

char

ge, or the vehicle key battery is almost

or entirely out of charge, you will probably

not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle

with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-

cle can be unlocked or locked manually.

●

To control the proper locking of the vehi-

cle, the release function is disabled for ap-

prox. 2 seconds.

●

If the message Keyless access system

faulty is displayed on the screen of the

dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the

operation of the Keyless Access system.

Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT

132

Opening and closing

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this.

●

Depending on the function set on the in-

fotainment system for the mirr

ors, the exte-

rior mirrors will unfold and the surround

lighting will come on when unlocking the

vehicle using the sensor surface on the

driver door handle.

●

If there is no valid key inside the vehicle

or the system fails to detect one, a warning

will display on the dash panel screen. This

could happen if any other radio frequency

signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.

from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. an

aluminium case).

●

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a

layer of salt, the correct functioning of the

sensors on the door handles may be affec-

ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the

gear stick is in position P.

●

To improve the safety of your vehicle, the

remote control of the system is equipped

with a position sensor. If this remote control

does not detect movement for a certain

length of time, the system will conclude

that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on

a night table) so it will be disabled.

Childproof lock

Fig. 140

Childproof lock on the left hand side

door

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors

om being opened fr

om the inside

. This sys-

em pr

events minors from opening a door ac-

cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle

electronic opening and locking systems. It

only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-

ted and deactivated manually, as described

below:

Activating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof

lock.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the left-hand side doors

›››

Fig. 140 and

clockwise for the right-hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-

vate.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the right-hand side doors, and clock-

wise for the left-hand side doors

›››

Fig. 140.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the

door can only be opened from the outside.

The childproof lock can be activated or de-

activated by inserting the key in the groove

when the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm*

Description of anti-theft alarm sys-

tem*

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to

eak int

o the v

ehicl

e or st

eal it. The system

will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-

nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically

switched on when locking the vehicle. The

system is immediately activated and the turn

133

Operation

signal light located on the driver door will

ash al

ong with the t

urn signal

s, indicating

that the al

arm and the locking security sys-

tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,

they will not be included in the protection

zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-

nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-

quently closed, they will be automatically in-

cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle

and the turn signals will flash accordingly

when the doors close.

●

The turn signal light will flash twice on

opening and deactivating the alarm.

●

The turn signal light will flash once on clos-

ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm, if the following

unauthorised actions are carried out when

the vehicle is locked:

●

Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the

vehicle key without switching on the ignition in

the next 15 seconds (in certain markets, such

as the Netherlands, the alarm is activated im-

mediately).

●

A door is opened.

●

Opening the bonnet.

●

The rear lid is opened.

●

Ignition switched on with a non-validated

key.

●

Movements in the driving compartment (ve-

hicles with a volume sensor).

●

Towing of the vehicle

●

Vehicle tilt angle

●

Undue manipulation of the alarm.

●

Battery handling.

In this case, the acoustic signals will go off

and the turn signal will flash for approximate-

ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated

up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening all the doors in manual mode

In vehicles without an alarm, when opening

the driver door manually, all doors are

opened.

How to switch the alarm off

To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the

key in the opening direction, open the door

and switch the ignition on, or press the unlock

button  on the remote control.

In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm

system, you have 15 seconds to insert the key

in the ignition lock and activate the ignition if

the vehicle is opened using the driver door

key.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.

and the ignition will be blocked.

Note

●

After 28 days, the indicator light will be

switched off t

o prevent the battery from

draining if the vehicle has been left parked

for a long period of time. The alarm system

remains activated.

●

The alarm will trigger again if attempts

are made to open another protection zone.

●

The alarm system can be activated or

deactivated using the radio frequency re-

mote control

›››

page 125.

●

The anti-theft alarm is not activated

when the vehicle is locked from within using

the central locking button .

●

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat

then the anti-theft alarm will not operate

correctly.

●

Vehicle monitoring remains active even if

the battery is disconnected or not working

for any reason.

●

The alarm is triggered immediately if one

of the battery cables is disconnected while

the alarm system is active.

With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection

134

Opening and closing

Vehicle interior monitoring and an-

ti-t

w syst

em*

Monitoring or control function incorporated in

the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau-

thorised vehicle entry by means of ultr

sound.

Activation

–

It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation

–

Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the  button on

the remote contr

ol. If the vehicle is opened

mechanically, the time period from when

the door is opened until the key is inserted

into the contact should not exceed 15 sec-

onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

–

Press the  button on the remote control

twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-

sors will be deactivated. The alarm system

remains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system are automatically switched on

again next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-

ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched

on. In order to activate it, all the doors and

the rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior

monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must

be done each time that the vehicle is locked;

if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system should be switched off if animals

are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,

their movements will trigger the alarm) or

when, for example, the vehicle is transported

or has to be towed with only one axle on the

ground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctly

if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-

serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false

alarm:

●

Open windows (partially or fully),

●

Movement of objects inside the vehicle,

such as loose papers, items hanging from the

rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

●

If the vehicle is relock

ed and the alarm is

activated without the volumetric sensor

function, relocking will activate the alarm

with all its functions, except the volumetric

sensor. This function is reactivated when

the alarm is switched on again, unless it is

deliberately switched off

●

If the alarm has been triggered by the

volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by

a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver

door when the vehicle is opened. The flash

is different to the flash indicating the alarm

is activated.

●

The vibration of a mobile phone left in-

side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-

terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both

sensors react to movements and shakes in-

side the vehicle.

●

If on activating the alarm, any door or the

rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-

vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and

the anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including the

rear lid).

Deactivating the vehicle interior

monit

oring and anti-t

w syst

em*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be

trigger

ed if mo

ements ar

e det

ected in the in-

terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli-

nation is changed (e.g. during transport). You

can prevent the alarm from being triggered

accidentally by switching off the vehicle inte-

rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection.

–

To switch off the interior monitoring and

tow-away protection, switch off the ignition

135

Operation

and, using the Infotainment system, select:

Inf

ainment butt

on 

 /  and then the

SETTINGS > Opening and closing >

Central locking > Vehicle interior

monitoring butt

on.

–

When the v

ehicl

e is l

ock

ed now, the vehicle

interior monitoring and the tow-away pro-

tection are switched off until the next time

the door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*

›››

page 128 is switched off, the vehicle interi-

or monitoring and the tow-away protection

are automatically switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in De-

scription on page 127.

Rear lid

Opening and cl

osing

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 16

WARNING

●

Always close the rear lid pr

operly. Risk of

accident or injury.

●

The rear lid must not be opened when the

reverse or r

ear fog lights are lit. This may

damage the tail lights.

●

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it

down with your hand on the rear window.

The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

●

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing

it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while

driving.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjec-

ted to extremely high and low tempera-

tures, depending on the time of year, thus

causing serious injuries/illness. It could

even have fatal consequences. Close and

lock both the rear lid and all the other

doors when you are not using the vehicle.

●

Closing the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear could cause serious

injury to you and to third parties. Make sure

that no one is in the path of the rear lid.

●

Never drive with the rear lid open or half-

closed, exhaust gases may enter into the

interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

●

If you only open the rear lid, do not leave

the key inside. The vehicle cannot be

opened if the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Opening and cl

osing the el

ectric

windo

Fig. 141

Detail of the driver door: controls for

the fr

ont and r

ear windo

ws.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 18

The fr

ont and r

ear electric windows can be

operated by using the controls on the driver

door. The other doors each have a switch for

their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the

vehicle or leave it unattended

›››

ou can use the el

ectric windo

ws f

or appr

ox.

10 minutes after switching off the ignition if

neither the driver door nor the front

136

Opening and closing

passenger door has been opened and the

ey has not been r

emo

ed fr

om the ignition.

Safety switch 

The safety switch

›››

Fig. 141

on the driver

door can be used t

o disabl

e the el

ectric win-

w butt

ons on the rear doors.

●

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear

doors are activated.

●

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear

doors are deactivated. The safety control

symbol  lights up in yellow if the buttons on

the rear doors are switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Set of

keys on page 125.

●

Incorrect use of the electric windo

ws can

result in injury.

●

Never close the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise

could cause serious injury to you and third

parties. Make sure that no one is in the path

of a window.

●

If the ignition is switched on, the electric

equipment could be activated with risk of

injury, for example, in the electric windows.

●

The doors can be locked using the re-

mote control key. This could become an

obstacle for assistance in an emergency

situation.

●

Therefore alw

ays take the key with you

when you leave the vehicle.

●

The electric windows will work until the

ignition has been switched off and one of

the front doors has been opened.

●

If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-

able the rear electric windows. Make sure

that they have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because it

is stiff or because of an obstruction, the

windo

w will automatically open again

›››

page 137. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before at-

tempting to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-

jury when the el

ectric windo

ws cl

ose

●

If a windo

w is obstructed when closing au-

tomatically, the window stops at this point

and lowers immediately

›››

●

Next, check why the window does not close

bef

e att

empting it again.

●

If you try within the f

oll

owing 10 seconds

and the window closes again with difficulty or

there is an obstruction, the automatic closing

will stop working for 10 seconds.

●

If the window is still obstructed, the window

will stop at this point.

●

If there is no obvious reason why the win-

dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by

pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-

dow closes with maximum force. The roll-

back function is now deactivated.

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will

open fully when you operate one of the but-

tons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING

●

Always take the ignition k

ey with you

when leaving the vehicle, even if you only

intend to be gone for a short time. Please

ensure that children are never left alone in-

side the vehicle.

●

The electric windows will work until the

ignition has been switched off and one of

the front doors has been opened.

●

Closing the windows without observing

and ensuring it is clear could cause serious

injury to you and third parties. Make sure

that no one is in the path of a window.

●

Never allow people to remain in the vehi-

cle when you close the vehicle from the

outside. The windows cannot be opened

even in an emergency.

●

The roll-back function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame. Risk of

accident.

137

Operation

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-

tion to easily open/close all the windows

from the outside

Convenience open function

–

Press and hold the  button on the remote

control key until all the windows have

reached the desired position, or

–

First unlock the vehicle using the  button

on the remote control key and then keep

the key in the driver door lock until all the

windows have reached the required posi-

tion.

Convenience close function

–

Press and hold the  button on the remote

control k

ey until all the windows are closed

›››

, or

–

Lock the driver's door with the key and hold

the k

ey in the l

ock position until all the win-

ws ar

e cl

osed

Programming convenience opening in the

Easy Connect*

–

Select: 

/  SETTINGS> Opening and

closing > Electric windows > Con-

venience opening, t

o choose betw

een all

the windo

ws (

All), only the driv

er’s window

(Driver) or none (Deactivated).

WARNING

●

Never close the windows without due

car

e or proper control. There is a risk of suf-

fering injury.

●

For safety reasons, you should only use

the remote control open and close func-

tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.

To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the

windows when pressing the button to close

them. The windows stop moving as soon as

the button is released.

One-touch opening and closing*

One-touch opening and closing means you

do not hav

e t

o hol

d do

wn the butt

on.

Buttons

›››

Fig. 141

and

have two

positions f

or opening windo

ws and tw

o f

osing them. This makes it easier to open

and close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

–

Pull up the window button briefly up to the

second position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening

–

Push down the window button briefly up to

the second position. The window opens

fully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

–

The automatic open and close function will

not work if the battery has been temporarily

disconnected. The function can be restored

as follows:

–

Close the window as far as it will go by lift-

ing and holding the electric window switch.

–

Release the switch and then lift it again for 1

second. This will re-enable the automatic

function.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage,

the window will open (or close) until you re-

lease the button. If you push or lift the button

briefly to the second stage, the window will

open (one-touch opening) or close (one-

touch closing) automatically. If you operate

the button while the window is opening or

closing, it stops at this position.

138

Lights and visibility

Lights

Contr

ol l

amps



It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.



It lights up

Rear fog light switched on

›››

page 140.



It lights up

Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a t

urn

signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on

›››

page 143.



It lights up

Trailer turn signals



It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on

›››

page 140.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Warn-

ing symbols on page 118.

Switching lights on and off

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 31

The driver is personally r

esponsible for the

correct use and adjustment of the lights in all

situations.

Note

●

The legal requirements regar

ding the use

of vehicle lights in each country must be

observed.

●

The dipped beam headlights will only

work with the ignition on. The side lights

come on automatically when the ignition is

turned off.

●

If the lights are left on after the key has

been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi-

ble warning sounds while the driver door

remains open. This is a reminder to switch

the lights off.

●

The use of the lighting described here is

subject to the relevant statutory require-

ments.

Automatic dipped beam control



*

The automatic dipped beam control is merely

intended as an aid and is not able to recog-

nise all driving sit

uations.

When the light switch is in position , the

vehicle lights and the instrument panel and

switch lighting switch on and off automatical-

ly in the following situations

›››

in Daytime

running lights on page 140:

Automatic switch-

ing on

Automatic switch-

ing off

The photo sensor de-

tects darkness, for e

xam-

ple, when driving through

a tunnel.

When adequate lighting

is detected.

The rain sensor detects

rain and activates the

windscreen wipers.

When the windscr

een

wipers have been inac-

tive for a few minutes.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road

users cannot see the vehicle well enough

or at all, accidents may occur.

●

The aut

omatic dipped beam control

() only switches on the dipped beam

when there are no changes in brightness,

and not, for example when it is foggy.

139

Operation

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu-

al lights, integrated in the front headlights. By

connecting the daytime running lights, these

lights ar

e switched on

›››

The daytime running lights switch on every

time the ignition is s

witched on, if the switch is

in positions  or , according to the level of

exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light

sensor automatically switches dipped beam

on and off (including the control and instru-

ment lighting) or the daytime running lights

depending on the level of exterior lighting.

WARNING

●

Never drive with daytime lights if the road

is not w

ell lit due to weather or lighting

conditions. Daytime lights do not provide

enough light to illuminate the road properly

or be seen by other road users.

●

On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,

when activating the daytime running light

the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-

cle which does not have the rear lights on

may not be visible to other drivers in the

darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in

conditions of poor visibility.

Fog lights

Fig. 142

Instrument console: light panel.

Switching on the front fog lights*

●

Pull the light switch to the first point

›

Fig. 14

, from positions ,  or .

The symbol  in the light s

wit

ch lights up

wit

ching on the rear fog light (vehicles

with front fog lights)

●

Completely pull the light switch

from

position ,  or 

. The  l

amp on the in-

strument panel lights up

wit

ching on the rear fog light (vehicles

with no front fog lights)

●

Completely pull the light switch

from

position ,  or 

. This t

ype of s

wit

ch on-

ly has one position. The

 lamp on the instru-

ment panel lights up.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 32

Parking lights

●

witch the ignition off and remove the key

from the lock.

●

Move the turn signal lever up or down to

turn the right or left-hand parking lights on,

respectiv

ely.

Convenience turn signals

For the one-touch signalling, when the igni-

tion is switched on, move the lever as far as

possible upwards or downwards and release

the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-

vated in the Easy Connect system via the



/  butt

on and the function button SET-

TINGS > Lights > One-touch signal-

ling

›



page 34

On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the

rear side light is switched on as well.

140

Lights and visibility

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-

ing menu, this function can be deactiv

ed in

a specialised w

orkshop

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle other drivers.

Risk of accident! Never use the main beam

headlights or the headlight flasher if they

coul

d dazzle other drivers.

Note

●

If the convenience turn signals are oper

ating (three flashes) and the other conven-

ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-

tive part stops flashing and only flashes

once in the new part selected.

●

The turn signals only work when the igni-

tion is switched on. The corresponding

warning lamp   flashes in the instrument

panel. The control lamp  flashes when

the turn signals are operated, provided a

trailer is correctly attached and connected

to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-

tive, the control lamp flashes at double

speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are

defective, the control lamp  does not

light up. Change the bulb.

●

The main beam headlights can only be

switched on if the dipped beam headlights

are already on. The warning lamp  then

comes on in the instrument panel.

●

The headlight flasher comes on for as

long as you pull the lever – even if no other

lights are switched on. The warning lamp 

then comes on in the instrument panel.

●

When the parking lights are switched on,

the headlight and the tail light on the cor

responding side of the vehicle light up. The

parking lights will only work with the igni-

tion off. If said light is on, an audible warn-

ing will be emitted while the driver door is

open.

●

If the turn signal lever is left on after the

key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

an acoustic signal sounds when the driver

door is opened. This is intended as a re-

minder to switch off the turn signal, unless

you wish to leave the parking light on.

Coming Home/Leaving Home Func-

tion*

Fig. 143 Related video

The Leaving Home function is controlled with

a phot

osensor

If the Coming Home or L

eaving Home func-

tion is connect

ed, the fr

ont side and dipped

lights, the tail lights and the number plate

light will light up to provide assistance.

Coming Home function

The Coming Home function is activated by

switching off the ignition. When the driver

door is opened, the Coming Home lighting

comes on.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the

following cases:

●

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any

doors or the rear lid remain open.

●

If the light switch is turned to position .

●

If the ignition is switched on.

Automatic Leaving Home function

The Leaving Home function is activated when

the vehicle is unlocked if:

●

the light control is in position  and

●

the photosensor detects “darkness”.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the

following cases:

●

If the time period for the delay in switching

off the headlights has ended

●

If the vehicle is locked again.

●

If the light switch is turned to position .

●

If the ignition is switched on.

141

Operation

Note

●

To activate the Coming/Leaving home

function, the r

otary light switch must be in

position  and the light sensor must de-

tect darkness.

Fog lights with cornering light func-

tion*

3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full-

LED headlights and bulb fog lights.

The cornering light function is an additional

function t

o the dipped beam headlights to

improve lighting of the side of the road when

taking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when the

dipped beam headlights are already on and

it is enabled when driving at speeds below

approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Forward gear

●

If the steering wheel is turned to the right or

the right-hand turn signal switched on, the

right

-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.

●

If the steering wheel is turned to the left or

the left-hand turn signal switched on, the left-

hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.

●

After the turn, the cornering light function is

gradually switched off.

Reverse gear

●

When engaging the reverse gear, both fog

lights turn on.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehicles

equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected via

the corresponding Easy Connect syst

menu.

●

Activation: when going above 110 km/h

(68 mph) for mor

e than 10 seconds, the dip-

ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-

er's visibility distance.

●

Deactivation: when reducing the speed of

the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped

beam returns to its normal position.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is

asymmetric: the side of the r

oad on which

you ar

e driving is lit mor

e int

ensely.

When a car that is manuf

actured in a country

that drives on the right travels to a country

that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-

mally necessary to cover part of the head-

light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-

justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling

other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certain

light values that must be complied with for

designated points of the light distribution. This

is known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-

LED headlights allows the specific “tourist

light” values to be met without the need for

stickers or changes in the settings.

Note

“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If

you are planning a long stay in a country

that driv

es on the other side, you should

take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical

Service to change the headlights.

142

Lights and visibility

Headlight range control

Fig. 144

Instrument panel: headlight range

contr

The lights range control adapts according to

the v

alue of the headlight beam and the v

ehi-

e l

oad st

atus. This offers the driver optimum

visibility and the headlights do not dazzle on-

coming drivers

›››

The headlights can only be adjust

ed when

the dipped beam is s

wit

ched on.

o r

eset, turn switch

›››

Fig. 144:

Value Vehicle load status



Two front occupants, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full. With trailer and minimum

drawbar l

oad.

Value Vehicle load status



Driver only, luggage compartment full

With trailer and maximum drawbar load.

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those

shown in the table, it is possibl

e to select intermediary

positions.

Dynamic headlight range control

The control is not mounted in vehicles with

dynamic headlight range control. The head-

light range is automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the vehicle load status when they are

switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean

that the headlights dazzle and distract oth-

er drivers. This could r

esult in a serious ac-

cident.

●

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load

status so that it does not blind other driv-

ers.

Hazard warning lights 

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 32

The haz

d warning lights are used to draw

the attention of other road users to your vehi-

cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from

moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard

warning lights

›››

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;

or an aut

omatic gearbo

x, mo

e the gear

lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-

tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when

you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the

hazard warning lights are switched on. The

two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the

turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at

the same time. The simultaneous hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is

switched off.

WARNING

●

The risk of an accident increases if your

vehicle breaks do

wn. Always use the haz-

ard warning lights and a warning triangle to

draw the attention of other road users to

your stationary vehicle.

●

Due to the high temperatures that the

catalytic converter can reach, never park

143

Operation

in an area where the catalytic converter

could come into contact with highly inflam-

mabl

e materials, for example dry grass or

spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note

●

The batt

ery will run down if the hazard

arning lights are left on for a long time,

even if the ignition is switched off.

●

The use of the hazard warning lights de-

scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-

utory requirements.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel

scr

eens and contr

Fig. 145 Related video

Depending on the model, the lighting of the

instrument panel and contr

s can be adjus-

ed in the Easy Connect syst

em, using the





/  butt

on and the SETTINGS function

butt

›



page 34.

With the ignition on and without light activa-

tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting

remains activated in daytime light conditions.

The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-

minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving

through a tunnel without the  function ac-

tive, the instrument panel lighting may even

switch off. The objective of this function is to

provide the driver with a visual indication that

he or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-

strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the

following message will appear Turn on the

lights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 33

uggage compar

tment lighting

The light is activated when the rear lid is

open, even when the ignition and lights are

turned off. For this reason, ensure that the

rear lid is always closed.

Ambient light*

The ambient light lights up the area of the

centre console and the footwell area and,

depending on the version, the front door pan-

els as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness when

the doors are opened and the lights will be

dimmed during driving, when the light selec-

tor is in ,  or .

The brightness of the ambient light* can be

adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as

can colour, in versions with lighting on the

front door panel (the 

/  butt

on and the

function butt

SETTINGS > background

lighting

›



page 34).

Note

If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the

interior lights will be switched off after ap-

ox. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key

has been removed and the courtesy light

position selected. This prevents the battery

from discharging.

144

Lights and visibility

Visibility

Heat

ed r

ear windo

Fig. 146

With the air conditioning controls:

heat

ed r

ear windo

The heated rear window only works when the

engine is running. When it is s

wit

ched on, a

amp lights up on the s

wit

ch.

After approximately 8 minutes, the heating

device of the rear window switches off auto-

matically.

For the sake of the environment

The heated rear window should be switch-

ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. By

saving electrical pow

er you can also save

fuel.

Note

To avoid possible damage to the battery,

an automatic temporary disconnection of

this function is possible

, coming back on

when normal operating conditions are re-

established.

Sun visors

Fig. 147

Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-

senger sun visors:

●

Lower the sun visor towards the wind-

scr

een.

●

The sun visor can be pull

ed out of its

mounting and t

urned t

wards the door

›››

Fig. 147

●

Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-

udinally backw

ds.

anit

y mirror

There is a vanity mirror, with a cover

, on

the r

ear of the sun blind.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

●

Always store sun blinds and visors in their

housing when not in use.

Windscreen wiper and rear

window wiper systems

Windscreen wiper and window wip-

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 33

WARNING

●

Worn and dirty wiper blades r

educe visi-

bility and safety levels while driving.

●

In cold conditions you should not use the

wash/wipe system unless you have

warmed the windscreen with the heating

and ventilation system. The windscreen

washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the

windscreen and obscure your view of the

road.

●

Always note the corresponding warnings

›››



page 61.

145

Operation

WARNING

The rain sensor* may not detect enough

rain to switch on the wipers.

●

If necessary, s

witch on the wipers man-

ually when water on the windscreen ob-

structs visibility.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the

windscreen wipers and the window wiper

are not fro

zen. If you switch on the wind-

screen wipers when the wiper blades are

frozen to the windscreen, you could dam-

age both the wiper blades and the wiper

motor.

Note

●

The wipers and washers will work only

when the ignition is switched on.

●

The heat output of the heat

ed jets* is

controlled automatically when the ignition

is switched on, depending upon the outside

temperature.

●

In certain versions of vehicles with

alarms, the windscreen wiper will only work

in interval/rain sensor mode when the igni-

tion is on and the bonnet closed.

●

When the interval wipe function is on, the

intervals are directly proportional to the

speed. This way, the higher the vehicle

speed the shorter the intervals.

●

If you stop the vehicle with the wind-

screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will aut

matically change to a lower position

speed. The set speed will be resumed when

the vehicle pulls away.

●

The windscreen will be wiped again after

approximately five seconds once the “au-

tomatic wash/wipe system” has been acti-

vated, provided the vehicle is moving (drip

function). If you activate the wipers less

than 3 seconds after the drip function, a

new wash sequence will begin without per-

forming the last wipe. For the “drip” func-

tion to work again, you have to turn the ig-

nition off and then on again.

●

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in

front of the rain sensor*. This may cause

sensor disruption or faults.

●

Depending on the version of the model,

when you engage reverse gear and with

the headlight wiper activated, this can

start a wipe.

Rear view mirrors

Int

erior mirr

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see

early thr

ough the r

ear windo

Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle

function*

The anti-dazzle function is activated every

time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the

interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-

matically according to the amount of light it

receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-

led if reverse gear is engaged.

Note

●

The automatic anti-dazzle function will

only work properly if the sun blind* f

or the

rear window is retracted and there are no

other objects preventing light from reach-

ing the interior rear vision mirror.

●

If you have to stick any type of sticker on

the windscreen, do not do so in front of the

sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-

dazzle function from working well or even

from working at all.

Folding in the exterior mirrors man-

ually

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-

ded in. F

or this, pr

ess the mirr

or housing t

ards the vehicle.

146

Lights and visibility

Note

Before washing the vehicle with an auto-

matic car wash, fold in the ext

erior mirrors

to avoid damage.

Electric exterior mirrors*

Fig. 148

Exterior mirror controls.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20

The e

erior mirrors can be adjusted using the

rotary knob in the driver door.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob

›››

Fig. 148 to position L (left ex-

terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exterior

mirror so that you have a good view to the

rear of the vehicle.

3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior

mirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the exte-

rior mirror so that you have a good view to

the rear of the vehicle

›››

Heat

ed e

erior mirr

ors*

–

ess the demisting button 

›››

Fig. 146

–

The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre-

vent draining the battery unnecessarily.

–

If necessary, press the button again to re-

peat the function.

–

The exterior mirror heating is not activated

in temperatures above approximately

+20°C (+68°F).

Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically*

–

Turn the control

›››

Fig. 148 to position  to

fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-

ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are

driving through an automatic car wash. This

will help prevent damage.

Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex-

tended position*

–

Turn the knob to position L or R to return the

exterior mirrors to their original position

›››

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the

ehicl

The Easy Connect syst

em, the 

 /  but

on and the function butt

ons

SETTINGS >

Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be

used t

o have the exterior mirrors fold in when

the vehicle is parked and locked

›››



page 34.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote

control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-

tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with

the remote control, the exterior mirrors are

deployed automatically.

WARNING

●

Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the

fiel

d of vision however the objects appear

smaller and further away in the mirrors. If

you use these mirrors to estimate the dis-

tance to vehicles behind you when chang-

ing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of

accident.

●

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to

estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

●

Make sure that you do not get your finger

trapped between the mirror and the mirror

base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of

injury!

147

Operation

For the sake of the environment

The exterior mirror heating should be

switched off when it is no longer needed.

Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel w

aste.

Note

●

If the electrical adjustment ever fail

s to

operate, the mirrors can be adjusted by

hand by lightly pressing the edge of the

mirror glass.

●

In vehicles with retractable external rear-

view mirrors, the following must be consid-

ered: if, due to an external force (e.g. being

knocked while manoeuvring), the adjust-

ment of the mirror housing is altered, the

mirror will have to be fully folded electri-

cally. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror

housing by hand, as this will interfere with

the mirror adjuster function.

●

The fold-in function on the exterior mir-

rors will not activate at speeds over

40 km/h (25 mph).

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seat and head

estr

aints

Adjusting the fr

ont seats

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 19

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains impor-

tant information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should r

ead and observe

for your own safety and the safety of your

passengers

›››

page 63.

WARNING

●

Never adjust the driver or front passenger

seat whil

e the vehicle is in motion. While

adjusting your seat, you will assume an in-

correct sitting position. Risk of accidents.

Adjust the driver or front passenger seat

only when the vehicle is stationary.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver

and front passenger in case of a sudden

braking or an accident, never drive with the

backrest tilted towards the rear. The maxi-

mum protection of the seat belt can be

achieved only when the backrests are in an

upright position and the driver and front

passenger have properly adjusted their

seat belts. The further the backrests are til-

ted to the rear, the gr

eater the risk of injury

due to improper positioning of the belt web!

●

Exercise caution when securing the seat

height into forwards/backwards position.

Injuries can be caused if the seat height is

adjusted without due care and attention.

●

To move the seat forwards and back-

wards, pull upwards and not sideways on

the lever, as the force exerted on it in that

direction could damage it.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 19

Adjust the head r

estr

aint

›››



page 19 so

that as far as possible the top of the head re-

straint is level with the top of your head. When

this is not possible, try to get as close as pos-

sible to this position.

WARNING

●

Never drive if the head restr

aints have

been removed. Risk of injury.

●

After refitting the head restraint, you

must always adjust it properly for height to

achieve optimal protection.

●

Please observe the safety warnings

›››

in Correct adjustment of front head re-

straints on page 67.

148

Seats and head restraints

Note

●

When fitting the head restraints again, in-

sert the tubes as f

ar as possible into the

guides without pressing the button.

Adjustment of the rear head re-

straints

Fig. 149

Rear centre head restraint: release

point.

When transporting people in the back seat,

ace the head r

estr

aints of the occupied

seats at a minimum of the ne

xt sock

et up

›››

Adjusting the head r

estr

aints

–

o set the head r

estr

aint higher, grasp the

sides with both hands and move it upwards,

until you see it engage.

–

To set the head restraint lower down, press

the

›

Fig. 149

butt

on and move it

downwards.

Removing the head restraint

To remove the head restraint, the corre-

sponding backrest must be partially folded

forward.

–

Unlock the backrest

›››

page 151.

–

Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-

rives to the top.

–

Press button

, while simultaneously

essing on the securit

y hol

with a flat

scr

driv

er a maximum of 5 mm wide

, and

remove the head restraint.

–

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

Fitting the head r

estr

aint

o mount the e

ernal head restraints, the

corresponding backrest must be partially fol-

ded forward.

–

Unlock the backrest

›››

page 151.

–

Insert the head restraint bars into the

guides until they perceptibly engage. It

should not be possible to remove the head

restraint from the backrest.

–

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

WARNING

●

Please observe the general notes

›

››

page 68.

●

Remove the rear head restraints only

when it is necessary for the placement of a

child seat

›››

page 80. After removing a

child seat, remount the head restraint im-

mediately. Travelling with the head re-

straints removed or improperly adjusted in-

creases the risk of severe injuries.

Seat functions

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can

cause severe injuries.

●

Assume the proper sitting position bef

ore

your trip and remain in it throughout. This

also applies to the other occupants.

●

Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth-

er parts of the body away from the operat-

ing radius and the adjustment of seats.

149

Operation

Heated seats*

Fig. 150

On the centre console: front seats

heating s

wit



: v

ersion with Climatronic. :

version with manual air conditioning.

The seat cushions can be heated electrically

when the ignition is s

wit

ched on. The backr

est

is al

so heat

ed in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged in

any of the following conditions:

●

The seat is unoccupied.

●

The seat has a covering.

●

There is a child seat installed in the seat.

●

The seat cushion is wet or damp.

●

The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-

er than 25°C (77°F).

Activate

Press the button  or . Seat heating is

switched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output

Press the button  or  repeatedly until the

desired temperature is reached.

Deactivating

Press the button  or  until all the warning

lamps switch off.

WARNING

Children and people who cannot perceive

pain or temperature because of medica-

tions, par

alysis or chronic diseases (e.g.

diabetes) or have a limited perception of

these, may suffer burns to the back, but-

tocks or legs when using seat heating, an

occurrence that may entail a very lengthy

recovery period or from which it may not be

possible to recover fully. Seek medical ad-

vice if you have doubts regarding your

health.

●

People with limited pain and temperature

thresholds must never use seat heating.

●

If an abnormality in the device's temper-

ature control is detected, have it checked

by a specialist workshop.

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can

adversely affect the operation of the seat

heating, increasing the risk of burns.

●

Mak

e sure the seat cushion is dry prior to

using the seat heater.

●

Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is

wet or damp.

●

Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp

on the seat.

●

Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

●

To avoid damaging the heating elements

of the seat heaters, pl

ease do not kneel on

the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single

point on the seat cushion or backrest.

●

Liquids, sharps objects and insulating

materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can

damage the seat heating.

●

In the event of smells, switch off the seat

heating immediately and have it inspected

by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should remain on only

when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-

sary fuel waste.

150

Seats and head restraints

Fold down the rear seats

Fig. 151

On the rear seat backrest: release

butt

; red mark

Folding the backrest forwards

●

Completely lower the rear headrests

›

page 14

●

Press the unlock button

›››

Fig. 151

for-

ds and at the same time f

d the backr

est

down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged

when the red marking of the button

is visi-

Conv

ting the t

able to a seat

●

Raise and lock in the back rest. The red

marking on the tab

should no longer be

visibl

e when the backr

est is pr

operly secur

ed.

On split r

ear seats*, the backrest can be low-

ered in two sections.

WARNING

●

Please be careful when folding back the

backr

est! Injuries can be caused if the seat

height is adjusted without due care and at-

tention.

●

Do no trap or damage seat belts when

raising the backrest.

●

After raising the backrest, check it has

engaged properly in position. Do this by

pulling on the central seat belt or directly

on the backrest and check that the position

lever is in the neutral position.

●

The three point automatic seat belt only

works correctly when the backrest of the

central seat is correctly engaged.

Removable seat covers

Fig. 152 Remove the covers.  L

eft fr

ont seat;



ear seats

151

Operation

Fig. 153 Label on the covers: washing instruc-

tion symbols

Seasonal seats are seats with removabl

e, re-

versible, exchangeable and washable covers.

Removing the cover

It is suggested to move the rear seats to their

rearmost position so it is easier to remove and

put the covers.

●

Move the seat backwards until the handle

of the zip is completely accessible

››

›

Fig. 152

●

Move the handle of the zip in the direction

indicat

ed by the arr

›

Fig. 152. The re-

movable cover is released.

●

Pull the cover off.

●

Move the seat back to driving position

Putting the cover

●

Move the seat backwards until the anchor

point of the zip is completely accessible

●

Place the removable cover on the anchor

of the zip (the pillows have 2 anchor points).

●

Move the handle of the zip against the di-

rection indicated by the arrow

›››

Fig. 152.

●

Insert the excess fabric in the joint between

pillow and backrest, ensuring that the remov-

able cover is firm

●

Move the seat back to driving position

CAUTION

●

Washing instructions for remov

able cov-

ers

›››

Fig. 153:

–

Wash the covers in a washing machine

using a delicate program, with water at

30°C and separately.

–

Do not use bleach, centrifuge or dry-

clean.

–

Hang out the covers horizontally.

–

Iron the covers with steam, placing a

piece of fabric between cover and iron.

–

Avoid contact between the iron and the

Alcantara leather parts.

Note

●

If using the seats without removable co

ers, the handle of the zip must be at the

start of the zip.

●

To clean the upholstery of the seats, see

the fabric cleaning section

›››

page 339.

Only in font seats.

152

Transport and practical equipment

Transport and practical

equipment

actical equipment

e compar

tment

Fig. 154 Passenger side: glove compartment.

The compartment can be opened by pulling

the l

›

Fig. 154.

This compartment can hold documents in A4

format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD

player is located in the glove compartment.

Separate operating instructions are enclosed

for this equipment in the corresponding In-

struction Manual.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment

cover closed while the v

ehicle is in motion

in order to reduce the risk of injury caused

by a sudden braking or by an accident.

Storage compartment under the

front seats*

Fig. 155 Storage compartment under the right

ont passenger seat.

To open

–

The compartment is opened by pulling on

the l

er and guiding it with your hand.

o cl

ose

–

Press the cover inwards until the closed

drawer “clicks” into position.

Note

The storage drawer will hold a maximum

weight of 1.5 kg.

Storage pocket in the seat*

Fig. 156

Storage pocket.

There is a storage pocket on the rear of the

ont seats.

age compar

tment in fr

ont door

panel*

In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-

, et

c. can be st

ed.

153

Operation

Front drink holder*

Fig. 157

Front drink holders in the centre con-

sol

In the central console, next to the hand brake,

ther

e ar

e tw

o drinks hol

ders

›

››

Fig. 157.

WARNING

●

Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.

During sudden or normal driving manoeu-

vres, when braking suddenly or in case of

an accident, the hot drink could spill. Risk

of scal

ding.

●

Never use rigid materials (for example,

glass or ceramic), since they could cause

injury in the case of an accident.

●

When travelling, the drinks holder should

always be closed to prevent risk in the

event of sudden breaking or accident.

Front ashtray*

Fig. 158

Ashtray in the centre console.

Opening and closing the ashtray

●

To open the ashtray, lift the cover

›

Fig. 158

●

o close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

●

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash

could ignite the paper in the ashtray and

cause a fire

Electrical power socket

Fig. 159

Front power socket.

The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can

so be used f

or other el

ectrical components

with a po

er rating of up to 120 Watt. When

the engine is switched off, however, the vehi-

cle battery will discharge. For further informa-

tion see

›››

page 307.

WARNING

The power sockets and the connected ac-

cessories will only operate when the igni-

tion is on or when the engine is running. Im-

proper use of the sockets or el

ectrical ac-

cessories can lead to serious injuries or

cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, nev-

er leave children alone inside the vehicle.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to

avoid damaging the sockets.

154

Transport and practical equipment

Note

●

The use of electrical appliances with the

engine switched off will cause a battery

dischar

ge.

●

Before using any electrical accessories,

see the instructions in

›››

page 307.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 160

Lighter.

–

Press on the cigarette lighter

›

Fig. 160

activate it

›››

–

Wait for the lighter to spring out.

–

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the

cigar

ett

e on the gl

wing coil.

WARNING

●

Improper use of the cigarette lighter can

ead to serious injuries or start a fire.

●

Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness

or negligence when using the cigar

ette

lighter can cause burns and serious inju-

ries.

●

The lighter only works when the ignition is

turned on or the engine is running. To avoid

the risk of fire, never leave children alone

inside the vehicle.

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Fig. 161 Position heavy items as far forward as

possibl

All luggage and other loose objects must be

saf

ely secur

ed in the luggage compartment.

Unsecur

ed ob

jects which shift back and f

orth

could affect safety or driving characteristics

of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.

–

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage

compartment.

–

Place heavy objects as far forward as pos-

sible in the luggage compartment

›››

Fig. 161.

–

Place the heavy objects first.

–

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening

rings*

›››

page 157.

–

Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or

with non-elastic straps secured to the fas-

tening* rings.

WARNING

●

Loose luggage and other objects in the

luggage compartment could cause serious

injuries.

●

ways stow objects in the luggage com-

partment and secure them on the fastening

rings*.

●

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,

loose objects can be thrown forward, injur-

ing vehicle occupants or even third parties.

This increased risk of injury will be further

increased if a loose object is struck by an

inflating airbag. If this happens, objects

may shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fa-

tal injury.

●

Always keep all objects in the luggage

compartment and use appropriate grips to

secure them, particularly in the case of

heavy objects.

155

Operation

●

Never exceed the all

owed axle weights or

allowed maximum weight. If said weights

are exceeded, the driving characteristics of

the vehicle may change, leading to acci-

dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

●

Please note that the centre of gravity

may shift when transporting heavy objects;

this may affect vehicle handling and lead

to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to

adjust your speed and driving style ac-

cordingly, to avoid accidents.

●

Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-

pecially when the rear lid is open. Children

could climb into the luggage compartment,

closing the door behind them; they will be

trapped and run the risk of death.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors

and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle.

Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that

there are no adults or children in the vehi-

cle.

●

Please observe the notes on the

›››

page 63.

CAUTION

Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe

against the wires of the heating element in

the heated rear windo

w and cause dam-

age.

Note

●

The tyre pressure must be adjust

ed ac-

cording to the load. When necessary,

check the tyre pressures on the adhesive

label stuck to the back of the front left door

frame

›››

page 326.

●

Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce

fogging of the windows. Used air escapes

through ventilation slits in the side trim of

the luggage compartment. Ensure that the

ventilation slots are never covered.

●

Straps for securing the load to the fas-

tening rings* are commercially available

from accessory shops.

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 162 In the boot: removing and installing

the shelf

Fig. 163 In the boot: removing and installing

the shelf.

Removing

●

Detach the cord loops

›

Fig. 162

from

their hooks

●

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-

ports

›

Fig. 163

by pulling it up

wards and

then take it out.

Storing the rear shelf

Depending on the equipment, once the lug-

gage compartment shelf has been removed,

it can be stored under the boot's variable

floor

›››

page 158.

●

Remove the side cover sliding it upwards

and place the shelf in the bottom.

●

Replace the side cover.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

156

Transport and practical equipment

Fitting

●

Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-

cess” fits ont

o the axis of the supports

›

Fig. 163

and press down until it engages.

●

Hook the loops

›››

Fig. 162

to the rear lid.

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the

rear shelf, because they will endanger the

vehicle occupants in case of sudden br

ak-

ing.

CAUTION

●

Before closing the rear lid, ensur

e that

the rear shelf is correctly fitted.

●

An overloaded luggage compartment

could mean that the rear shelf is not cor-

rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-

aged.

●

If the luggage compartment is overloa-

ded, remove the tray.

Note

●

Ensure that, when placing items of cloth-

ing on the luggage compar

tment cover,

rear visibility is not reduced.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 164

Location of fastening rings in luggage

compartment.

There may be some fastening rings included

in the luggage compartment f

or f

ast

ening

luggage and other ob

jects

›

››

Fig. 164 (ar-

rows).

–

Always use suitable and undamaged straps

to secure luggage and other objects to the

fastening rings

›››

in Loading the lug-

gage compar

tment on page 155

ampl

: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying

unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-

lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ob-

ject generates a force corresponding to 20

times its weight. That means that the effective

weight of the object increases to approxi-

mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of

the injuries which might be sustained if this

“object” strikes an occupant as it flies through

the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk

of injury will be further increased if a loose

object is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING

●

If pieces of baggage or other objects are

secured to the f

astening rings with inappro-

priate or damaged retaining cords, injuries

could result in the event of braking ma-

noeuvres or accidents.

●

Never secure a child seat on the fasten-

ing rings.

157

Operation

Luggage compartment variable

oor

Fig. 165 Variable boot floor:



aised position;



ed position.

Fig. 166 Variable boot floor: tilted position.

Variable floor in high position

●

Lift the floor using handle

›

Fig. 165

and pull it back until the front of the floor has

fully passed the supports

●

Move the floor forward over the supports as

ar as the r

ear seat backr

est and then l

wer

the floor with the handle

ariabl

e fl

oor in l

w position

●

Lift the floor using handle

and pull it

back until the supports

have fully passed

the fr

ont part of the fl

oor

●

w mat

ch the front part with the lower

grooves of the supports and slide the floor

forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and

lower the floor at the same time with the han-

dle

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the v

ariabl

e fl

oor is tilt

ed you can ac-

cess the spar

e wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

●

Lift the variable floor in the high position us-

ing handle

, pull it up and push it towards

the backr

est of the r

ear seats until the fl

oor

ds along the hinge line and the movable

part of the floor is resting on itself.

●

Rest the floor on its housings

›››

Fig. 166

(arrows).

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking ma-

noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-

jects coul

d be flung though the interior and

cause serious or fatal injuries.

●

Always secure objects, even when the

luggage compartment floor is properly lif-

ted.

●

Only objects that do not protrude more

than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-

ried between the rear seat and the raised

luggage compartment floor.

●

Only objects that do not weigh than ap-

proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between

the rear seat and the raised luggage com-

partment floor.

158

Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION

●

The maximum weight that can be loaded

on the luggage compartment variabl

e floor

in the top position is 150 kg.

●

Do not let the luggage compartment

floor fall when closing it. Always carefully

guide it downwards in a controlled manner.

Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the

luggage compartment could be damaged.

Note

SEAT recommends the use of straps to se-

cure objects to ret

aining rings.

Roof carrier*

Intr

oduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

mise aer

odynamics. F

or this r

eason, cr

oss

bars or conv

entional roof carrier systems

cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the

roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-

proved cross bars and roof carrier systems

can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof

carrier system should be disassembled.

●

When they are not used.

●

When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

●

When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-

mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING

When heavy or bulky loads are transported

on the roof carrier system, car driving per-

formance is aff

ected, as the centre of grav-

ity shifts and there is greater wind resist-

ance.

●

Always secure the load properly using

belts or retaining straps that are suitable

and in a good condition.

●

Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a

negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-

tre of gravity and driving performance.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

CAUTION

●

Remove the cross bars and the r

oof carri-

er system before entering a car wash.

●

Vehicle height is increased by the instal-

lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system

and the load secured on them. For this pur-

pose, check that your vehicle's height does

not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-

ple, for underpasses or for entering garage

doors.

●

Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or

loads secur

ed to them must not interfere

with the roof aerial or block the path of the

rear lid.

●

On opening the rear lid make sure that it

does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment

When cross bars and a roof carrier system

e installed, the increased air r

esistance

means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roof

carrier syst

Fig. 167

Attachment points for the roof railings

or the r

oof carrier syst

em.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of

special r

oof carrier syst

ems. F

or saf

159

Operation

reasons, special fixtures must be used to

saf

ely tr

ansport luggage

, bicycl

es, skis, surf

boar

ds or boats on the roof. Suitable acces-

sories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof

carrier system properly. Always take the as-

sembly instructions that come with the cross-

bars and the roof carrier system in question

into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-

ings. The distance between cross bars

›››

Fig. 167

should be 75 cm and the dis-

ance betw

een the cr

oss bars and the br

ack

ets of the roof railings

should be 5 cm.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-

bars and the roof carrier system may cause

the whole system t

o detach from the roof

and cause an accident and injuries.

●

Always take the manufacturer assembly

instructions into account.

●

Use only crossbars and the roof carrier

system when they are in perfect condition

and are properly secured.

●

Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier

system properly.

●

Check threaded joints and attachments

travelling and if necessary tighten them af-

ter you have travelled a short distance.

When making long trips, check the threa-

ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.

●

Always fit the special roof carrier sys-

tems corr

ectly for wheels, skis and surf-

boards, etc.

●

Do not modify or repair the crossbars or

roof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions that

come with the cr

ossbars and the roof carri-

er system carefully and k

eep them in the

vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars

and the r

oof carrier syst

em ar

e pr

operly in-

alled

›››

Maximum authorised r

oof l

oad

The maximum permissibl

e r

oof l

oad is 75 kg.

This figure comes from the combined weight

of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load

itself on the roof

›››

ays check the w

eight of the r

oof carrier

syst

em, the cross bars and the weight of the

load to be transported and weigh them if

necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-

thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier

with a lower weight rating, you will not be

able to carry the maximum authorised roof

load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-

mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is

listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure them

correctly

›››

Check att

achments

Once the cr

oss bars and r

oof carrier syst

hav

e been installed, check the bolted con-

nections and attachments after a short jour-

ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-

cy.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof

load can result in accidents and considera-

ble v

ehicle damage.

●

Never exceed the maximum authorised

load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-

hicle's maximum authorised weight.

●

Never exceed the load capacity of the

cross bars and the roof carrier system,

even if the maximum authorised roof load

has not been reached.

●

Secure heavy items as far forward as

possible and distribute the vehicle load

uniformly.

160

Air conditioning

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could

fall from the roof carrier system or cause

accidents and injuries.

●

ways use belts or retaining straps that

are suitable and in a good condition.

●

Secure the load properly.

Air conditioning

Heating, v

entil

ation and

cooling

Gener

al not

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 41

Pollution filt

The pollution filter (a combined particulate

filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar-

rier against impurities in the outside air, in-

cluding dust and pollen.

For the climate control system to work with

maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must

be replaced at the specified intervals in the

Maintenance Programme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to

use in areas reaching very high pollution lev-

els, the pollen filter must be changed more

frequently than stated in the Service Sched-

ule.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-

creases the risk of serious accidents.

●

Always ensure that all windo

ws are free

of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-

ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-

erything outside.

●

The maximum heat output required to de-

ost windows as quickly as possible is only

available when the engine has reached its

normal running temperature. Only drive

when you have good visibility.

●

Always ensure that you use the heating

system, fresh air system, air conditioner

and the heated rear window to maintain

good visibility to the outside.

●

Never leave the air recirculation on for a

long period of time. If the cooling system is

switched off and air recirculation mode

switched on, the windows can mist over

very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and

reduce driver concentration possibly re-

sulting in a serious accident.

●

ver leave the fresh air fan turned off or

use the air recirculation for long periods of

time; the air in the vehicle interior will not

be refreshed.

CAUTION

●

If you suspect that the air conditioner is

damaged, switch it off with the A/C button

161

Operation

to prevent further damage and have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

●

Repairs t

o the air conditioner require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. There-

fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle

to a specialised workshop.

Note

●

If the humidit

y and temperatur

e outside

the vehicle are high, condensation can drip

off the evaporator in the cooling system

and form a pool underneath the vehicle.

This is normal and does not indicate a leak.

●

Keep the air intake slots in front of the

windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to

ensure heating and cooling are not im-

paired, and to prevent the windows from

misting over.

●

The air from the vents flows through the

vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

the luggage compartment designed for this

purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-

structing these slots with any kind of ob-

ject.

●

The air conditioner operates most effec-

tively with the windows closed. How

ever, if

the temperature inside the vehicle is exces-

sive because of the sun, the air inside can

be cooled faster by opening the windows

for a short time.

●

Do not smoke while air recirculation

mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air

conditioning system leaves residue on the

evaporator, producing a permanent un-

pleasant odour.

●

At low outside temperatures, the com-

pressor switches off automatically and

cannot be switched on even with the AUTO

button.

●

It is advisable to turn on the air condition-

ing at least once a month, to lubricate the

system gask

ets and prevent leaks. If a de-

crease in the cooling capacity is detected,

a Technical Service should be consulted to

check the system.

●

To ensure correct operation, the grill

on both sides of the screen must not be ob-

structed.

●

When the engine is under extreme strain,

switch off the compressor for a moment.

Economic use of the air condition-

ing

When the air conditioning is switched on, the

compressor consumes engine power and has

influence on fuel consumption. Consider the

foll

owing points in order to have the system

operating in the minimum possible time.

●

If the vehicle interior has overheated due to

an excessive solar r

adiation, it is best to open

the windows or doors to allow the hot air to

escape.

●

While in motion, the air conditioning should

not be switched on if the windows are open.

162

Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 168

Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-

ation in the v

ehicl

e int

erior

, air vents

›››

Fig. 168

should remain open.

●

The outlets can be closed or opened sepa-

ely using the sl

ats and the air fl

w directed

according to need.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air

vents in the dash panel

, in the footwell and

in the r

ear ar

ea of the int

erior

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-

sitive objects should nev

er be placed in

front of the air outlets as they may be dam-

aged or made unsuitable for use by the air

coming from the air vents.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,

e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in

queuing traffic, fr

om entering the interior.

If the air distribution is in the thaw position, the

recirculation flap will always be open (indica-

tor light off).

If the air distribution is switched from any po-

sition to the thaw position, recirculation will

be automatically deactivated.

Connecting the recirculation

In any air distribution position except thaw:

●

Press the  button, the button

’s lamp will

light up, indicating that air recirculation inside

the vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculation

In any air distribution position except thaw:

●

Press the  button again and the button's

lamp will go off, indicating that air entry from

the outside has been activated.

In the thaw position  the entry of air into the

vehicle interior is always from the outside.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from

the outside enters the vehicle interior

. If the

air conditioner is switched off, the windows

163

Operation

can quickly mist over. Therefore, never

leave the air recircul

ation mode switched

on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note

●

Activating air recirculation aut

omatically

activates the  button (to prevent the win-

dows from fogging). If the temperature reg-

ulator is turned to the coldest setting (blue

point), the air recirculation function and the

 button are automatically activated.

●

If the function is not deactivated by

pressing the button, it will deactiv

ate after

approximately 20 minutes.

Heating and fresh air

Controls

Fig. 169

Heating controls on the dash panel.

Temperature regulator

›

page 165

ower control. There are four speed set-

tings for the blower. The blower should al-

ways be set at the lowest speed when

driving slowly.

Air distribution regulator.

Heat

ed r

ear windo



Air distribution

Contr

for setting the flow of air in the re-

quir

ed dir

ection.

 – Air distribution t

ards the windscreen in

order to demist.

164

Air conditioning

 – Air distribution t

o upper body.



– Air distribution t

o f

ootw

ell.

 – Air distribution to the windscreen and the

footwell.

WARNING

●

For your safety, the windows shoul

d nev-

er be fogged up or covered with snow or

ice. This is essential to ensure good visibili-

ty. Please familiarise yourself with the cor-

rect operation of the heating and ventila-

tion system, including the demist/defrost

functions for the windows.

Note

●

Please consider the general notes

››

›

page 161.

Functions

Ventilating the vehicle interior

The desir

ed t

emper

e inside the vehicle

cannot be lower than the ambient tempera-

ture.

●

Turn the temperature selector

›››

Fig. 169

anti-clockwise.

●

urn bl

er s

witch

to any of the levels

1-4.

●

Set the airflow to the desired direction using

air distribution contr

●

Open the relevant air outlets.

Int

erior heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed t

o de-

ost the windo

ws quickly, is only av

ailable

when the engine has reached its operating

temperature.

●

Turn the temperature selector

›››

Fig. 169

clockwise to select the re-

quir

ed t

emper

●

Turn blower switch

to any of the levels

1-4.

●

Set the airflow to the desired direction using

air distribution contr

●

Open the relevant air outlets.

Defr

osting the windscr

een

●

urn the t

emper

ature regulator

›››

Fig. 169

clockwise to reach the maxi-

mum t

emper

●

Turn the blower switch

to level 4.

●

Turn air distribution control to .

●

ose the centr

al outl

ets.

●

Open and t

urn the side outl

ets towards the

windows.

Keeping the windscreen and the side win-

dows demisted

●

Turn the temperature regulator

›››

Fig. 169

to the heating zone.

●

Turn blower switch

to any of the levels

2-3.

●

Turn air distribution control to .

●

Close the central outlets.

●

Open and turn the side outlets towards the

windo

ws.

Once the windo

ws ar

e demist

ed and as a

eventive measure, the control

can be set

in position  gr

eat

er comf

ort whil

e pr

event-

ing the windows from misting again.

Note

Remember that the temperature of the en-

gine coolant should be optimum to ensure

that the heating syst

em functions correctly

(except in vehicles fitted with additional

heating*).

165

Operation

Manual air conditioning*

Contr

Fig. 170 Air conditioning controls on the dash pan-

el.

Temperature selector

›

page 166

wer control. There are four speed set-

tings for the blower. At low speed, it is rec-

ommended to set the blower to a mini-

mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh air.

Air distribution regulator.

Air recirculation button

›››

page 163.

When the function is activated, a warning

light on the button is turned on.

Heated rear window.

Button to switch on air conditioning

›››

page 166. The air conditioning system

only works when the engine is running

and the fan is switched on.







WARNING

For your safety, the windows should never

be fogged up or covered with sno

w or ice.

This is essential to ensure good visibility.

Please familiarise yourself with the correct

operation of the heating and ventilation

system, including the demist/defrost func-

tions for the windows.

Note

Please consider the general notes.

Functions

Interior heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to de-

frost the windows quickly, is only avail

able

when the engine has reached its operating

temperature.

●

Turn off the cooling system using the 

button

›››

Fig. 170 (the button light turns off).

●

Turn the temperature regulator

to set the

desired temperatur

e inside the vehicle.

●

Turn the blower switch to any of the settings

1-4.

166

Air conditioning

●

Set the air distribution r

egul

to the

air fl

w configur

ation desir

ed:

 (towards the

windscreen),  (towards the chest),  (to-

wards the footwell) and  (towards the wind-

screen and footwell).

Interior cooling

When the air conditioning is switched on, the

temperature and the air humidity go down.

This way, if the outside humidity is extreme,

the air conditioning prevents the misting of

the windows and therefore, comfort is im-

proved.

●

Turn on the cooling system using the 

button (the button light turns on).

●

Turn the temperature control switch until

the desired interior temperature is reached.

●

Turn the blower switch to any of the settings

1-4.

●

Set the air distribution control to the air flow

configuration desired:  (towards the wind-

screen),  (towards the chest),  (towards

the footwell) and  (towards the windscreen

and footwell).

Demisting the windscreen

●

Turn air distribution to .

●

Turn the fan control to one of the two levels

depending on the speed required.

●

Rotate the temperature control to the de-

sired level of comfort.

●

Close the central outlets.

●

Open and turn the side outlets towards the

windows.

If the air conditioning does not work, this may

be due to the following reasons:

●

The engine is stationary.

●

The fan blower is switched off.

●

The outside temperature is lower than +3°C

(+37°F).

●

The air conditioning system compressor

has been temporarily switched off because

of an increased engine coolant temperature.

●

The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

●

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air

conditioning checked by a specialised work-

shop.

167

Operation

Climatronic*

Gener

al not

Fig. 171

Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 4

Climatr

onic automatically maintains a com-

fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-

cally regulates the supplied air temperature

and the blower and air distribution levels. The

system also allows for the effect of sunlight,

so there is no need for manual adjustment.

Automatic operation guarantees maximum

comfort any time of year

›››

page 169.

Climatronic description

Cooling only works if the following conditions

are met:

●

The engine is running

●

the outside temperature is above +2°C

(+36°F);

●

 turned on.

Starting the Climatronic

When a button is pressed, the corresponding

function will be activated (except for the re-

circulation button), switching on the air condi-

tioning if it was switched off.

Switching off the Climatronic

●

Adjust fan power to zero

›››

Fig. 171

ess the



butt

on.

In or

der to ensure engines subject to heavy

loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-

pressor is switched off in the event of high

coolant temperatures.

Recommended setting for all seasons of

the year

●

Set the required temperature. We recom-

mend +22°C (+72°F).

●

Press the button 

›››

Fig. 171.

168

Air conditioning

●

Adjust the v

ents so that the air fl

w is dir

ec-

ed slightly upwards.

Change between degrees Centigrade and

degrees Fahrenheit

The units of degrees can be changed via the

Easy Connect system using the 

/  but

on and the function butt

SETTINGS >

Units > Temperature.

Aut

omatic mode

Automatic mode is used to maintain a con-

stant temperature and demist the windows

inside the vehicle.

●

Set a interior temperature between +16°C

(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).

●

Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc-

ted slightly upwards.

●

Press the  button, AUTO is displayed on

the screen.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing

the air distribution buttons or increasing or

decreasing the blower speed. However, the

temperature remains regulated.

Adjusting the temperature

●

When you switch on the ignition, control

›››

Fig. 1

can be used t

o set the r

equired in-

terior temperature.

It is possible to select interior temperatures

from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this

range the temperature is regulated automati-

cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is

selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a

temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selec-

ted, “HI” is displayed on the screen. At both

extremes, Climatronic works at maximum

cooling or heating power, respectively. The

temperature is not regulated.

In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-

tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-

larly the footwells) and significant differences

in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle,

sensitive people may catch cold.

Fan regulation

Climatronic automatically regulates blower

speed according to the interior temperature.

It is possible, however, to set the blower

speed to suit requirements.

●

Press the

buttons to increase or reduce

an speed.

Climatr

onic will s

wit

ch off when the bl

ower

switches off.

Turn on windscreen defrost

●

Press the button 

›››

Fig. 171.

Switching off windscreen defrosting

●

Press the  button several times or

press the  button.

The temperature is regulated automatically.

The air output from the vents

›››

Fig. 168

incr

eased.

WARNING

Read and observe the safety warnings

›››

in General notes on page 161.

Note

●

A visit to the specialised service once a

year is recommended to clean the Clima-

onic system.

●

The interior temperature sensor is at the

bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the

like, as this could have a negative effect on

Climatronic operations.

169

Infotainment System

Intr

oduction

Saf

y w

arnings

Inf

otainment system safety in-

structions

Travelling on today's roads requires the driv-

er's full attention at all times.

Only operate the r

adio and its various func-

tions when the traffic situation really permits

this.

WARNING

●

Before starting the trip

, you should famili-

arise yourself with the different radio func-

tions.

●

High audio volume may represent a dan-

ger to you and to others.

●

Adjust the volume in a way that you can

distinguish surrounding noise, for example,

horns and sirens, etc.

●

Changes to the Infotainment system set-

tings should be made when the car is stop-

ped, or by a passenger.

WARNING

Distracting the driver in any way can lead

to an accident and cause injuries. Operat-

ing the Infot

ainment system can distract

your attention from the traffic.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

Hearing may be impaired if using too high

a volume setting, even if only for short peri-

ods of time.

WARNING

The volume level may suddenly change

when you switch audio source or connect a

new audio sour

ce.

●

Lower the base volume before connect-

ing or switching audio sources.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic

indications shown on the navigation system

may differ from the curr

ent traffic situation.

●

Traffic signs and traffic regulations have

priority over the recommendations and dis-

plays provided by the navigation system.

●

Adjust your vehicle speed and driving

style to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

WARNING

Connecting, inserting or removing a data

medium while driving can distract your at-

tention fr

om the traffic and cause an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Connecting leads for external devices may

obstruct the driver.

●

Arrange the connecting leads so that

they do not obstruct the driv

er.

WARNING

External devices that are loose or not prop-

erly secured could move ar

ound the pas-

senger compartment during a sudden driv-

ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident

and cause damage or injury.

●

Never place or fit external devices to the

doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash

panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or

near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between

these areas and the occupants. External

devices can cause serious injury in an acci-

dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNING

The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm

movements, which could cause an acci-

dent and sev

ere injuries.

170

Introduction

●

Always keep the armrest cl

osed while the

vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Opening a CD player's housing can lead to

injuries fr

om invisible laser radiation.

●

Hav

e CD players repaired only by a

qualified workshop.

CAUTION

The Infotainment system can be damaged

by the incorr

ect inser

tion of a dat

a st

age

device or the insertion of an incompatible

data storage device.

●

When inserting a data storage device,

make sure it is correctly positioned

›››

page 191.

●

Applying force may irreparably damage

the memory card slot locking mechanism.

●

Only use compatible memory cards.

●

When inserting and removing CDs, al-

ways hold them at right angles to the front

of the CD drive without tilting so as not to

scratch them.

●

If a CD is inserted while another is al-

ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD

drive may be irreparably damaged. Always

wait until the data medium is completely

ejected.

CAUTION

Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage

device and non-round media may damage

the CD player.

●

Only cl

ean, standard 12-cm CDs should

be used.

–

Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off

and damage the drive.

–

Do not use printable data media. Prin-

ted labels and coverings may peel off

and damage the CD drive.

–

Do not insert 8-cm “single” CDs or ir-

regularly shaped CDs.

–

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual

Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker

than normal CDs.

CAUTION

The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-

aged if the volume is too high or the sound

is distort

ed.

Note

For the proper functioning of the Infotain-

ment system it is important that the date

and time set in the v

ehicle are correct.

171

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media Syst

em T

ouch / Media Syst

em Col

our

Fig. 172

Overview of the controls (this configura-

tion depends on the v

ersion).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency

›

page 190

ouchscr

een

›››

page 175

Vehicle settings

›››



page 34,

›››

page 208

Media mode (audio sources)

›››

page 191

Phone Mode

›

page 209

Full Link

›

page 179

Selecting the main menu

›››

page 174

Volume. Off/on

›››

page 174

Slot for memory cards

›››

page 194

Settings button (search and selection)

›››

page 174

172

Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 173

Overview of the controls (this configura-

tion depends on the v

ersion).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency

›

page 190

ouchscr

een

›››

page 175

Navigation Mode

›››

page 198

Media mode (audio sources)

›››

page 191

Full Link

›››

page 179

Volume. Off/on

›››

page 174

Settings button (search and selection)

›

page 1

Phone Mode

›››

page 209

Vehicle settings

›››



page 34,

›››

page 208

Voice control

Proximity sensor

›››

page 178

Selecting the main menu

›››

page 174

173

Infotainment System

General instructions for use

Intr

oduction

Fig. 174 Related video

If the setup is changed, this may change the

displ

ay on the scr

een and in some cases, the

Inf

ainment syst

em may behave in a manner

different to that described in this manual.

Note

●

Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly

pressing the touchscr

een is sufficient to

operate the Infotainment system.

●

Not all listed function buttons and func-

tions described may be available due to

the device software used in your market.

The equipment is not faulty if a function

button is missing from the screen.

●

Due to country-specific legislation, cer-

tain functions may not be available on the

screen when the vehicle is travelling above

a certain speed.

●

Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle

may cause noise from the vehicle loud-

speakers.

●

Restrictions on the use of devices using

Bluetooth

technol

ogy may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-

ume of the audio source is automatically

lowered when reverse gear is selected. The

volume can be lowered in the menu Sound

> Volume.

Diagram of the menus

The Infotainment system touchscreen can be

used t

o sel

ect the diff

ent main menus.

ess the infotainment button 

›››

Fig. 1

, or butt

on 

›

Fig. 1

open the menu summary.

The displ

ay of the t

ouchscr

een's main menu

can be s

wit

ched between “grid” and “carou-

sel” via the Settings/System > Display

menu.

Infotainment rotary/push knobs

Rotary/push knobs

The l

eft

-hand r

ary knob

 is the volume

control or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but-

ton.

Infotainment buttons

The buttons on the unit are shown in this

manual with the word “infotainment button”

and their function within a rectangle, for ex-

ample, the infotainment button 

The Inf

ainment butt

ons ar

e used by

press-

ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

To manually switch the Infotainment system

on and off

, briefly

ess

the r

otary knob 

›››

Fig. 172

›

Fig. 1

When s

wit

ching on, the syst

em st

arts-up with

the l

ast set volume, provided that this does

not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol-

ume. Select Sound > Volume.

The unit will switch off automatically when

the key is removed from the ignition or when

the on/off button is pressed (depending on

the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-

fotainment system is switched on again, it will

switch off automatically after approximately

30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note

●

The Infotainment system is a part of the

ehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-

cle.

174

Introduction

●

If the battery has been disconnected, the

ignition must be activated bef

ore switching

on the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume or

muting the sound

Raise the volume: turn the v

olume control 

clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on

the multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control 

clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on

the multifunction steering wheel downward

.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-

ume bar on the screen. The volume can be

controlled using the steering wheel controls.

In this case, the changes in volume are dis-

played on the instrument panel by a volume

bar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings

and adjustments. Select Menu > Sound >

Volume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound

●

Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise

until it displays .

Muting the Inf

otainment system sound stops

the media source that is playing The screen

displays .

Note

If the base volume has been considerably

increased to play a cert

ain audio source,

lower the volume again before switching to

another audio source.

Handling the function buttons and

display instructions

Fig. 175

View of some of the function buttons

on the scr

een.

Fig. 176 Sound setup menu

The Infotainment system comes equipped

with a t

ouchscr

een.

Activ

e ar

eas of the scr

een that call up a cer-

tain function are called “function buttons”.

These buttons are operated by briefly press-

ing the screen or by pressing and holding.

The function buttons appear in the instruc-

tions with the label “function button” and a

button symbol inside a rectangle

Function butt

ons st

art functions or open sub-

menus. The curr

ently sel

ect

ed menu is dis-

played in the title bar

›››

Fig. 175

of the

submenus.

Inactiv

e (gr

ey) function butt

ons cannot be se-

ect

ed.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-

ages displayed on the screen

The size of the navigation map image

›››

page 198 and, for example, photos when

175

Infotainment System

viewing images

›

page 191

can be en-

arged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re-

duce the image displayed by moving two fin-

gers.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

The title bar shows the selected menu

and, where applicable, other function

buttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

The scroll bar is shown on the right and its

size depends on the entries in the list.

Move the bar on the screen by pr

essing

lightly and without lifting the finger, see

›››

page 176, Opening list entries and

searching in lists.

Movable cursor: Move the cursor around

the screen by pr

essing lightly and without

lifting the finger.

OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-

sition, press that spot on the screen.

Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, left

and right arrows to move the sound ac-

cording to preference. The cursor

will

move.

OR: Pr

ess the central button to centre the

stereo sound in the centre of the passen-

ger compartment

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect



Press it on some lists to mov

e up a level,

one by one.

BACK



Press to ret

urn from the submenus one at

a time t

o the main menu or to undo the

entries made.



When pressed, a pop-up windo

w opens

(options window) which displays other

setup options.

 / 

Some functions or messages ar

e accom-

panied by a check box and are activated



or deactivated  by pressing said

check box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

Press to close a pop-up window or an in-

put window.





Press them to change the set

up adjust-

ments one at a time.



Move the slider around the scr

een by

pressing it lightly and without lifting your

finger.

Opening list entries and searching

in lists

Fig. 177

Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated by

essing them on the scr

een dir

ectly or by us-

ing the adjustment butt

›

››

Fig. 172

›

Fig. 1

Mark list entries using the set

up butt

and open them

●

urn

the set

up button to mark the entries on

the list with a rectangle one by one and con-

tinue searching the list in this manner.

●

Press the setup button to activate the

marked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)

The scroll bar is shown on the right and its

size depends on the entries in the list

›››

Fig. 177

176

Introduction

●

Briefly pr

ess

the scr

een abo

e or below the

scroll marker.

●

OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker

and without lifting it, move it around the

screen. Lift your finger off the screen when

you reach the desired position.

●

OR: Place your finger in the centre of the

screen and without lifting it, move it around

the screen. Lift your finger off the screen

when you reach the desired position.

Input masks with on-screen keypad

Fig. 178

Input window with on-screen keypad.

Input windows with on-screen keypad are

used f

or functions such as ent

ering an entry

name

, sel

ecting a destination addr

ess or en-

tering a search term for searching long lists.

The function buttons listed below are not

available in all countries or for all topics.

Subsequent chapters only explain those

functions that differ from those in the screen

shown in the figure.

The input line with cursor is located in the top

bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed

here.

Input windows for “free text input”

In the input masks for open text, you may en-

ter letters, numbers and special characters in

any combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry

(e.g. selection of a destination address)

It is only possible to select a sequence of let-

ters, numbers and special characters that

matches a stored entry.

Suggestions for matching destinations ap-

pear depending on the characters entered in

the input line

›››

Fig. 178

. In the case of

compound names, it is necessary t

o ent

er a

space

If ther

e ar

e fewer than 99 selectable entries,

the number of remaining entries is displayed

after the input line

. Pressing this function

butt

on displ

ays these r

emaining entries in a

list.

ervie

w of the function buttons

Function icon and text: operation and ef-

fect

Letters

and dig-

its

Press them t

o copy them into the input

line.

Press to change the keypad to another

language. Keypad languages can be se-

lected from the menu System set-

tings > Language.

Press to show symbols on the keypad.

Displays the number and opens the list of

remaining selectable entries that mat

the entered text.

Scroll bar, the size of which depends on

the number of matching entries.

Hold and press to display a pop-up win-

dow with the special characters based on

said lett

er. Press the desired character to

enter it. Some special characters can be

written out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).



Press to enter a space.



Press to delete characters in the input line

from right to left.

Press and hold to delete several charac-

ters.

BACK



Press to close the input window.

177

Infotainment System

Proximity sensors

3 Valid for: Media System Plus/Navi System

The Infotainment system is equipped with an

int

egrated proximity sensor

›››

Fig. 173

The image on the screen changes from dis-

play mode to aut

omatic operation when your

hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the

function buttons are automatically highligh-

ted to facilitate their use.

Additional information and display

options

The displays appearing on the screen may

ary depending on the settings, and may dif

er fr

om those described her

The status bar on the screen can display, for

example, the current time and outside tem-

perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-

pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 179

Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you

o set up your Inf

ainment syst

em the first

time you s

witch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainment

system, the initial setup screen will appear

›››

Fig. 179 if any parameters have not been

set or if the NEVER function button has not

been pressed.

Function button: function

Closes the Configuration Wizard, and

the main menu or last mode in which

you used the Infotainment system will

appear

. The next time you switch on

the system, the Configuration Wizard

will start up again.

Function button: function

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changing

the settings of the Infotainment sys-

tem. If you want t

o perform the initial

system setup, you must enter via Sys-

tem setup and select Configura-

tion Wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

Press to configure the time and date (if

it has a navigation system it will be

configured automatically with the

GPS).

Press to search and store to memory

the radio stations that have the best

reception at that moment on all av

ail-

able bands (AM, FM and DAB).

Press to link your mobile telephone to

the Infotainment system.

Press to select your home address us-

ing your current position or by man-

ually entering an address.

To go t

o the previous or next parameter

to set.

When a parameter has been set, the

only way to reset it is from the main

menu, clicking on it, and not using the

Previous/Next buttons.

When setting any parameter, a confir-

mation mark will appear on it .

178

Connectivity

Function button: function

FINISH

Once one or more settings have been

applied, click on this in the main menu

of the wizard to confirm and finalize

the settings.

If ther

e are any parameters you have

not set, the next time you connect the

Infotainment system, the Initial Config-

uration Wizard will start up.

Only valid for Navi System.

Connectivity

Dat

a tr

ansf

This communication can allow data to be

read and/or written.

From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer

for SEAT apps, ther

e is a checkbox to acti-

vate/deactivate the function and a dropdown

menu called Operation via apps which

controls the level of interaction between the

apps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description

Fig. 180 Related video

The Full Link system provides a way of bring-

ing t

ogether t

echnol

ogies that all

w commu-

nication between the Infotainment System

and mobile devices:

●

MirrorLink

●

Android Auto™

●

Apple CarPlay™

Interfaces

To access the Full Link system, press the info-

tainment button 

/  or pr

ess the infotain-

ment butt

on 



 /  and then pr

ess

Full Link

The connection t

o Full Link is made thr

ough a

USB int

erf

ace

WARNING

If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in-

correctly secured in the vehicle

, it could

move around the passenger compartment

in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre,

emergency stop or accident, resulting in in-

jury.

●

While driving, mobile terminals must be

securely fastened in position, outside the

airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed

away.

WARNING

Any applications that are not suitable or

execute incorrectly may cause damage t

the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.

●

SEAT recommends the use of the Apps

that SEAT provides for this vehicle.

●

To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must

activate the option , Settings/System >

Data transfer for SEAT apps.

179

Infotainment System

●

The interaction lev

el of the Apps on the

system must be: ALLOW.

●

Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-

cations from improper use.

●

Never make modifications to the applica-

tions.

●

Consult the instruction manual for the

mobile terminal.

WARNING

The use of applications while driving can

distr

act your attention from the traffic. Dis-

acting the driver in any way can lead to

an accident and cause injuries.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION

●

In areas where special regulations apply

or the use of mobil

e terminals is forbidden,

the mobile terminal must be switched off at

all times. The radiation produced by the

mobile terminal when switched on may in-

terfere with sensitive technical and medi-

cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal-

function or damage to the equipment.

●

SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-

age caused to the vehicle as a result of the

use of applications that are of poor quality

or are defective, the inadequate program-

ming of the applications, the insufficient

coverage of the network, the loss of data

during transmission or the improper use of

mobile terminals.

Note

●

Use of Full Link t

echnology may result in

high consumption of your 3G/4G data pl

an.

●

SEAT recommends having a high battery

charge on the device when connected to

Full Link.

●

SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,

the “Date and time” should be correctly

configured. Select Menu > Settings/Sys‐

tem > Date and Time.

●

SEAT applications are designed to com-

municate with the vehicle and interact with

it via the Full Link connection, therefore its

functionality is linked to the mobile device

being connected via USB.

●

You can find further information on the

technical requirements, compatible devi-

ces, suitable applications and availability

at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 181

Message on Infotainment system

scr

een.

To unblock this feature, you must obtain the

accessory fr

om your SEAT deal

. Otherwise

a message lik

e this will appear on the screen

whenever you select the feature

›››

Fig. 181.

180

Connectivity

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 182 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not hav

Full Link in your v

ehicl

e you can acquir

e it

as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-

ice

Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-

Link

, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

websites to confirm whether your phone

is compatibl

e with the syst

em.

Mirr

or Link

–

Check smartphone compatibilit

www

.mirrorlink.com/phones

–

MirrorLink

1.1 or higher

–

Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-

vice.

Android Auto

–

Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/

–

Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher

–

Install Android Auto™ app

Apple CarPlay

–

Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

–

iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher

–

Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:

use the USB cable approved and sup-

plied by the phone's official distributor.

181

Infotainment System

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 183

Full Link Setup

Fig. 184

Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not

necessary t

o est

ablish the connection be-

een the smar

tphone and Full Link

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-

sary to enable all of the app features

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

●

Switch on the Infotainment system

●

Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's

USB port using a USB cable

›››

page 214.

●

In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se-

lect Activate data transfer for SEAT

apps

›››

Fig. 183:

Finally, a message will appear stating that

data transfer will commence when the device

is connected. Please note that data is trans-

ferred over connections between your vehi-

cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-

ted, the technology compatible with your de-

vice can be used.

Note

Depending on your smartphone, it may

have to be unlocked f

or the connection to

occur.

What should I do if it does not con-

nect?

Restart the mobile device

Check the USB cable visually.

Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check

that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam-

aged or worn.

Visually check

that the USB ports

are properly con-

nected.

Check that the v

hicle and device

USB connections

are not damaged

and/or worn.

Clean the USB ports (device

and vehicle).

Try another compatible mo-

bil

e device.

Have the USB port r

eplaced at

a SEAT Authorised Service.

Have the mobile device r

paired or replace it.

Try another compatibl

e mobile device.

Using the data connection to transfer the

smartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-

tional char

ges. Please check the charges with

your operator.

182

Connectivity

Pairing of portable devices sup-

por

ting the Mirr

orLink

, Andr

oid

Aut

o™ and/or Appl

e CarPlay™

technologies

Fig. 185

Full Link menu

Carousel

When you ent

er the Full Link cont

xt f

or the

first time

, the technologies available for pair-

ing the portable device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-

tem will offer you the technologies available

for establishing a connection with your mo-

bile phone.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-

tween two devices with different operating

systems, a choice will be presented for which

one to make the connection with

›››

Fig. 185.

View of the device list

iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-

Play™.

There are some Android devices that support

MirrorLink

and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-

ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link setup

Function button: function

 Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows

the exchange of information between the v

ehicle and

applications authorised by SEAT.

Last Mode

If a session using one t

echnol

ogy ends with-

out the disconnection being made fr

om the

Inf

ainment system (simply by disconnect-

ing the cable) then when the device is next

connected to it, the session will start without

the user being required to take any action

Information

Consult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a country

Third party applications

For further information:

MirrorLink

www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPl

ay™:

www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Andr

oid Auto™:

www.android.com/auto

Note

●

In order to use Android Auto™ t

echnology

it is necessary to download the Android

Auto™ application, located on Google

Play™.

●

Only compatible applications can be

used, in accordance with the technology

connected.

Unless the device requires the screen to be un-

locked in order to est

ablish the connection.

183

Infotainment System

MirrorLink

Fig. 186

Function buttons in the general view

of compatibl

e applications.

Fig. 187 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink

is a pr

ocol which enabl

es com-

munication betw

een a port

able device and

the Infotainment system via USB.

Using it makes it possible to display and man-

age the content and functions displayed on

the portable device on the Infotainment sys-

tem screen.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,

only specially adapted applications can be

used

›››

in Full Link technology descrip-

tion on page 1

equir

ements

In order to use MirrorLink

, the following re-

quirements must be met:

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

MirrorLink

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system via USB.

●

Depending on the mobile device used, a

suitable application must be installed for the

use of MirrorLink

on the device.

Initiating the connection

●

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection.

●

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-

quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages

Function button: function

Full Link

To return to the Full Link main

menu.

Function button: function

CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps.

Then press the apps to be

closed or the Close all function

button to close all the open ap-

plications.

1 : 1

Press to change to the mobile

device screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

›››

Fig. 187

Press to return to the MirrorLink

main menu.

›››

Fig. 187

Press to display all the function

buttons in the lower or upper

right

-hand margin of the

screen.

›››

Fig. 187  / 

Allows buttons

and

to be

hidden or shown.

›››

Fig. 1

MirrorLink

set

Function button: function

 Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror-

Link

pop-up windows in applications that support it.

184

Connectivity

Apple CarPlay™*

3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-

phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile t

elephones only

support Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables

communication between a mobile telephone

and the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operate

the mobile telephone on the Infotainment

system screen.

Requirements

In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following

requirements must be met:

●

Make sure that you do not have Apple

CarPlay™ restricted on your device

, at: Set-

tings > General > Restrictions >

CarPlay > ON.

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

Apple CarPlay™.

●

The mobile device must be connected to

the Infotainment system via USB.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection.

●

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-

quest that you accept the device.

●

If you start the session using Apple

CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible

to pair another device via Bluetooth

. The fol-

lowing message will appear in the main

Phone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlay

first, before you can connect an-

other mobile telephone.

Holding down the  button will start the

Apple™ voice “engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-

ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*

3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto™ is a pr

otocol which enables

communication between a portable device

and the Infotainment system via USB.

This makes it possible to display and operate

the mobile telephone on the Infotainment

system screen.

Requirements

In order to use Android Auto™, the following

requirements must be met:

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

Android Auto™.

●

The mobile device must be connect

ed to

the Infotainment system via USB.

●

The Android Auto™ application should al-

ready be downloaded and installed on the

mobile device.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the

mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-

nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB

connection, and to be sure to follow the in-

structions of the device being paired.

●

The first connection to Android Auto™ must

be done while the vehicle is stationary.

●

Once the first pop-up window about ac-

cepting data transfer between the car and

the device has been accepted, a message

will appear requesting that you check your

mobile device for the confirmations needed

to pair it with the Infotainment system.

●

If you are initiating the session using

Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-

bile telephone connects automatically via

Bluetooth

to the Infotainment system tele-

phone and it will not be possible to pair an-

other mobile telephone via Bluetooth

Holding down the  button will start the

Android™ voice “engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-

ment system, press the Return to SEAT

button.

185

Infotainment System

Note

Some mobile devices require a change in

the USB connection mode in order to use

Android Auto™.

●

Mak

e sure that your mobile is in “Media

Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is

connected by USB to the Infotainment sys-

tem.

Note

Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™

services, as well as certain basic applica-

tions of the Android syst

em.

●

Make sure that you always have Google™

services updated in order to use this tech-

nology.

Frequently asked questions about

Full Link

What is the connection method?

USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicl

No. The USB cable supplied with the device should

be used.

Is there a navigation option?

Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link

technologies if the technol

ogy is available in your

country and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Link

system navigator (via telephone) inst

ead of an-

other navigator?

Benefits: Daily updates.

Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages?

With certified apps, you can answer but not send

voice messages.

What apps are visibl

e while driving?

Depending on the technology:

– for MirrorLink

: SEAT

-certified apps and CCC,

– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,

– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible apps?

Compatible apps can be found on the following links:

www.mirrorlink.com/

www.android.com/auto/

www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download apps?

On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink

and

on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re-

paired?

If the problem is in the car, you shoul

d go to the deal-

er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should

see your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified?

This depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink

avail

able in my country?

Yes, Mirr

orLink

is available in all the countries and

regions where SEAT operates.

What are the differences between MirrorLink

Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™?

Mirr

orLink

is not compatible with Android Auto™ and

Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.

They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is

designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-

ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink

be installed in a previous SEAT

model?

No, this is not possible.

Where can I find more information about Full

Link?

If you have any questions, please see our Innova-

tion/Connectivit

y sections on our website:

www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-

[email protected]

186

Connectivity

SEAT Media Control*

Intr

oduction

3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /

Colour

Fig. 188 Related video

The SEAT Media Contr

app can be used

o r

emot

ely oper

ate some partial functions in

Radio mode, Media mode and Navigation

mode. Information can be exchanged be-

tween a device and the Infotainment System.

Each one of the functions is operated by

means of a Tablet or partially by means of a

mobile phone.

Operating requirements:

●

A tablet or mobile phone.

●

The app must be available on the corre-

sponding device.

●

There must be a WLAN connection between

the Infotainment System and the device. Se-

lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >

Share connection via WLAN > Configu-

ration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-

vated:

●

From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-

fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to

activate/deactivate the function and a drop-

down menu called Operation via apps

which controls the level of interaction be-

tween the apps and the system. Select Menu

> Settings/System > Transfer data

from mobile devices.

You can obtain information about technical

requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT

dealerships.

Telephone functions are not part of the func-

tions of this app.

Data transmission and control

functions

Fig. 189

SEAT Media Control Main menu

The Infotainment System can be operated

om other seats in the v

ehicl

e as f

oll

ows, with

the help of SEAT Media Control:

●

Radio remote control.

●

Multimedia playback remote control.

The following information can be exchanged

between a device and the Infotainment Sys-

tem, depending on the country and the

equipment:

●

Navigation destinations.

●

Traffic information.

●

Social media contents.

●

Audio transmission.

Availability depends on the country.

187

Infotainment System

●

ehicl

e dat

●

ocation-specific inf

ormation, for example,

POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction

3 Not available for model: Media System Touch /

Colour

The Infotainment Syst

em can be used to

share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-

ces

›››

page 188, Setting up WLAN connec-

tion sharing.

The Infotainment System can also use the

WLAN hotspot of an external wireless device

to provide Internet to the devices connected

to the hotspot (WLAN client)

›››

page 189,

Setting up Internet access.

Note

●

Data transmission may incur charges.

Due to the high v

olume of data exchanged,

SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate

mobile phone deal for data transmission.

Mobile phone operators can provide the

relevant information.

●

The exchange of data packages o

ver the

internet may generate additional costs, de-

pending on your mobile phone rate, partic-

ularly if you are abroad (for example,

roaming rates).

Setting up WLAN connection shar-

ing

The Infotainment System can be used to

share a WLAN connection with 8 wireless de-

vices.

Est

ablishing the connection with the wire-

less network (WLAN)

●

Press the Infotainment button  and then

press the Settings

/ Syst

menu.

●

Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the

Inf

ainment Syst

em. T

o do so

, press the

WLAN function button.

●

Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the

wireless device that is to be connected. If

necessary, refer to the manufacturer’s in-

struction manual.

●

Activate the mobile device assignment on

the Infotainment System. To do so, press the

Enable WLAN connection

button and activate

the checkbo

●

Enter and confirm the netw

ork k

ey dis-

ayed on the wir

eless device.

The following settings can also be made on

the menu Share connection:

WPA2 encryption automatical-

ly generates a network key.

Network key automatically gen-

erated. Press the function button to

manually change the network key. The

network key must have a minimum of 8

characters and a maximum of 63.

WLAN Network name (maximum of 32

characters).

Activate

the checkbox to deactivate the visibility

of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be

necessary to enter other data into the wire-

less device.

Repeat this process to connect other wireless

devices.

Security level:

Network key:

SSID:

Do not send network name (SSID):

188

Connectivity

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create

a ciphered l

ocal wireless network quickly and

simply.

●

Establish the connection with the wireless

network (WLAN)

›››

page 197.

●

Press the WPS button on the WLAN router

until the warning light on the router starts

flashing.

●

OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the

WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router

starts flashing.

●

Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed.

Repeat this pr

ocess to connect other wireless

devices.

Setting up Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLAN

hotspot of an e

ernal wir

ess de

vice to es-

tablish an internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-

less network (WLAN)

●

Activate and check the wireless hotspot on

the external device. If necessary, refer to the

manufacturer’s instruction manual.

●

Press the Infotainment  button and then

press the Settings

menu; OR access Media or

SEAT Media Contr

mode and press the SET

TINGS

menu.

●

ess the

WLAN

menu and then enter Inter-

net access settings on your phone and acti-

vate the checkbox.

●

Press the Find function button and select

the wireless device you want from the list.

●

If necessary, enter the network key of the

wireless device in the Infotainment System

and confirm with OK.

To manually enter the net-

work settings of an external wireless

(WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be

necessary to enter other data into the wire-

less device.

Manual settings:

Note

Due to the large number of different wire-

less devices in existence

, it is not possible

to guarantee fault-free operation of all

functions.

This function depends on the equipment and

the country in question.

If the WLAN router does not support WPS the

network must be configured manually.

189

Infotainment System

Operating modes

adio

ed video

Fig. 190 Radio mode

Radio main menu

Fig. 191 Radio main menu.

Fig. 192 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button 



/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

to open the R

dio

main menu

›

Fig. 191.

Radio main menu function buttons

Function button: function

To change the group of memory but-

tons slide a finger over the memory

buttons fr

om left to right or vice-versa

BAND

Allows you to select the frequency

band.

STATION

LIST

Opens the list of currently receivable

adio from the active frequency band.

MANUAL

All

ows you to select the frequency

manually.

VIEW

Allows you to select the information

shown on the screen. Only availabl

e in

DAB mode.

Function button: function

SETTINGS

Opens the setup menu of the active

equency band (FM, AM or DAB).





Selects the pre

vious or next stored sta-

tion or of the station list. This setting

can be changed in the Radio settings

menu (FM, AM, DAB).

1 t

o 18 Memory buttons

›

page 191.

SCAN

ops the scan function (only visible

when the function is under w

ay). It can

be activated in the settings menu (FM,

AM and DAB).

Information and possible icons

Display: Meaning

View the frequency or the name of the

station and, where applicable, the r

adio

text. The name of the radio station and

the radio text will only be displayed if

equipped with RDS and if it is active.

RDS

Off

The RDS radio data service is deactiva-

ted.

Traffic information can be r

etrieved: se-

lect Radio > Settings > Traffic

station.



No stations with traffic ne

ws are availa-



The radio station is st

ored on a memory

button.

190

Operating modes

Display: Meaning

AF off

The tracking of alternative frequencies is

disabl

ed.

Note

●

The availability of AM and DAB bands de-

pends on the country and/or equipment. In

the e

vent that the AM and DAB bands are

not available, the BAND function button

text will not be shown.

●

Bear in mind that being underground, in

tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or

mountains can interfere with radio signals.

●

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to

the windows may affect reception on vehi-

cles with a window aerial.

Memory buttons

Fig. 193

Radio main menu.

In the R

adio main menu, you can store sta-

tions fr

om all av

ail

abl

e frequency wave-

lengths on the numbered function buttons.

These function buttons are called “memory

buttons”.

Functions of the memory buttons

Selecting the

ation fr

the memory

butt

ons

ess the memory butt

on corre-

sponding to the desired station.

The stor

ed stations can only be

played by pressing the corre-

sponding memory button pr

ovided

it can be received at your current

location.

Change mem-

ory bank

Move your finger over the screen

from left to right or vice-versa.

OR:

Press one of the function but-

tons

›››

Fig. 193

The memory buttons are displayed

in three memory banks.

Storing the

station on the

memory but-

ons

Keep and hold the desired memory

button until an audible signal is

heard, the station will be stored on

this memory button. You can also

store a station from a station list.

Functions of the memory buttons

Storing the

station logo on

the memory

buttons

A station logo can be assigned to

the stations stored on the memory

buttons.

A l

ogo is automatically assigned

from the database if the Advanced

radio settings option is enabled

A logo can also be assigned man-

ually from an external data source

(USB/SD card).

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

Media

Intr

oduction

Fig. 194 Related video

“Media sour

ces

” ar

e audio sour

ces cont

ain-

ing audio files on various different data stor-

age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external

MP3 player). These audio files can be played

191

Infotainment System

by the Infotainment system via their corre-

sponding driv

es or audio input sock

ets (int

nal CD driv

e, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi-

media socket etc.).

Audio and video files on data storage devices

are usually protected by intellectual property

rights, as per the corresponding national and

international laws. Be aware of the current le-

gal provisions!

Note

●

Do not use memory card adapters.

●

SEAT assumes no liability for any det

erio-

ration or loss of files on data storage devi-

ces.

Media main menu

Fig. 195

Media main menu.

Using the Media main menu, diff

ent media

sour

ces can be sel

ect

ed and played.

●

Press the infotainment button 

/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

to open the Me-

dia main menu

›

Fig. 195

It will continue pl

aying the last media source

selected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicated

on the dropdown list when pressing the

SOURCE

function button

›

Fig. 195

If ther

e is no available media source, the Me-

dia main menu is displayed.

Function buttons of the main Media menu

Function button: function

SOURCE

Indicates the media source being

played. Press to select another me-

dia sour

›››

page 193.

: Internal CD drive

›››

page 194.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo-

ry card

›››

page 194

USB 1

, USB 2 *: External data stor-

age device connected to the USB

port 

›››

page 195.

AUX

: External audio source con-

nected to the AUX-IN multimedia

socket

››

›

page 195.

BT AUDIO

: Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 196.

SELECTION

Opens the tr

ack list. Depending on

the l

evel, track list, folders or

source.





Changes track in Media mode or

fast forward/r

ewind

›››

Fig. 195.



Playback stops. The 

function

button changes to  .



Playback is resumed. The  func-

tion button changes to  .

SETTINGS

Opens the Media Settings

menu.

192

Operating modes

Function button: function



REPEAT

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on

the same memory l

evel as the track

being played at that moment. If in

the Media Settings menu the

 Mix/Repeat including subfolders op-

tion is enabled, it also includes the

subfolders.



REPEAT

The curr

ent track will be repeated.

MIX



Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on

the same memory l

evel as the track

being pl

ayed at that moment. If in

the Media Settings menu the

 Mix/Repeat including subfolders

op-

tion is enabled, it also includes the

subfolders.

Messages and symbols on the Media main

Display: Meaning

Displays information about the artist

name, album name and song title (CD

text

, ID3 tag on compressed audio

files).

Audio CD: displays track information. If

no data is available, it only displays

Track and the number corresponding to

the position it occupies on the data stor-

age device.

Album cover display: If there are various

covers within the same folder/album, the

syst

em only displays one of them.

It prioritizes displaying the covers in the

following manner:

1. Cover embedded in the file(s).

2. Image in file folder.

3. Default icon of the connected device.

The playing time so far and time remain-

ing in minutes and seconds. In the case

of audio files with variable bit r

ates (VBR)

the remaining time may vary.

The TP function is active and can be

used: sel

ect Radio > Settings >

Traffic programme (TP).



There are no tr

affic stations available:

select Radio > Settings > Traf-

fic programme (TP).

Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note

●

When the media source is inserted, play-

ing will not st

art automatically; it is neces-

sary for the user to select the source. Nor

will the media source change when it is

ejected.

Changing the Media source

Fig. 196

MEDIA mode: change media source.

●

From the Media main menu, pr

ess the



 / 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

Info-

ainment butt

on r

epeat

edly t

o cycle through

the available media sources.

●

OR: From the Media main menu, press the

SOURCE

function button

›

Fig. 196

and se-

ect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources not

selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

193

Infotainment System

When a Media source that has already been

ayed is sel

ect

ed again, pl

ayback is r

sumed from the point at which it was stop-

ped.

Optional Media playback sources

Function button: media source

CD Internal CD drive

›››

page 194.

SD CARD 1

SD memory card

›››

page 194.

SD CARD 2

USB 1 External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port 

››

›

page 195.

USB 2

AUX

External audio source connected

to the AUX-IN multimedia socket

›››

page 195.

BT AUDIO

Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 196.

WLAN *

External audio source connected

by WLAN

›››

page 197

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

Note

The Media source can be changed in the

Track list view

: select Media > View.

Insert or eject a CD

3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi

System

Fig. 197

Slots for data storage devices in the

e compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating the

unit whil

e the v

ehicl

e is in motion. Insert or

change the dat

a st

orage device before mov-

ing off!

The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio

data CDs.

Inserting a CD

●

Hold the CD with the printed side facing up.

●

Push the CD into the slot

›››

Fig. 197

the point wher

e it is dr

awn in aut

omatically.

Ejecting a CD

●

ess butt

on 

●

The CD in the driv

e will be e

ject

ed and

must be r

emo

ved within approximately

10 seconds.

Insert or eject a memory card

Depending on the features and the country,

the vehicle may have one or two sl

ots for SD

cards.

Inserting a memory card

Insert the compatible memory card, bevelled

edge first and with the label face up (con-

tacts face down), into slot

›››

Fig. 197

, until

operly insert

ed.

If a memory car

d cannot be insert

ed, mak

sure it is positioned correctly and is compati-

ble with the unit.

Removing a memory card

The inserted memory cards must be pre-

pared for removal.

●

From the main Media menu, press the

SETTINGS

button to open the Media Set-

tings menu or pr

ess the inf

ainment butt

 / 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

and

then pr

ess Settings

/ Syst

, to open menu

System settings.

●

Press the R

emo

e saf

ely function button. A

opdo

wn menu appears with the f

oll

wing

options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

194

Operating modes

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the memory

car

d fr

om the syst

em, the function butt

on be-

comes inactiv

e (grey colour).

●

Press the inserted memory card. The mem-

ory card “jumps” to the eject position.

●

Remove the memory card.

Unreadable memory card

If a memory card is inserted and the data

cannot be read, the relevant warning ap-

pears.

External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port 

Depending on the features and the country,

the v

ehicl

e may hav

e one or tw

o USB con-

nections

›

››

page 214.

Audio files on an external data storage device

connected to the USB port  can be played

and controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external data

storage devices, this means USB mass stor-

age devices containing supported audio files,

such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed and

played. Other files are ignored.

Instructions and restrictions

Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other

media players depends on the unit.

The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt-

age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks with a capacity greater

than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32

file system in some circumstances. You will

find the necessary software and information

on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions and

limitations regarding requirements for media

sources.

Disconnecting

Any connected data storage devices must

be prepared before their disconnection in or-

der to remove them.

●

From the main Media menu, press the

SETTINGS

button to open the Media Set-

tings menu or pr

ess the inf

ainment butt



/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

and

then pr

ess Settings

/ Syst

, to open menu

System settings.

●

Press the R

emo

e saf

ely

function button. A

opdo

wn menu appears with the f

oll

wing

options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the data stor-

age device from the system, the function but-

ton becomes inactive (grey colour).

●

Now the data storage device can be dis-

connected.

Note

●

Do not connect an external media player

at the same time to pl

ay music via Blue-

tooth

and via the USB port  with the In-

fotainment system, as this could cause

playback limitations.

●

If the external player is an Apple™ device,

it cannot be simultaneously connected by

USB and by Bluetooth

●

If a connected device is not recognised,

disconnect all the connected devices and

try connecting the device again.

●

Do not use memory card adaptors, USB

extension cords or USB hubs!

External audio source connected to

the AUX-IN multimedia sock

et 

Depending on the equipment and country

ther

e may be an AUX-IN multimedia sock

›

page 214.

The connected external audio source is

played over the vehicle speakers and cannot

be controlled via the Infotainment system

controls.

The connection of an external audio source is

indicated by AUX on the screen.

195

Infotainment System

Connecting an external audio source to

the AUX-IN multimedia sock

●

er the base v

olume on the Infotainment

system.

●

Connect the external audio source to the

AUX-IN multimedia socket.

●

Start playback on the external audio

source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select AUX .

Connecting an external audio

sour

ce via Bluet

ooth

Bluetooth

Audio mode all

ws you t

o list

en t

audio files being played on a Bluetooth

au-

dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-

ted via Bluetooth

(audio playback by Blue-

tooth

) over the vehicle speakers.

Conditions

●

The Bluetooth

audio source must support

the A2DP Bluetooth

profile.

●

In the Bluetooth Settings menu the

 Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function

must

be on. Sel

ect

Phone > Settings > Blue-

tooth.

ting Bluet

ooth

audio transfer

●

Activate Bluetooth

visibility on the external

Bluetooth

audio source (e.g., mobile tele-

phone).

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select B

T audio

●

Press Sear

ch f

or ne

w de

vice in order to con-

nect an e

ernal Bluet

ooth

audio sour

ce f

the first time

›››

page 210.

●

OR: Select a Bluetooth

external audio

source from the list.

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

screen of the Infotainment system and on the

Bluetooth

audio source regarding the rest of

the procedure.

You may still need to manually start playback

on the Bluetooth

source.

When playback on the Bluetooth

audio

source is stopped, the Infotainment system

remains in Bluetooth

Audio mode.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the Bluetooth

audio

source can be controlled via the Infotainment

system depends on the connected Blue-

tooth

audio source.

The available functions will depend on the

Bluetooth

Audio profile that the connected

external player supports.

With media players that support the AVRCP

Bluetooth

profile, playback on the Blue-

tooth

audio source can be automatically

started or stopped when the unit is switched

to Bluetooth

Audio mode or to a different au-

dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or

change the track via the Infotainment system.

Note

●

Due to the large number of possible Blue-

ooth

audio sources, it is not possible to

guarantee fault-free operation of all de-

scribed functions.

●

Do not connect an external media player

to play music via Bluetooth

and via the

USB port 

›››

page 195 at the same time

with the Infotainment system, as this could

cause playback limitations.

●

If the external player is an Apple™ device,

it cannot be simultaneously connected by

USB and by Bluetooth

196

Operating modes

Connecting an external audio

sour

ce thr

ough WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media System

Touch/Colour

WLAN allo

ws wireless connection between an

external audio source (for example a smart

phone) and the Infotainment system.

To use this connection, the device being con-

nected must have an app compatible with

the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-

cation protocol, allowing the app to provide

the system with the available media content.

Conditions

●

Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed

on the mobile device.

●

Having the Enable WLAN connection op-

tion activ

e, which can be found in the wireless

connection configuration.

●

Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-

ment system using a password generated by

the system. The pairing must be done from

the mobile device that you wish to connect to

the Infotainment system.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-

back of the WLAN audio source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select WLAN .

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

scr

een of the Inf

ainment syst

em and on the

WLAN audio sour

ce regarding the rest of the

procedure.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the WLAN audio source

can be controlled via the Infotainment system

depends on the connected WLAN audio

source and the application used.

Note

●

The Infotainment system does not pro-

vide an int

ernet connection, it only estab-

lishes a wireless connection between the

mobile device and said system.

●

Via the WLAN, only the connection be-

tween the device and the Infotainment sys-

tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-

pends on the application itself.

Images

3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi

System

Using the Images

menu, image files can be

viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-

show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-

ble data storage de

vice (e.g., a CD or an SD

card).

●

Press the Infotainment button 

›››

Fig. 173

and then press the Images

function button.

●

Press the SOURCE function button to select

the sour

ce wher

e the pict

es in question ar

located.

Function button: function

SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.



The image viewed was obtained via

GPS l

ocalisation and upon pressing

this function button, the navigator

menu opens t

o start a route to this

destination.

 / 

Rotate the view of the image to the

left or the right.



Reset the view of the image.



o stop the playback of a slideshow.

The 

function button changes to

 .



To continue the playback of a slide-

show. The  function button

changes to  .

197

Infotainment System

Function button: function





To change to the PREVIOUS or

NEXT image.

The same function can be per-

formed by sliding your finger hori-

zontally across the scr

een.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the view

To enlarge or reduce the vie

w of the image

displayed:

●

Turn the adjustment knob.

●

OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the

screen using 2 fingers.

Rotating the vie

w/image

To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons

provided for this (





), you can also press

on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and,

while continuing to press with your thumb,

slide another finger (e.g. your index finger)

around it like a compass either clockwise (to

rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock-

wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro-

tate the image 90° with respect to its current

position.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-

tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Navigation

Intr

oduction

Fig. 198 Related video

General information

Using all the dat

a av

ail

abl

, the Infotainment

system calculates the optimum route to the

destination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-

dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-

tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be

taken into account in the route calculation

(dynamic route guidance

›››

page 206).

Spoken instructions and visual guidance on

the navigation unit and on the instrument

panel will direct you to your destination.

CAUTION

The navigation announcements played

may be inaccurate (e.g. due to out

-of-date

navigation data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-

ceiv

e any dat

a fr

om GPS sat

ellit

es (due to a

dense tree canopy, underground car park),

navigation can still continue using the vehicle

sensors.

Possible limitations in navigation

In areas that are not or are only partially digi-

tised on the data storage device, the Infotain-

ment system will still attempt to provide route

guidance.

Only available for the model: Navi System

198

Operating modes

Navigation area and updating navigation

dat

oads and str

eets ar

e sub

ject to constant

change (e.g. new roads, changes to street

names and building numbers). Therefore, if

the navigation data is not updated, then er-

rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid-

ance.

SEAT recommends updating navigation data

on a regular basis. Up to date navigation data

can be downloaded from www.seat.com or

acquired at a SEAT dealer.

Updating and using navigation da-

ta from an SD card

The Infotainment system always requires the

navigation dat

a that is curr

ently v

alid f

or this

unit in or

der to allow all functions to be used

in full. Using an old version may lead to errors

during navigation.

Updating navigation data

The current navigation data can be downloa-

ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-

ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT

dealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet at

www.seat.com.

Using navigation data

●

Insert the memory card

›››

page 194.

●

Do not remove the memory card while test-

ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains valid

navigation data, the following message ap-

pears: “The source contains a valid

navigation database”. It is now possible to

navigate with the memory card data. When

the memory card is no longer needed by the

hardware, it will be prepared for removal

›››

page 194.

Note

●

The inserted memory card must be pre-

par

ed before it is ejected

›››

page 194.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

›››

Fig. 173

; then press Settings/System

to open the System settings menu.

●

Navigation is not possible without the SD

card.

●

Do not r

emove the memory card while

the navigation data is in use. This could

damage the memory card!

●

The navigation memory card may not be

used as memory for other files. The info-

tainment system will not recognise the files

saved.

●

SEAT recommends only using original

SEAT memory cards to use navigation data.

The use of other memory cards could limit

its operation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 199

Navigation main menu

The Navigation main menu all

ws you t

o se-

ect a ne

w destination, call up a previously

used or stored destination and search for

points of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu

●

Press the Infotainment system button 

›››

Fig. 173

to open the last menu that was

open in navigation.

Function butt

ons and messages on the

main Navigation menu

Function button: function

The split screen is displayed

›››

page 204.

Messages and function buttons on the map

display

›››

page 205

199

Infotainment System

Function button: function

NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination

›››

page 200.

ROUTE : During route guidance

›››

page 201.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-

tions

›››

page 202.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-

tions and restaurants) within a particular sear

ch area

›››

page 203.

VIEW

To modify or activate or deactivate the split

screen and show POI

›››

Fig. 199

›››

page 204.

SETTINGS

Open the Navigation Settings

›››

Fig. 199.

New destination (enter destina-

tion)

Fig. 200

Search screen.

●

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the

w destination function button.

●

Press the Options function button and se-

ect the r

equir

ed t

ype of destination (Search,

Address,

POI on the route or On map).

●

Using voice control*, if you say Town, street

and number, without pauses, and then the in-

struction “Start Route Guidance” a route to

the given destination will start.

Search for addresses and Points of Interest

using the keypad to enter them

›››

Fig. 200.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,

the full details must be entered. You can also

search for points of interest by names or cat-

egories. When necessary, enter the name of

the city to refine the search.

›››

Fig. 200

Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),

which allow you to mov

e within the text.

Address

Aft

er ent

ering a country and a t

wn, you can

art navigating towards the centre of the se-

lected town.

When narrowing down the destination ad-

dress, please note that every entry restricts

the available range of subsequent selections.

For instance, if the street you are looking for is

not in the postcode area you have selected

in a previous window, you will not be able to

find the street at the street selection stage.

Function button: function

Country : To select the desired country.

City : To enter the desired city or postcode.

Street : To enter the desired street name.

House number : To enter the desired house number.

Junction : To select the desired intersection.

Last destinations : Open the My destinations

›››

page 202.

art

: Start route guidance to the selected address.

Using the map

●

Select the destination on the map or enter

it using GPS coor

dinat

es and confirm with

OK .

Function button: function

Save : To save the selected point of interest in the

destination memory

›››

page 202.

Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti-

nation.

Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga-

tion Settings > Route options.

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point

of interest.

200

Operating modes

After starting route guidance

Fig. 201

Route calculation.

After starting route guidance, the route to the

first destination will be cal

cul

ed.

The cal

cul

ation will be performed in accord-

ance with the data selected in the Route

options menu.

After starting route guidance, three alterna-

tive routes will be suggested depending on

the selected setup

›››

Fig. 201. These 3 routes

correspond to the selectable route options:

Economical, Fast and Short.

Route criteria: Meaning

Blue route: Economical route, the rout

e is calculated

by taking into consideration economic factors.

Red route: Fastest route

to the destination, even if it

is necessary to make a deviation.

Route criteria: Meaning

Orange route: Shortest route t

o the destination,

even if it results in longer travelling time. The route

may have unconventional sections such as secon-

dary roads.

●

Select the desired route by pressing it.

Once the route has been calculat

ed, the sys-

tem gives the first navigation announcement.

Before turning, up to 3 navigation announce-

ments will be heard.

●

Press the adjustment knob

›››

Fig. 17

list

en t

o the l

ast audibl

e navigation instruc-

tion.

A navigation announcement inf

orms you

when you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing you

that you have reached the “destination area”

is given if the exact destination cannot be

reached because it is located in a non-digi-

tised area.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-

ceive information about reported traffic con-

gestion on the route. An additional navigation

announcement is given if the route is recalcu-

lated due to traffic congestion.

During a navigation announcement, you can

change its volume using the button 

›››

Fig. 173

For other adjustments to the navigation rec-

ommendations, sel

ect

Navigation > Set-

tings > Navigation announcements

settings.

Note

●

If you miss a turning during route guid-

ance and are curr

ently unable to turn back,

keep on driving until the navigation system

offers a new route.

●

The quality of the navigation recommen-

dations given by the Infotainment system

depends on the navigation data available

and any reported traffic problems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the R

out

function button.

The R

out

e function button is only displayed

with r

out

e guidance activ

ed.

Function button: function

Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance.

Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new

stopover

›››

page 200.

Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10

km in length) from the current rout

e, e.g. to avoid

congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route

function button and then Cancel congestion .

201

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Route details : View route information for current route.

My destinations (destination mem-

ory)

The stored destinations can be selected from

the My destinations menu.

●

Press the My destinations. function button in

the main Navigation menu.

●

Select the desired function button.

e position

, R

outes

, Destinations ,

ast destinations

or Home addr

ess

e position

●

By pr

essing the St

e position

function but-

on, the v

ehicl

e's curr

ent position is st

ored as

a Flagged destination in the destination

memory.

●

Mark the Flagged destination in the

destination memory.

●

Press the Store

function button.

The name can be changed in the f

oll

wing

input windo

. Press the 

function button to

e the destination.

out

In the

Route mode, you can define various

destinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always the

current vehicle position determined by the In-

fotainment system. The destination is the

end point of a route. Stopover destinations

are driven to before the destination.

●

In the Navigation main menu, press the

My Destinations.

function button.

●

Press the R

out

es function button. The

out

es st

ed pr

eviously will appear.

If you have not stored any routes or want to

create a new route, press the New route

func-

tion butt

on and then f

oll

w the instructions as

or a new destination, before pressing Store

essing on a st

ed r

out

e brings up the fol-

lowing function buttons:

Function button: function

Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the New

route or Edit route menu

Function button or message: function or meaning



Stopover.



Destination.



...

Estimated time of arrival at destina-

tion.



...

Calculated distance to destination.



...

Travelling time.



...

Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the function

butt

ons.



Delete destination.



To st

art guidance direct to the selec-

ted destination. Destinations that

come before the select

ed destination

are ignored.



To open the detailed view of the desti-

nation in question.

Available function buttons.

New dest. To add a new destination to the tour.

Destina-

tions

To add a new destination from My

destinations to the tour.

Storing To store the created tour in the tour

memory.

Start To start route guidance.

Calculate To update calculated distance and es-

timated arrival time.

202

Operating modes

Stop To stop route guidance to the active

destination.



To move a stopover or a destination to

another position on the list. Press and

drag to mov

e the destination.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activated and when a destination has been

added to the tour

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activated.

Last destinations

View of destinations for which a route has al-

ready been started.

My destinations

●

Press the Options function button and se-

lect the desired function button.

Function button: function

Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-

ually and from imported vCards

›››

page 207, Im-

porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have

a stored address (postal addr

ess).

Home address

Only one addr

ess or position can be st

as the home addr

ess at any one time

. The

stored home address can be edited or over-

written.

If a home address has already been stored,

route guidance will be started to the stored

home address.

If a home address has not yet been stored, an

address can be assigned as the home ad-

dress.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current posi-

tion as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manual-

ly.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-

tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Points of interest (POI)

Fig. 202

Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the navigation

dat

a memory ar

e divided int

o diff

ent point

of interest categories. Each point of interest

category is assigned a symbol for display on

the map.

If a database of points of interest has been

imported into the Infotainment system,

›››

page 207, Importing Personal POI the

category Personal POI

is also shown.

In the Map settings menu, the cat

egories of

points of int

est t

o displ

ay on the map can

be configured. Up to 10 categories of points

of interest can be selected.

203

Infotainment System

Selecting a point of interest on the map

Function button: function

There are several points of interest in the area.

Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-

terest.

The only point of interest in this zone. Press the

symbol to open the detailed view of the point of

interest.

Quick POI search

In the Navigation main menu, press the POI

function button and the three main catego-

ries will appear

. Alt

ernativ

ely, ent

er the name

of the point of int

erest to be searched using

the new destination keypad, or press

Search nearby

on the map

›

abl

e on

page 205.

View

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the Vie

function button.

Function button: function



Map display in two dimensions (con-

ventional).

Function button: function



Map display in three dimensions (bird's

eye view).

Buildings are also displ

ayed in three

dimensions. The places of interest and

well

-known buildings are shown in de-

tail and in colour.



To display the destination on the map.



To display the route on the map.

Auto /

Day / Night

To change between day and night for-

mat.

Split screen

Press to display the split screen

›››

page 204.

POI

Display points of interest on the map.

This function button is only displayed with route

guidance activ

ed.

Split scr

een

Fig. 203

Split screen displayed.

The split screen

›

Fig. 203

may display

any of the inf

ormation described bel

●

ess on the name of the split screen to se-

lect a display option.

Function button: function

Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-

elling direction and indicates the current position of

the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,

POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings

up additional inf

ormation

Most frequent routes

: Information on the user's most

frequent rout

es.

204

Operating modes

Function button: function

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and

GPS status (satellite r

eception).

This function button is only shown when route guid-

ance is not active or when predictive rout

e guidance

is active.

Press the 

function button to close the split

screen.

At any moment during navigation, pressing

inside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-

pear with the foll

owing functions:

Function button: function

Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the

point selected on the map.

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI : name of the point of interest (when only one

appears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you

press on the map on various POIs grouped to-

gether).

avourite

: name of the favourite.

Home

: Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac-

tive route.

Sear

ch nearby

: enters in the search menu, but only

for the area around the point select

ed on the map.

Function button: function

Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 204

Messages and function buttons on

the map displ

ay.

Function buttons and messages on the

map displ

ay.

o activ

e function butt

ons  and , press

function button .

Function button: function



To select automatic scaling. If the func-

tion is active, the symbol is displayed in

blue.



Current altitude indicator.

Function button: function



View map scale. Turn the setup button or

move your fingers together/apart on the

touchscr

een to change the scale of the

map.



It can mute or repeat the last announce-

ment, or can change the announcement

volume.



To change the orientation of the map

(north-f

acing or direction of travel). This

function is only av

ailable in 2D mode.



To centre the vehicle position on the map.



To centre the destination on the map. This

function button is only displayed if either

Display destination on map or

Display

route on the map is selected

›››

page 204.



Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few

seconds, it automatically returns to the

last selected scale.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-

ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are

displayed. Select Navigation > Settings >

Map > Show road signs.

205

Infotainment System

Traffic reports and dynamic route

guidance t

o the destination (TRAF-

FIC)

Fig. 205

Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receives

affic r

eports (T

MC/T

MCpr

o) in the back-

ground, provided a TMC traffic news station

can be received at the current location. The

station being listened to does not have to be

the traffic news station.

List of available traffic reports

●

Press the Infotainment button 

›››

Fig. 173

and then press the TRAFFIC

function button.

Dynamic r

out

e guidance

In or

der f

or dynamic r

oute guidance to func-

tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the

route options.

If during route guidance a traffic report is re-

ceived that affects the route being travelled,

an alternative route will be searched for if the

Infotainment system calculates that time can

be saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning



: Slow traffic



: Tr

affic jam



: Accident



: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)



: Slippery road surf

ace



: Danger



: R

oad works



: Strong wind



: Road cl

osed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic congestion that

does not aff

ect the r

out

e cal

cul

ated is dis-

played in grey.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 206

Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, the

syst

em det

ects and st

es in the back

ground

routes that are frequently followed, without

them being active destination routes. This

function has no navigation announcements

unless the user requires them, getting them

by pressing the adjustment knob

›››

Fig. 173

●

On the main screen of the Navigation menu,

in the pop-up windo

, pr

ess the

equent r

outes

button. To display frequently

oll

ed r

outes press the Show on map

button

›

Fig. 206

206

Operating modes

Importing vCards (electronic busi-

ness car

ds)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-

ory

●

Insert the data storage device with the stor-

ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment

syst

›››

page 191.

●

Press the SETTINGS

function button in the

main Navigation menu.

●

In the Navigation settings menu, press

the Import destinations

function button.

●

Select the data carrier with the vCards

sav

ed in the list.

●

ess Import all vCar

ds fr

om this f

older

●

Confirm the import notice with the OK

function button.

The sav

ed vCar

ds will no

w be in the destina-

tion memory

›

page 202 and may be used

for navigation.

Note

Only one address per vCard can be impor-

ted. In the event any vCards hav

e multiple

addresses, only the main address will be

imported.

Importing Personal POI

Importing the Personal POI to a points of

interest destination memory

●

Insert the data stor

age device with the stor-

ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain-

ment system

›››

page 191.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

›››

Fig. 173

and then select Settings .

●

In the Settings menu, press the

Manage memory function button.

●

Press Updat

e my POIs and then press

Updat

and Ne

to import the Personal

POIs.

●

Confirm the import notification with the OK

function button.

The st

ed P

ersonal POI ar

e no

w in the points

of interest destination memory

›››

page 203

and can be used for navigation purposes.

The stored Personal POI can be deleted in

the Navigation Settings > Manage

Storage menu.

Navigation with images

Fig. 207

Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting route

guidance

Bear in mind the r

equir

ements and f

ormats of

the compatibl

e images.

●

Insert the dat

a storage device with the stor-

ed images or connect it to the Infotainment

system.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

›››

Fig. 173

and then select Images .

●

Press the SOURCE

›

Fig. 207

function but

ton and select the data storage device where

the images are stored.

●

Select the desired image.

●

If the image displayed was taken using GPS

localisation, the  function button will appear.

Press to start guidance to a destination.

207

Infotainment System

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation

Settings menu, an additional pop-up win-

dow opens when you start route guidance

●

Pressing the Demo mode

function button

starts a “virtual route guidance” t

o the desti-

nation you have entered.

●

If you press the Normal

function button, a

“real route guidance” starts.

ehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehicle

By pressing button 



/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

of the infotainment system you

will access its main menu with the f

oll

wing

options:

●

VIEW

●

MINIPLAYER, in the t

op right corner (R

adio

or Media function)

●

PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)

●

SETTINGS

›››



page 34

With the function button View you can ac-

cess the following information:

Instrument panel

Press the Instrument Panel

button to choose

om the v

arious displ

ay options and cust

om-

ise the inf

ormation that appears in the Digital

Cockpit

›››

page 104:

Automatic Display: default information

depending on the selected Driving

Mode.

Classic Display: the entire lengths of

the revolutions per minute and speed-

ometer needles are shown.

Views 1, 2, 3: customise the information

that appears in the digital cockpit. Only

2 of these items of information can be

displayed at the same time, but the user

chooses which to display, and in what

order, by moving the finger vertically

over the dials. Depending on the version,

the Views can be memorised by existing

the menu or keeping the View

button

essed.

Consumers

By pr

essing the

Consumers butt

on, inf

orma-

tion on the status of the vehicle's main con-

–

sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via a

consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)

Driving data

The onboard computer is equipped with 3

memories that work automatically. In these

memories you can see the distance travelled,

average speed, time passed, average con-

sumption and autonomy of the vehicle.

Ecotrainer*

If the corresponding equipment is available,

the ECOTRAINER will provide information on

driving style. The information on driving style

is only evaluated and displayed when moving

forward.

Vehicle status

Press the Vehicle status button to access

information on the Vehicle status mes-

sages and Start-Stop system. The Vehicle

status messages are displayed, in addition to

being specified on the corresponding button.

In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are

in kg/h.

208

Operating modes

Telephone

Gener

al inf

ormation

Fig. 208 Related video

The Telephone functions described below

can be used thr

ough the Inf

ainment syst

if ther

e is a mobile telephone connected to it

via Bluetooth

›››

page 211.

In order for the mobile telephone to be able

to connect to the Infotainment system the tel-

ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth

If there is no mobile telephone connected to

the Infotainment system, the telephone man-

agement system will not be available.

The instructions shown on the screen for the

telephone menus will depend on the mobile

telephone used. There may be variations.

Only use compatible Bluetooth

devices. For

further information on compatible Bluetooth

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or

check on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-

phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues between

your mobile telephone and the Infotainment

system, restart your mobile by switching it off

and on again.

WARNING

General, mandatory, legal and country-

specific instructions and laws for the use of

mobile phones inside the vehicl

e must al-

ways be considered.

WARNING

Speaking by telephone and using the mo-

bile telephone management system whil

driving can distract you from the road and

cause an accident.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

In areas of little or no coverage or, in

some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-

pass, your call may be cut off and you may

not be able to make even emergency calls.

WARNING

If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-

correctly secured in the vehicle

, it could

move around the passenger compartment

in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre

or emergency stop, resulting in injury.

●

While the vehicle is in motion, alw

ays se-

cure the mobile telephone properly outside

the airbag deployment zone.

WARNING

Mobile telephones may interfere with and

alt

er the correct operation of pacemakers

if they ar

e carried directly over them.

●

Maintain a minimum distance of at least

20 centimetres between the aerials of the

mobile telephone and the pacemaker.

●

Do not carry your switched-on mobile

telephone in your breast pocket directly

over the pacemaker.

●

If you suspect interference, switch off the

mobile telephone immediately.

CAUTION

High speeds, poor weather or road condi-

tions and the quality of reception can all

affect the audio quality of a t

elephone con-

versation in the vehicle.

Note

●

Restrictions on the use of devices using

Bluetooth

technol

ogy may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

If you wish to connect a device to the tel-

ephone management system via Blue-

tooth

technology, consult the safety

209

Infotainment System

warnings in its instruction manual. Only use

compatible Bluetooth

devices.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo-

bile’s Bluetooth

function in pl

aces with a risk

of explosion. In the majority of cases, these

places are signposted, but not always clearly

›››

in General information on page 209.

They include, for exampl

●

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks

●

The lower decks of boats and ferries.

●

In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid

gas (such as propane or butane).

●

places where the air is l

aden with chemi-

cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal

powder.

●

all other places where the vehicle engine

must be switched off.

WARNING

Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a

risk of explosion! The mobile tel

ephone can

automatically connect to the mobile tele-

phone network again if it loses the Blue-

tooth

connection to the telephone man-

agement system.

CAUTION

In areas where special regulations apply or

the use of mobil

e telephones is prohibit

ed,

both the telephone and the telephone

management system must be switched off.

The radiation produced by the mobile tele-

phone when switched on may interfere with

sensitive technical and medical equipment,

possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam-

age to the equipment.

Bluetooth

echnol

ogy all

ws a mobil

e tele-

phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-

phone management system. In order to use

the telephone management system with a

mobile telephone with Bluetooth

technolo-

gy, it is first necessary to pair them.

Some Bluetooth

mobile telephones detect

and automatically connect when turning on

the ignition if a connection has been previ-

ously established. For this to take place the

telephone must be switched on and its Blue-

tooth

function activated, and there must be

no active Bluetooth

connection with other

devices.

Bluetooth

connections are free.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth

SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-

ephone management system, a data ex-

change takes place via one of the Bluetooth

profiles.

●

Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect-

ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag-

er through the HFP the calls can be managed

via the Infotainment system.

●

Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it

easier to transmit audio to the infotainment

system with stereo quality. This function may

require connecting additional profiles for

managing and controlling audio playback.

●

Phone book access profile (PBAP):

Serves to download phone book contacts

from the mobile telephone to the Infotainment

system.

●

Message profile (MAP):

Serves the

download and synchronise short messages

(SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain-

ment system.

Not available for the Media System Touch/Col-

our model.

210

Operating modes

Note

To prevent them from being heard through

the speakers, the button and mobile tel

phone alert tones must be disconnected.

Where necessary, disconnect the headset

from the mobile telephone you wish to con-

nect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobile

telephone to the Infot

ainment sys-

tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone via

the Inf

ainment syst

em, it is necessary t

pair both de

vices once.

For your safety, we recommend you make the

link when the vehicle is stationary. In some

countries it is not possible to perform the pair-

ing with the vehicle running.

Conditions

You must guarantee the following setup in the

mobile phone and the Infotainment system:

●

The ignition must be switched on.

●

The Bluetooth

function of the mobile tel-

ephone and the Infotainment system must be

active as well as visibility.

●

The keypad lock on the mobile telephone

must be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-

bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary to

enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone

●

Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth

function is activated and visible.

●

Press the infotainment button 

/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

●

Press the Find t

ephone function button and

then R

esults

OR:

●

Press the infotainment button 



/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

●

Press the SETTINGS function button.

●

Press the Sel

ect mobil

e phone function but-

on and then R

esults .

OR:

●

Press the infotainment button 

 / 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

●

Press the SETTINGS function button.

●

Press the Bluet

ooth

function button.

●

Press the Find de

vices

function button and

then R

esults

The name of the Bluet

ooth

function of your

Inf

ainment syst

em will be displ

ayed on the

main Telephone screen and you can edit this

name via the Bluetooth settings

The sear

ch pr

ocess can t

e up t

o 1 minute.

On the screen, the system will dynamically

update the names of the Bluetooth

devices

found.

As soon as the search is completed, the

names of the Bluetooth

devices found are

displayed on-screen.

●

Select the Bluetooth

device you want to

connect on the infotainment system. In cer-

tain circumstances, it is possible that to finish

the connection between the two devices, you

must enter additional data in the mobile tele-

phone and Infotainment system.

●

Use your mobile telephone to enter and

confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-

play of the infotainment system.

●

If more Bluetooth

profile pairing requests

are received on the mobile telephone, make

sure to reply to them.

OR:

●

Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-

play of the Infotainment system with that

shown on the mobile telephone. If they

match, confirm on both devices.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-

ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The

phone book, call list and SMS messages stor-

ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once

211

Infotainment System

the requests have been accepted in the mo-

bil

e phone

. The dur

ation of the l

oading pr

oc-

ess depends on the amount of data stored on

the mobile telephone. After downloading, the

data will be available on the Infotainment

system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-

phones

You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to

the Infotainment system, but the number of si-

multaneous connections varies:

●

Media System Touch / Colour: a phone

connected to the hands-free profile and the

same or a different device connected to the

Bluetooth

audio profile.

●

Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-

bile phones simultaneously connected to the

hands-free profile and one of them is also

connected Bluetooth

audio profile.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,

it automatically connects to the last connec-

ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible to

connect to this mobile telephone, the tele-

phone management system will try to auto-

matically connect to the next mobile tele-

phone on the list of paired devices.

The maximum range of the Bluetooth

con-

nection is approx. 10 meters. The active

Bluetooth

connection disconnects if this dis-

tance is exceeded. The connection is auto-

matically re-established as soon as the de-

vice is once again within Bluetooth

range.

WARNING

Do not perform the pairing and connection

process while driving. This may cause an

accident!

Note

●

It may be necessary to confirm the phone

book data and SMS transfer r

equest on the

mobile telephone.

●

Check that there are no requests pend-

ing acceptance in your mobile phone. If

there are, this could block some of the

functions in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 209

Telephone main menu (view of the 8"

scr

een).

Assign a user profile

The dat

a fr

om the phonebook

, the call lists

and the st

ed speed dial buttons are as-

signed to a user profile and remain stored on

the telephone management system. This in-

formation will be available every time the mo-

bile telephone is connected to the telephone

management system.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-

nutes for the data from the phonebook of the

linked mobile phone to be available in the In-

fotainment system. The next time that the

mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on the

next journey) the phonebook is updated au-

tomatically.

If any entries in the mobile phonebook have

been modified while connected, a manual

update of the phonebook data can be initi-

ated from the User profile settings

menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-

mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones.

If you wish to link/connect another mobile

phone, the oldest user profile will automati-

cally be replaced.

Telephone management system function

buttons

●

Press the infotainment button 

/ 

›

Fig. 1

›

Fig. 1

to open the T

phone

main menu.

Operating modes

Function button: function

Name of connected mobile tele-

phone. Press the icon to the left t

connect or pair with another mobile

telephone.

Speed dial buttons, to which tele-

phone numbers from the phone-

book may be assigned respectively.

To change to another telephone

connected to the hands-free profil

This button will only be visible when

there are two telephones connected

as hands-free. The active user pro-

file corresponds to the telephone

appearing on the screen.

DIAL NUM-

BER

To open the number pad and enter a

telephone number

›››

page 213.

CONTACTS

To open the phonebook of the con-

nected mobile telephone.

SMS

To open the menu for SMS messag-

es.

CALLS

To open call lists of the connected

mobile telephone

›››

page 214.

SETTINGS

To open the Telephone set-

tings menu.

Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour

model.

Display and symbols of the tele-

phone management syst

Fig. 210

Active call.

Display: Meaning

›››

Fig. 210

Name of the mobile network operator (pro-

vider) to which the mobile telephone is con-

nect

ed.

View of stored telephone number or name. If

the name stored in the phonebook has an

assigned photo, it can be displayed: select

Telephone > Settings > User

profile > Show pictures for

contacts*.



Press to accept a call.



Press to end

a call

OR:

ess t

reject an incoming call.



Press to mute or to reactivate the ring tone

during an incoming call.

Display: Meaning

›››

Fig. 210



ess to mute the microphone during an ac-

tive call and to reactivat

e it.



This button keeps the call active. While the

call is on hold the listener will not hear the

conversation. To r

eactivate it, press the call

accept button . To reject it, press the reject

button .



Press to add a participant to the active call.



Charge status of a mobile telephone con-

nect

ed via “Hands-free profile” (

HFP) Blue-

tooth



Strength of coverage signal received by the

mobile telephone.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 211

Enter telephone number menu.

213

Infotainment System

Open the Enter telephone number menu

ess the DIAL NUMBER

function button from

the PHONE main menu.

Possible functions

Enter telephone

number

Entering a phone number with

the keypad.

Press the  function button to

make a call.

Select a con-

tact from the

list

Enter the first lett

ers of the con-

tact to find using the keypad.

The avail

able entries appear in

the phonebook.

Select the desired contact from

the phonebook to make the call.

Enter the coun-

try code

o enter a country code, instead

of the first tw

o digits (interna-

tional access code e.g. “00”)

you can ent

er the character “+”.

Press the function button 0

for

approx. 2 seconds to add the +

Breakdown

service call 

Press the function button to ob-

tain help in the event of break-

down. For this the network of

SEAT dealerships is available to

you with their Mobility Service.

Information call



Press the function button to ob-

tain information on the SEAT

brand and the additional serv-

ices contracted related to traffic

and travel.

Possible functions

Call mailbox 

Press the  Voice mail function

button to make the call.

OR:

Press the 

function button

for about 2 seconds to make a

call.

If the number for the mailbox has

not yet been stored, enter it and

confirm with OK .

Note

●

Breakdown service and information calls

can incur an additional cost on your tele-

phone bill.

●

The Roadside Assistance and Information

services might not work properly, for exam-

ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the

connected mobile telephone are in differ-

ent countries. If you are not able to use

these services contact an authorised SEAT

workshop.

Call Menu (call lists)

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning



Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed

and unanswered calls.

Display: Meaning



Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled

on the mobile telephone and on the Infot

ain-

ment system telephone management system.



Received calls

: Indicates the numbers of the

calls received on the mobile telephone and on

the Infotainment system telephone manage-

ment system.

Note

The availability of the call lists will depend

on the mobile phone used.

Multimedia

USB/AUX-INP

Fig. 212

Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

214

Operating modes

Depending on the special characteristics and

the country, the v

ehicl

e may hav

e a

USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be f

ound in the

orage compartment area of the centre

console

›››

Fig. 212.

The operating description is located in

›››

page 191.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless

Charger*

Fig. 213 Related video

Fig. 214 Centre console: Connectivity Box

The Connectivity Box includes different func-

tions that will help t

o use your mobil

e de

vice

They ar

e the “Wireless Charger” and the

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

The Wireless Charger only features the

“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”

The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-

ces with Qi

technology to be charged with-

out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

●

Place your mobile device with Qi technolo-

1 )

in the middle of the pad with the screen

facing up

›››

Fig. 214.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-

jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-

matically. For further information about

whether your mobile device uses Qi technol-

ogy, please check your mobile phone's user

manual or visit the SEAT website.

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”

The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to

reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy

better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that

you pair the radio and the mobile device us-

ing Bluetooth

and place the mobile phone

on the Connectivity Box pad, so as to have

better reception without having to handle the

mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle's

external aerial:

●

Place your mobile device in the middle of

the pad with the screen facing up

›››

Fig. 214.

When you do so, make sure there are no ob-

jects between the pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically be

ready to make use of the external aerial.

Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-

bile phone wirelessly.

215

Infotainment System

WARNING

The mobile phone may heat up due to the

wireless charging. Think about the temper

ature of your device before you pick it up,

and take care when removing it.

Note

●

Your mobile device must support the Qi

wir

eless inductive charging interface

standard for proper operation.

●

If your mobile phone has a cover or a pro-

tective casing, this may affect the Connec-

tivity Box functions.

●

There must be no metallic objects be-

tween the pad and the mobile device that

might affect the wireless charging or the

connection with the external aerial.

●

The charging time and the temperature

vary in accordance with the device used.

●

To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mo-

bile phone is correctly placed on the pad.

●

The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.

●

Qi technology does not allow you to

charge more than one mobile device simul-

taneously.

●

No improvement in the transmission qual-

ity can be guaranteed if there is more than

one mobile phone on the pad.

●

You are advised to keep the engine run-

ning to guarantee proper wireless charging

of your device.

●

When a telephone with Qi technology is

connect

ed by USB, the charging will be

performed through the medium specified

by each mobile device manufacturer.

216

Start and driving

Driving

t and driving

ting and st

opping the

engine

Ignition key positions

Fig. 215

Ignition key positions.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 31

Ignition s

wit

ched off, steering lock

In this position

›››

Fig. 215

the ignition and

the engine ar

e off and the st

eering may be

ock

ed.

or the Steering lock to operate without the

ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it

locks with an audible sound. You should al-

ways lock the steering wheel when you leave

your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle

theft

›››

wit

ching the ignition or the gl

w plug

syst

em on

Turn the ignition key to this position and re-

lease it

. If the key cannot be turned or it is

difficult t

o t

urn fr

om position

to position

e the st

eering wheel fr

om one side t

o the

other; this will release it.

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this

position

. Electrical devices with high pow-

er consumption ar

e s

wit

ched off t

empor

arily

at the same time.

Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig-

nition key must be turned to position

. The

epetitiv

e st

t pr

evention lock of the igni-

tion prevents possible damage to the starter

motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

●

The ignition key must NOT be remov

from the lock until the vehicle comes to a

standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be

immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

●

Always remove the key from the ignition

when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a

short period. This is especially important if

children or disabled people are left alone

in the vehicle. They could accident

ally

start the engine or work electrical equip-

ment such as the electric windows, result-

ing in an accident.

●

Unsupervised use of the key could start

the engine or any electrical system, such

as the electric windows. This could result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

The starter motor will only work when the

engine is st

opped (ignition key position

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine SEAT k

ey with its corr

ect code

–

e the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-

tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-

oughly and hold it in this position for the

starter to turn the engine on.

–

Turn the ignition key to the starting position

›››

Fig. 215

–

Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-

gine st

arts; the st

art

er mot

or must not run

on with the engine

After starting a very hot engine, you may

need to slightly press down the accelerator.

217

Driving

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little

noisy f

or the first f

w seconds until oil pr

es-

sur

e has built up in the hydraulic valve com-

pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause

for concern.

If the engine does not start immediately,

switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try

again after half a minute. If the engine still

does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be

checked

›››

page 91, Fuses.

WARNING

●

Never start or run the engine in unv

entila-

ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases

contain carbon monoxide, an odourless

and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal

accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause

loss of consciousness and result in death.

●

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the

engine is running.

●

Never use “cold start sprays”, they could

explode or cause the engine to run at high

revs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION

●

When the engine is cold, you should

avoid high engine speeds, driving at full

throttl

e and over-loading the engine. Risk

of engine damage.

●

The vehicle should not be pushed or tow-

ed more than 50 metres to start the engine.

Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con-

verter and damage it.

●

Befor

e attempting to push-start or tow a

vehicle in order to start it, you should first

try to start it using the battery of another

vehicle. Please observe and follow the

notes on the

›››



page 59, How to jump

start.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the

engine with the v

ehicle stationary. Star

t off

immediately, driving gently. This helps the

engine reach operating temperature faster

and reduces emissions.

Note

Natural gas engines (CNG) always start up

with petrol, as a certain operating t

emper-

ature is required for running with gas. Once

the required operating temperature is

reached, the engine will automatically

switch to natural gas mode.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine SEAT k

ey with its corr

ect code

–

e the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-

tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-

oughly and hold it in this position for the

starter to turn the engine on.

–

Turn the ignition key to position

›››

Fig. 215

. The warning lamp  will light f

or en-

gine pr

e-heating.

–

When the l

amp t

urns off

, turn the ignition

key to position

to start the engine. Do not

ess the accel

–

Release the ignition key as soon as the en-

gine starts. The starter motor should not

turn at the same time.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little

noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-

sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-

pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause

for concern.

If there are problems starting the engine, see

the

›››



page 59.

Glow plug system for diesel engines

To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-

tery, do not use any other major electrical

equipment while the glow plugs are pre-

heating.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plug

warning lamp goes out.

218

Start and driving

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank

has run dry

If the fuel t

ank has been compl

ely run dry, it

may t

e longer than normal (up to one mi-

nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.

This is because the fuel system must elimi-

nate air first.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Start-

ing petrol engines on page 218.

CAUTION

●

When the engine is cold, you should

avoid high engine speeds, driving at full

throttl

e and over-loading the engine. Risk

of engine damage.

●

The vehicle should not be pushed or tow-

ed more than 50 metres to start the engine.

Unburnt fuel could enter the particulate fil-

ter and damage it.

●

Before attempting to push-start or tow a

vehicle in order to start it, you should first

try to start it using the battery of another

vehicle. Please observe and follow the

notes on the

›››



page 59, How to jump

start.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the

engine with the vehicle stationary. You

shoul

d drive off as soon as you start the en-

gine. This helps the engine reach operating

temperature faster and reduces emissions.

“SAFE” electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-

thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the k

ey there is a chip that deactivates

the electronic immobiliser automatically

when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated

again automatically as soon as you pull the

key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine SEAT key with its correct code.

If the following message* is shown on the in-

strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle

cannot be started.

The engine can, however, be started if the

appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.

Note

A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-

ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Switching off the engine

–

Stop the vehicle.

–

Turn the ignition key to position

›››

Fig. 215

Engaging the st

eering wheel l

ock

In v

ehicl

es with aut

omatic gearbox, the igni-

tion key can only be removed when the se-

lector lever is in position P

–

Remove the ignition key in position

›››

Fig. 215

›

–

Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-

gage

ossibl

e v

ehicl

e theft is prevented with the

steering lock engaged.

After switching the engine off, the radiator fan

may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also pos-

sible that the fan turns itself on once more if

the coolant temperature increases due to the

Available depending on the market

Depending upon country.

219

Driving

heat accumulated in the engine compart-

ment or due t

o its pr

onged e

xposur

e to so-

lar radiation.

WARNING

●

Never switch the engine off until the v

ehi-

cle is completely stationary.

●

The brake servo works only when the en-

gine is running. With the engine switched

off, more strength is needed to brake. As

normal brake operation cannot be per-

formed, risk of accidents and serious injury

may exist.

●

The steering lock can be immediately

blocked once the key is removed from the

ignition. The vehicle cannot be steered.

Risk of accident.

●

Power-assisted steering does not work

when the engine is off, and more strength is

needed to turn the wheel.

●

If the key is removed from the ignition

lock the steering lock could be engaged

and vehicle steering would not work.

CAUTION

●

When the engine has been running under

a heavy load for a long period, heat can

accumulat

e in the engine compartment

and cause engine damage. For this reason,

idle the engine for approximately 2 minutes

before switching it off.

●

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-

Stop system* switches off the engine, the

ignition remains switched on. Make sure

that the ignition is switched off before l

eav-

ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could

discharge.

Starter button*

Fig. 216

In the lower part of the centre con-

sol

e: st

art butt

on.

Fig. 217

On the right of the steering column:

emer

gency st

art.

The vehicle engine can be started with a

art

er butt

on (Pr

ess & Driv

e). To do so, there

must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the

area of the front or rear seats.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the

vehicle activates the electronic lock on the

steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

Briefly push the starter button without touch-

ing the brake or clutch pedal

›››

or v

ehicl

es with both manual and aut

omatic

ansmission, the starter button text

START ENGINE STOP

flashes like a heartbeat

when the syst

em is pr

eset f

or s

wit

ching the

ignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-off

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-

hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on,

the ignition is not switched off automatically.

The ignition is switched off automatically by

pressing the lock button on the remote con-

trol  or manually by pressing the sensor sur-

face on the door lever

›››

Fig. 139

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,

an emergency start-up will be required. The

relevant message will appear in the dash

220

Start and driving

panel display. This may happen when, for ex-

ampl

, the batt

ery of the v

ehicl

e key button is

very low or flat:

●

Immediately after pushing the starter but-

ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trim

of the steering column

›››

Fig. 217, as close as

possible to the Kessy logo.

●

The ignition connects and the engine starts

automatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after briefly

pressing the starter button, an emergency

disconnect will be required:

●

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-

onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-

ond

›››

●

The engine turns off automatically.

Engine r

est

t f

eat

ure

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle

after the engine stops, you will only have 5

seconds to restart it. A warning will display on

the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to

start the engine without a valid key inside the

vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on

vehicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automatically

when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-

matic engine shutdown is active, if:

●

The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

●

the driver does not step on any pedal,

●

the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if

the dipped beam  is on, the side light re-

mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-

tery has enough charge). If the driver locks

the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the

side light goes out.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle

could result in serious injury.

●

When switching on the ignition,

do not

press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise

the engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-

out due care, this may cause accidents and

serious injury.

●

Never l

eave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau-

thorised person could lock the vehicle,

start the engine or connect the ignition

and, in this way, operate electronic equip-

ment (e.g. the windows).

Note

●

Bef

ore leaving the vehicl

e, always dis-

connect the ignition manually and, if ap-

propriate, take into account the instruc-

tions on the screen of the dash panel.

●

If the vehicle is stationary for a long time

with the ignition on, the vehicle battery

might be discharged and it might not be

possible to start the engine.

●

In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in

the engine starting if it requires preheating.

●

If during the STOP phase you press the

START ENGINE STOP

button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.

●

If the indication is displ

ayed on the in-

strument panel display “Start-Stop system

deactivated: Start the engine manually”,

the START ENGINE STOP

button will blink.

221

Driving

Starting the engine

3 Applies to vehicles with start button

Step

Starting the engine with the start-

er button

›››

page 220.

ess and hold the brake pedal until step 5

is performed.

In vehicles with a manual gearbox:

ess and hold the clutch down until the

engine starts.

Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-

lector lev

er in position P or N.

Briefly press the starter button

›››

Fig. 216

without pr

essing the accelerator. For the

engine to start there must be a valid key in

the vehicle.

After starting the engine, the light of the

START ENGINE STOP

button changes to a

fixed light indicating that the engine has

started.

If the engine does not start, st

op and wait

for approx. 1 minute bef

ore trying again. If

necessary, carry out an emergency start

›››

page 220.

Disconnect the hand brake when you are

about to start driving

›››

page 224.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle with the engine

running, especially if a gear or gear range

is engaged. The vehicle could then sudden-

ly mo

ve or something strange could hap-

pen that would cause damage, fire or seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a

sudden incr

ease in the engine speed.

●

Never use sprays t

o cold start the engine.

CAUTION

●

The st

er mot

or or the engine may be

damaged if you try t

o start the engine while

driving or if you restart it immediately after

switching it off.

●

If the engine is cold, avoid high engine

speeds, pushing the engine too hard and

rapid acceleration.

●

Do not start the engine by pushing the

vehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en-

ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

●

Do not wait until the engine warms up

with the vehicle st

ationary; if you have

good visibility through the windows, start

driving immediately. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and re-

duces emissions.

●

Electrical components with a high power

consumption are switched off temporarily

when the engine starts.

●

When starting with a cold engine, noise

evels may briefly increase. This is quite

normal, and no cause for concern.

●

When the outside temperature is below

+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some

smoke may appear under the vehicle when

the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine

3 Applies to vehicles with start button

Step

Switch off the engine with the

starter button

›

››

page 220.

1. Stop the vehicle completely

›››

Press and hold the brake pedal until the

step 4 is performed.

If you are driving an automatic vehicle,

place the selector le

ver in position P.

4. Apply the handbrake

›››

page 224

Briefly press the start-up button

›››

Fig. 216

. The START ENGINE STOP

button

blinks again. If the engine fails to swit

off, perform an emergency disconnect

›››

page 221.

If the vehicle is equipped with a manual

gearbox, put it into 1st or rev

erse.

222

Start and driving

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehi-

cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-

ol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

The airbags and belt tensioners do not

work when the ignition is switched off.

●

The brake servo does not work with the

engine off. Therefore, you need to press the

break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

●

Power steering does not work when the

engine is not running. You need more

strength to steer when the engine is switch-

ed off.

●

If the ignition is switched off, the steering

column could be locked, making it impossi-

ble to control the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine is made to work hard for a long

time, it may overheat after being s

witched

off. To prevent damage to the engine be-

fore switching it off, leave it idle for approx.

2 minutes in neutral.

Note

After switching off the engine, the cooling

fan may continue to operate in the engine

compar

tment for a few more minutes, even

with the ignition off. The radiator fan is au-

tomatically switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is

the “My Beat” function. This feature pro

vides

an additional indication of the vehicle ignition

system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening

the doors with the remote control, the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes, calling at-

tention to the rele

vant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light of

the START ENGINE STOP

button flashes. With

the engine s

wit

ched off

, aft

er a f

ew seconds,

the STOP ENGINE START

button stops flashing

and goes out.

With the engine running, the

T ENGINE S

button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The time

that l

apses betw

een the moment the user

arts the engine with the S

ART ENGINE STOP

button and the lighting changes from flashing

o fix

ed will depend on specific engine siz

char

act

eristics. Upon switching the ignition

off with the START ENGINE STOP

button, it starts

ashing again.

In v

ehicl

with the St

art-Stop system, the

“My Beat” function also offers additional in-

formation:

●

When the engine stops during the Stop

phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP

but-

ton stays on, since, even though the engine is

off

, the St

art

-St

op syst

em is active.

●

When the engine cannot be stated again

with the Start-Stop system,

›››

page 248, and

needs to be started manually, the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes to indicate

this f

act.

aking and parking

aking capacit

y and br

aking dis-

tance

The efficiency of the brakes depends directly

on the br

e pad

ear

. This wear depends to

a great extent on the conditions under which

the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi-

cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive

short distances or have a sporty driving style,

we recommend that you have the thickness

of your brake pads checked by technical

services more frequently than recommended

in the Maintenance Programme.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-

ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy

rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef-

fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake

discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in this

case, press the brake pedal several times un-

til the brakes are “dry”.

223

Driving

WARNING

Longer braking distances and faults in the

brake system increase the risk of acci-

dents.

●

w brake pads must be run in and do not

have the correct friction during the first

200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking

capacity may be compensated for by

pressing on the brake pedal a little harder,

which also applies when the brake pads

have to be changed further on.

●

If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are

driving on roads which have been salted,

braking power may be lower than normal.

●

On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively

used, they will overheat. Before driving

down a long steep slope, it is advisable to

reduce speed and change down into a low-

er gear or range (depending on the type of

transmission). Thus, make use of engine

braking and relieve the brakes.

●

Never let the brakes “drag” by applying

light pressure. Continuous braking will

cause the brakes to overheat and the brak-

ing distance will increase. Apply and then

release the brakes alternately.

●

Never let the vehicle run with the engine

switched off. The braking distance is in-

creased considerably when the brake ser-

vo is not active.

●

If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is

subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles

can form in the brake system. This reduces

the efficiency of the brakes.

●

Non-standard or damaged fr

ont spoilers

could restrict the airflow to the brakes and

cause them to overheat. Before purchasing

accessories please observe the relevant

instructions

›››

page 307, Technical modifi-

cations.

●

If a brake system circuit fails, the braking

distance will be increased considerably.

Contact a specialised workshop immedi-

ately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Control lamps



It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low

›››

page 321

or fault in the

brake system.

 Do not carry on driving!



It lights up red

Parking brake engaged

›››

page 224

The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-

leased.



It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.

WARNING

●

If the brake warning lamp does not go out

or if it lights up when driving, the br

ake fluid

level in the reservoir is too low so there is a

risk of an accident

›››

page 321, Brake fluid.

Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob-

tain technical assistance.

●

If the brake warning lamp lights up  to-

gether with the ABS lamp  this could be

due to an ABS fault. This could cause the

rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake.

This could cause the rear to break away.

Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek

technical assistance.

Handbrake

Fig. 218 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly to

ent the v

ehicl

e from accidentally rolling

224

Start and driving

away. Always apply the handbrake when you

eav

e your v

ehicl

e and when you park

Applying the handbrake

–

Pull the handbrake lever up firmly

›››

Fig. 218.

Releasing the handbrake

–

Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 218 and guide the handbrake lever

down fully

›››

ays pull the handbr

all the way up, so

there is less risk of driving off with it still en-

gaged

›››

WARNING

●

Never use the handbrake t

o stop the vehi-

cle when it is in motion. The braking dis-

tance is considerably longer, because

braking is only applied to the rear wheels.

Risk of accident!

●

If the handbrake is only partially re-

leased, this will cause the rear brakes to

overheat, which can impair the function of

the brake system and could lead to an ac-

cident. This also causes premature wear on

the rear brake pads.

CAUTION

Always apply the handbrake before you

leave the vehicle

. Put it in 1st gear as well.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,

place the gear lever in position P

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap-

plied when the vehicle is parked.

Alw

ays note the following points when park-

ing the vehicle:

–

Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

–

Apply the handbrake.

–

Put it in 1st gear.

–

Switch the engine off and remove the key

from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel

slightly to engage the st

eering lock.

–

Always take you keys with you when you

leave the vehicle

›››

Additional not

es on parking the v

ehicl

e on

adients:

urn the steering wheel so that the vehicle

rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

●

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn

the front wheels so that they point towards

the kerb.

●

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn

the front wheels so that they point away from

the kerb.

●

Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the

handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING

●

Take measures to r

educe the risk of injury

when you leave your vehicle unattended.

●

Never park where the hot exhaust system

could ignite inflammable materials, such as

dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

●

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain

in the vehicle when it is locked. They would

be unable to open the vehicle from the in-

side, and could become trapped in the ve-

hicle in an emergency. In the event of an

emergency, locked doors will delay assis-

tance to vehicle occupants.

●

Never leave children alone in the vehicle.

They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-

ample, by releasing the handbrake or the

gearbox lever.

●

Depending on weather conditions, it may

become extremely hot or cold inside the

vehicle. This can be fatal.

225

Driving

Braking and stability sys-

ems

Contr

ol l

amps



It lights up

Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys-

tem.

As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the

ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in

the ABS.



Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.



It lights up

Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys-

tem.



Flashes

ASR working.



It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode.



It lights up

›››

page 229

ABS fault

y or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when the

ignition is s

wit

ched on and shoul

d t

urn off af

ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time

taken for the function check.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

This Electronic Stability System reduces the

risk of skidding and improves the vehicl

e's

stability and ability to hold the road.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) con-

tains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and

the traction control system (ASR). The ESC

works together with the ABS. Both control

lamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systems

are faulty. It also includes emergency braking

assistance (HBA).

The ESC system is started automatically

when the engine is started.

The ESC system is always active and cannot

be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys-

tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR

or else select Sport mode.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin

is desirable

›››

page 227.

For example:

●

When driving with snow chains.

●

When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-

faces.

●

When the vehicle is stuck, t

o rock it back-

wards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back on

when you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-

ing the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angle

and road speed to calculate the changes of

direction desired by the driver, and constant-

ly compares them with the actual behaviour

of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for

example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC

brakes the appropriate wheel automatically.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring

the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the

vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end slides

out), the system will act on the front wheel on

the outside of the turn.

Control lamp

There are two control lamps for the electronic

stability control. The lamp  provides infor-

mation concerning function and  discon-

nection status.

If the ESC control lamp  lights up and stays

on after the engine is started, this may mean

that the control system has temporarily

switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC

can be reactivated by switching the ignition

226

Start and driving

off and then on again. If the control lamp

goes out, this means the syst

em is fully func-

tional.

WARNING

●

Do not forget that the electronic st

ability

control ESC cannot defy the laws of phys-

ics. Bear this in mind, particularly on slip-

pery and wet roads and when towing a

trailer.

●

Always adapt your driving style to suit

the condition of the roads and the traffic

situation. The greater safety provided by

the ESC should not encourage you to run

any risks.

CAUTION

●

To ensure that the ESC works correctly,

all f

our wheels must be fitted with the same

tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius

of the tyres can cause the system to re-

duce engine power when this is not desired.

●

Any modifications made to the vehicle

(for example, to the engine, brake system,

running gear or to the combination of

wheels and tyres) may affect the operation

of the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.

Traction control system (ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driv-

en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is

accel

erating.

Description and operation of the traction

control system during acceleration (ASR)

The ASR system intervenes by reducing en-

gine power and preventing the driven wheels

from slipping during acceleration.

TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate

and climb a gradient in slippery conditions

where this may otherwise be difficult or even

impossible.

The ASR automatically switches on when the

engine is started. If necessary, it could be

switched on or off using the Easy Connect

system*.

When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights

up . The ASR should normally be left on. On-

ly in exceptional cases can it be disconnec-

ted, i.e. when you want the wheels to slide;

this done through the Easy Connect system,

by means of the 

/  butt

on and the func-

tion butt

SETTINGS> ESC system, f

or e

ample:

●

With compact temporary spare wheel.

●

When using the snow chains.

●

When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-

rain.

●

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it

by “rocking it”.

The ASR should be switched on again as

soon as possible.

Control lamp

There are three control lamps for the traction

control system:  (for vehicles equipped with

M-ABS),  (for vehicles equipped with ESC)

and .

If the system is deactivated or if it has any

fault, the warning lamp  or  will remain lit.

The warning lamp will also light up if a fault

should occur in the ABS because the ASR op-

erates in conjunction with the ABS. For further

information, see

›››

page 228.

WARNING

●

Remember that not even the ASR can de-

fy the laws of physics. Bear this in mind,

par

ticularly on slippery and wet roads and

when towing a trailer.

●

Always adapt your driving style to suit

the condition of the roads and the traffic

situation. The greater safety provided by

the ASR should not encourage you to run

any risks.

CAUTION

●

To ensure that the ASR works correctly,

identical t

yres should be fitted on all four

wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius

227

Driving

of the tyres can cause the system to re-

duce engine power when this is not desired.

●

Any modifications made to the v

ehicle

(for example, to the engine, brake system,

running gear or to the combination of

wheels and tyres) may affect the operation

of the ABS and ASR.

Connecting/disconnecting ESC

and ASR*

The ESC is switched on automatically when

the engine is st

art

ed, and only w

orks when

the engine is running and includes the ABS,

EDS and ASR syst

ems.

The ASR and ESC function shoul

d only be

switched off in situations in which traction is

insufficient, among others:

●

When driving in deep snow or on surfaces

that are not very firm.

●

To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR and ESC function back

on.

Depending on finishes and versions, it is pos-

sible either to disconnect only the ASR or else

activate ESC Sport mode.

ESC in “Sport” mode

Sport mode can be connected via the Easy

Connect

›››



page 34 system menu. The

ESC and the traction control system (ASR)

have only a limited ability to stabilise the ve-

hicle.

The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles with

a driver information system*, the driver will be

shown the electronic stability control

(ESC) option: sport. Warning! Limited

stability.

Disable ESC “Sport” mode

Through the Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 34. The warning lamp  will

switch off. For vehicles with a driver informa-

tion system*, the driver will be shown the

electronic stability control (ESC) op-

tion: on.

Disable ASR

The Easy Connect system menu is used to

switch off the ASR

›››



page 34. The trac-

tion control system will be disabled.

The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles with

a driver information system* the driver will be

informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR

The Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 34 is used to switch on the ASR.

The traction control system will be enabled.

The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles

with a driver information system* the driver

will be informed that ASR is enabled.

●

Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func-

tion in the Easy Connect system using the



/  butt

on and the SETTINGS > ESC

System function butt

ons.

WARNING

You should switch on the ESC Sport mode

only if the traffic conditions and your driv-

ing ability allow you t

o do so safely: risk of

skidding!

●

With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising

function will be limited to allow for a sporti-

er drive. The driving wheels could spin and

the vehicle could skid.

Note

If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s

Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will

be s

witched off.

228

Start and driving

Electronic differential lock (EDS)*

The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-

cles equipped with Electronic Stabilit

y Con-

trol (ESC)*.

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-

erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-

tions where this may otherwise be difficult or

even impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed

of the driven wheels.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h

(50 mph), it is able to balance out differences

in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi-

mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially

slippery road surface. It does this by braking

the wheel which has lost traction and distrib-

uting more driving force to the other driven

wheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the braking

wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-

tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.

The vehicle will continue to function normally

without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not

informed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automatically

when the brake has cooled down.

Control lamp

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the

ESC control lamp 

. Take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

●

When accelerating on a slippery surface,

or example on ice and snow, press the ac-

celerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven

wheels may start to spin. This could impair

the vehicle's stability.

●

Always adapt your driving style to suit

road conditions and the traffic situation. Do

not let the extra safety afforded by EDL

tempt you into taking any risks when driv-

ing, this can cause accidents.

CAUTION

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-

gine, the brake system, running gear or any

components aff

ecting the wheels and

tyres) could affect the efficiency of the EDL

›››

page 307.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents

the wheel

s fr

om l

ocking during br

aking and is

an import

ant part of the vehicle's active safe-

ty system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels turns too slowly in relation

to the vehicle's speed, and is close to locking,

the system will reduce the braking pressure to

this wheel. The driver is made aware of this

control process by a pulsating of the brake

pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate

warning to the driver that one or more of the

wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control

function has intervened. In this situation it is

important to keep the brake pedal fully de-

pressed so the ABS can regulate the brake

application. Do not “pump”.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,

the best possible control is retained as the

wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee

shorter braking distances in all conditions.

Braking distance could even be further if you

brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip-

pery surface.

The ABS system is faulty if:

●

The control lamp  does not light up when

the ignition is switched on.

●

The control lamp does not go out again af-

ter a few seconds.

●

The control lamp lights up when the vehicle

is moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal

way, without the ABS function. Take the

229

Driving

vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as

possibl

If ther

e is a f

ault in the ABS, the ESC* and the

yre pressure control lamp will also light up.

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp  lights up together

with the brake warning lamp , there is a

fault in the ABS function and in the brake sys-

tem

›››

WARNING

●

The anti-lock brake system cannot defy

the l

aws of physics. Slippery and wet roads

are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice

that the ABS is working (to counteract

locked wheels under braking), you should

reduce speed immediately to suit the road

and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra

safety features tempt you into taking any

risks when driving.

●

The effectiveness of ABS is also deter-

mined by the tyres fitted

›››

page 325.

●

If the running gear or brake system is

modified, the effectiveness of the ABS

could be severely limited.

WARNING

●

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the w

arnings

›››

page 315, Working in

the engine compartment.

●

If the brake system warning l

amp 

should light up together with the ABS warn-

ing lamp , stop the vehicle immediately

and check the brake fluid level in the reser-

voir

›››

page 321, Brake fluid. If the brake

fluid level has dropped below the “MIN”

mark you must not drive on. Risk of acci-

dent. Obtain technical assistance.

●

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault

in the brake system may have been caused

by a failure of the ABS system. This could

cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when

you brake. This could cause the rear to

break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehi-

cle and seek technical assistance.

Hydraulic Brake Assist*

The Hydraulic Brake Assist is only included in

ehicl

es with ESC.

In an emer

gency, most driv

ers br

ake in time,

but not with maximum force. This results in

unnecessarily long braking distances.

This is when the brake assist system comes

into action. When pressing the brake pedal

rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-

gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake

pressure so that the ABS can be activated

more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing

braking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-

al, since the brake assist system switches off

automatically as soon as you release the

brake.

Automatic hazard warning lights activa-

tion

The brake lights flash automatically to indi-

cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in

an emergency situation. If the emergency

braking continues until the vehicle comes to a

standstill, the hazard “warning” lights will

then come on and the brake lights will remain

on permanently from that moment. The

warning lights will automatically switch off

when the vehicle begins to move again or

when the "warning" light button is pressed.

WARNING

●

The risk of accident is higher if you drive

too fast, if you do not keep your dist

ance

from the vehicle in front, and when the road

surface is slippery or wet. The increased

accident risk cannot be reduced by the

brake assist system.

●

The brake assist system cannot defy the

laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are

dangerous even with the brake assist sys-

tem! Therefore, it is essential that you ad-

just your speed to suit the road and traffic

conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-

tures tempt you into taking any risks when

driving.

230

Start and driving

Electronic torque management

(XDS)*

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-

tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to t

urn

at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this

way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer

wheel) receives less drive torque than the in-

ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit-

uations the torque delivered to the inner

wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin.

On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv-

ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit.

This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on

the front axle, resulting in understeer or

“lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct this

effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside

wheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the driver's de-

sired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination with

the ESC and is always active, even when ASR

traction control is disconnected or the ESC is

in Sport mode.

Multi-collision Brake*

In an accident, the multi-collision brake can

help the driv

er by br

aking t

o av

oid the risk of

skidding during the accident, which coul

lead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, side

or rear accidents, when the airbag control

unit records its activation level and the acci-

dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h

(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the

vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-

aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-

board network

The following actions control automatic brak-

ing during the accident:

●

When the driver presses the accelerator,

the automatic braking does not take place.

●

When the braking pressure through press-

ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-

tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake

automatically.

●

Multi-collision braking will not be available

if ESC is malfunctioning.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you

apply t

o the br

e pedal. It w

orks only

when

the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due

to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being tow-

ed, you will have to press the brake pedal

considerably harder to make up for the lack

of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected

by external factors.

●

ver let the vehicle coast with the en-

gine switched off. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident. The

braking distance is increased considerably

when the brake servo is not active.

●

If the brake servo is not working, for ex-

ample when the vehicle is being towed, you

will have to press the brake pedal consid-

erably harder than normal.

Hill driving assistant*

Fig. 219 Related video

This function is only included in vehicles with

ESC.

The hill driving assist

ant helps the driv

er t

e off and upward on a hill when the vehi-

cle is stationary.

231

Driving

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-

ximat

ely tw

o seconds aft

er the driver

takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent

the vehicle from lurching backward when it is

started. During these 2 seconds, the driver

has enough time to release the clutch pedal

and accelerate without the vehicle moving

and without having to use the handbrake,

making start-up easier, more comfortable

and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

●

being on a ramp or hill/slope,

●

driver door closed,

●

vehicle completely stationary,

●

engine running and foot on the brake,

●

besides having a gear engaged or being in

neutral for manual gear change and with the

selector lever at position S, D or R for an au-

tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up-

hill.

WARNING

●

If you do not start the vehicle immediat

ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,

the vehicle may start to roll back under

certain conditions. Depress the brake ped-

al or use the hand brake immediately.

●

If the engine stalls, depress the brake

pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

●

When following a line of traffic uphill, if

you w

ant to prevent the vehicle from rolling

back accidentally when starting off, hold

the brake pedal down for a few seconds

before starting off.

Note

The Official Service or a specialist work-

shop can t

ell you if your vehicle is equip-

ped with this system.

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbo

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 40

Cert

ain v

ersions of the model may include a

6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is

shown on the gearbox lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when

the car is stationary. When the engine is run-

ning and before engaging this gear, wait

about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed

down thoroughly in order to protect the gear-

box.

The reverse lights switch on when the reverse

gear is selected and the ignition is on.

WARNING

●

When the engine is running, the vehicle

will start t

o move as soon as a gear is en-

gaged and the clutch released.

●

Never select the reverse gear when the

vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note

●

Do not rest your hand on the gear lever

whil

e driving. The pressure of your hand

could cause premature wear on the selec-

tor forks in the gearbox.

●

When changing gear, you should always

depress the clutch fully to avoid unneces-

sary wear and damage.

●

Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehi-

cle on a hill. This causes premature wear

and damage to the clutch.

●

Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-

al; although the pressure may seem insig-

nificant, it can cause the premature wear of

the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you

do not need to change gear.

232

Start and driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-

omatic gearbo

Intr

oduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-

ly controlled manual gearbox. Tor

que be-

tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-

mitted via two independent clutches. They

replace the torque converter found on con-

ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for

smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-

hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver to

change gears manually if desired

›››

page 236, Engaging gears with the tip-

tronic mode*.

Control lamps



It lights up green

The brake pedal is not engaged.

To select a range of gears, press the br

ake pedal.



Flashes green

The interlock button on the selector lever is not

pressed.

Movement of the vehicl

e is prevented. Engage the se-

lector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 40

The select

or lever position engaged is high-

lighted on the display in the instrument clus-

ter. With the selector lever in the manual

gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged

gear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lock

When the selector lever is in this position, the

driven wheels are locked mechanically. The

parking lock must be engaged only when the

vehicle is stationary

›››

The int

erl

ock butt

on (the butt

on on the sel

ec-

tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-

multaneously the brake pedal must be de-

pressed before moving the selector lever ei-

ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when

the vehicle is stationary and the engine is

idling

›››

o mo

e the sel

ect

or lever to position R, the

interlock button must be pressed in and at the

same time the brake pedal must be de-

pressed. The reverse lights come on when the

selector lever is in the R position with the igni-

tion on.

N – Neutral (idling)

With the selector lever in this position, the

gear is in neutral.

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position

The selector lever in the D/S position enables

the gears to be controlled in normal mode

(D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S),

move the selector lever backwards. Moving

the lever again will select normal mode (D).

The selected driving mode is shown on the in-

strument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati-

cally selects the best gear ratio. This de-

pends on the engine load, the road speed

and the dynamic gear control programme

(DCP).

233

Driving

In certain circumstances (i.e. traffic hold-ups,

short st

ops, et

c.) and t

o impr

ve comfort, the

vehicle can start up in the D2 gear ratio

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty

driving style. This setting makes use of the en-

gine's maximum power output. When accel-

erating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selector

lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-

tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)

›››

Under cert

ain cir

cumst

ances (e

.g. when driv-

ing in mount

ains) it can be advantageous to

switch temporarily to tiptronic mode

›››

page 236, in order to manually select

gear ratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING

●

Take care not to accident

ally press the

accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stop-

ped. The vehicle could otherwise start

moving immediately (in some cases even if

the parking brake is engaged) resulting in

the risk of an accident.

●

Never move the selector lever to R or P

when driving. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion could result in an accident.

●

With selector lever in any position (ex-

cept P) the vehicle must always be held

with the foot brake when the engine is run-

ning. This is because an automatic gearbox

still transmits power ev

en at idling speed,

and the vehicle tends to “creep”. The ac-

celerator pedal must on no account be

pressed inadvertently when a gear is en-

gaged with the vehicle stationary. The ve-

hicle could otherwise start moving immedi-

ately (in some cases even if the parking

brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an

accident.

●

While you are selecting a gear and the

vehicle is stopped with the engine running,

do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

As a driver you should never leave your

vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is

engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle

while the engine is running, you must apply

the handbrake and engage the parking

lock (P).

●

To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake

and put the selector lever in position P be-

fore opening the bonnet and working on the

vehicle with the engine running. Please al-

ways observe the important safety warn-

ings

›››

page 315, Working in the engine

compartment.

Note

●

If the selector lev

er is moved accidental-

ly to N when driving, release the accelera-

tor and let the engine speed drop to idling

before selecting gear range D or S again.

●

Shoul

d the power supply to the selector

lever be interrupted in position P, the selec-

tor lever will be locked. If this should hap-

pen the manual release can be used

›››



page 40.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 220

Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears from

being engaged inadv

ert

ently, so that the v

hicl

e is not set in motion unint

entionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

–

Switch the ignition on.

Valid for the 1.6 MPI 81 kW automatic engine.

234

Start and driving

–

ess the br

e pedal

and

, at the same

time, hold the lock button in the direction of

the arrow

›››

Fig. 220.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition switched on, the selector

lever is locked in the positions P and N. The

brake pedal must be pressed to release the

lever while pressing the release button if the

selector lever is in the position P. As a remind-

er for the driver, with the lever in positions P or

N the following message will be shown on the

display:

When stationary, apply footbrake

while selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-

tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h

(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the

lever lock is automatically deactivated in po-

sition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the

selector lever is moved quickly through posi-

tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This

makes it possible, for instance, to rock the ve-

hicle “backwards and forwards” if it is stuck.

The selector lever lock engages automatical-

ly if the brake pedal is not depressed and the

lever is in position N for more than about two

seconds.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector lever

handle prevents the driver from inadvertently

engaging certain gears. Press the button in to

disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Once the ignition has been turned off, the key

may be removed only if the gear selector is in

position P. While the key is not in the ignition,

the selector lever is locked in position P.

Note

●

If the selector lev

er lock does not en-

gage, there is a fault. The transmission is in-

terrupted to prevent the vehicle from acci-

dentally moving. Follow the procedure be-

low in order for the selector lever lock to

engage again:

–

With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.

–

With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the selector lever to

position P or N and subsequently en-

gage a gear.

●

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-

cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-

ceed to the next mode:

–

When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not

have the gear range correctly engag-

ed. Press the brake pedal and engage

the gear range again.

–

If the vehicle still does not move in the

equired direction, there is a system

malfunction. Seek specialist assistance

and have the system checked.

235

Driving

Engaging gears with the tiptronic

mode*

Fig. 221

Centre console: changing gear with

tiptr

onic

Fig. 222

Steering wheel: automatic gearbox

ers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option to

change gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selector

It is possibl

e t

o change to tiptronic mode,

both when the vehicle is stopped and while

driving.

–

To switch to tiptronic mode, move the selec-

tor lever from position D/S to the right. As

soon as the change is made the selector

level will be shown in the position M on the

instrument panel display (for example M4

means that the fourth gear is engaged).

–

Move the selector lever forwards

to se-

ect a higher gear

›

Fig. 22

–

Move the selector lever backwards

–

sel

ect a l

er gear

–

To exit the Triptonic mode, move the selec-

tor lever to the left.

Changing gear manually with the gear-

shift paddles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when the

selector lever is in the position D/S or M.

–

Press the gearshift paddle

to select a

higher gear

›

Fig. 222

–

ess the gearshift paddle

–

to select a

er gear

–

o exit the Triptonic mode, pull the right-

hand lever towards the steering wheel for

approximately 1 second or move the selec-

tor lever to the left.

–

With the selector lever in position D/S, if no

paddle is operated during a short period of

time, the gearbox control system switches

back to automatic mode. To switch to per-

manent manual gear change using the

gearshift paddles, move the selector lever

from position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automati-

cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be-

fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic

gearbox will not shift down until there is no

risk of over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, the

gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-

ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-

cally as the v

ehicl

e mo

es.

The engine can only st

art with the selector

lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,

below -10°C (+14°F), the engine can only

start with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle

–

Press and hold the brake pedal.

–

Press and hold the interlock button (the

button on the selector lever handle), move

236

Start and driving

the selector lever to the desired position, for

inst

ance

›

page 233, and release the

interlock button.

–

Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a

slight movement can be felt).

–

Release the brake and press the accelera-

tor

›››

opping briefly

–

Apply the f

oot br

e t

o hold the vehicle

briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-

fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking

If the driver door is opened and the selector

lever is not in position P, the vehicle could

move. The driver message will be:  Gear

change: selector lever in the drive

position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

–

Press and hold the brake pedal

›››

–

Apply the handbrake.

–

Move the selector lever to position P.

Hol

ding the car on a hill

–

ays

apply the br

ake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle “from moving backwards”;

if necessary, apply the handbrake

›››

. Do

not try t

o st

op the v

ehicl

e “r

olling back” by

increasing the engine speed when a gear is

engaged (pressing the accelerator)

›››

Starting off uphill

–

Apply the handbrake.

–

Once you have engaged a gear press the

accel

or car

efully and disengage the

handbr

ake.

Driving downhill: in some situations (on

mountain roads or when towing a trailer or

caravan) it can be advantageous to switch

temporarily to the manual gearbox pro-

gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-

ted manually to suit the driving conditions

›››

On l

el gr

ound it is sufficient t

o move the se-

lector lever to position P. On slopes, first en-

gage the parking brake and then put the se-

lection lever into the P position. This avoids

overloading the locking mechanism and it will

be easier to move the selector lever from po-

sition P.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Selec-

tor lever positions on page 234

●

Never allow the brake to rub and do not

use the brake pedal too often or for long

periods. Constant braking causes over-

heating in the brakes. This could signifi-

cantly reduce braking power, increase

braking distance or even result in the total

failure of the brake system.

●

To avoid rolling back on gradients al

ways

hold the vehicle with the footbrake or

handbrake if you have to stop.

CAUTION

●

If you st

op the vehicle on a gradient, do

not att

empt to stop it from rolling by de-

pressing the accelerator when a gear has

been selected. This could cause overheat-

ing and damage the automatic gearbox.

Apply the handbrake firmly or press the

brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle

from rolling back.

●

If you allow the car to roll with the selec-

tor lever in position N with the engine

switched off, the automatic gearbox will be

damaged as it will not be lubricated.

●

In certain driving situations or traffic con-

ditions, such as frequently starting, pro-

longed “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic

jams with continuous stoppages, the gear-

box could overheat causing damage! If the

warning lamp  lights up, stop the vehicle

as soon as possible and wait for the gear-

box to cool

›››

page 240.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-

cel

ation t

o be r

eached.

When the accel

erator pedal is pressed right

down past the point of resistance at full

237

Driving

throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower

gear

, depending on r

oad speed and engine

speed. The upshift t

o the ne

xt higher gear is

del

ayed until the engine reaches maximum

rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-

pery or wet, the kick-down feat

ure could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which

could result in skidding.

Launch control program

3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-

Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125

kW and petrol engines superior t

o 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables

maximum acceleration.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-

erating temperature and the steering wheel

must not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-

ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the

launch-control you must disconnect the anti-

slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-

nect system menu

›››



page 34. The

warning lamp  will stay switched on or will

flash sl

owly depending on whether or not the

vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-

tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and

the corresponding text message Stability

control deactivated (temporary) appears

on the instrument panel to indicate the deac-

tivation status.

–

When the engine is running, switch off the

traction control (ASR)

–

Turn the selector lever to the position “S” or

tiptronic, or else select the sport driving

mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*

›››

page 274.

–

Press the brake pedal firmly with your left

foot and hold it down for at least one sec-

ond.

–

With your right foot, press the accelerator

down to the full throttle or kick-down posi-

tion. The engine speed will stabilise at

about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about

2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

–

Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING

●

Always adapt your driving style t

o the

traffic conditions.

●

Only use the launch control programme

when road and traffic conditions permit,

and make sure your manner of driving and

accelerating the vehicle does not incon-

venience or endanger other road users.

●

Make sure that the ESC remains switched

on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC

are deactivated, the wheels may start to

spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk

of accident!

●

After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode

should be deactivated by briefly pressing

the   button.

Note

●

After using the Launch control pro-

amme, the temperature in the gearbox

may have increased considerably. In this

case, the programme could be disabled for

several minutes. The programme can be

used again after the cooling phase.

●

Accelerating with the Launch control pro-

gramme places a heavy load on all parts of

the vehicle. This can result in increased

wear and tear.

Vehicles without driver information system: the

warning lamp flashes slo

wly/Vehicles with driver

information system: the warning lamp stays on.

238

Start and driving

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps the

driver when driving down steep gradients.

wnhill speed control is activated when the

selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies

the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-

matically engages a lower gear that is suita-

ble for the slope. The downhill speed control

function attempts to maintain the speed at

which the vehicle was travelling when the

foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of

physics and technical drive limitations). It

may be necessary to adjust the speed again

using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-

en that the downhill speed control can only

change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-

scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In

this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to

2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and

reduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as

soon as the road levels out again or you press

the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*

›››

page 250, downhill speed control is acti-

vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy the

laws of physics. Therefore

, speed cannot

be maintained constant in all situations. Al-

ways be prepared to use the br

akes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy

of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-

ain stretches to be driven without using the

accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.

Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”

before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode

Condition: selector lever must be in position

D, gradients below 12 %.

–

Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode

›››

page 274

–

Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis-

played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12

mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-

gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without

the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-

cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

–

Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switch

off the engine again, simply press the brake

pedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged

section with less energy) and the switching

off using inertia (= shorter section without

the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel

consumption and emission balance.

WARNING

●

If the inertia mode has been switched on,

tak

e into account, when approaching an

obstacle and releasing the accelerator

pedal, that the vehicle will not decelerate

in the usual manner: risk of accident!

●

When using inertia mode while travelling

down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:

risk of accident!

●

If other users drive your vehicle, warn

them about inertia mode.

Note

●

Inertia mode is only available in

eco

(SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode.

●

The driver message Inertia is only dis-

played with the current consumption. In in-

ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-

played (for example “E” will appear instead

of “E7”).

●

On downhill sections with gradients

above 15 %, the inertia mode will automati-

cally be switched off temporarily.

239

Driving

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a fault

should occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the select

or lever are

shown over a light background on the instru-

ment panel display, there is a system fault

and the automatic gearbox will operate in

with the backup programme. When the back-

up programme is activated, it is possible to

drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and

within a selected range of gears. In some ca-

ses driving in reverse gear may not be pos-

sible.

CAUTION

If the gearbox operates with the backup

programme, tak

e the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop and have the fault repaired

without delay.

Indications on the instrument panel

displ

Clutch



Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clut

ch has o

erheat

ed and coul

d be

damaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the

gearbox to cool with the engine at idling

speed and the selector lever in position P.

When the warning lamp and the driver mes-

sage switch off, have the fault corrected by a

specialised workshop without delay. If the

warning lamp and the driver message do not

switch off, do not continue driving. Seek spe-

cialist assistance.

Gearbox malfunctions

 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle

and place the lever in the posi-

tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-

ing. Seek specialist assistance.

 Gearbox: System fault! You may

continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You can

continue driving with restric-

tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

and have the fault repaired without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You can

continue driving in D until

switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away

from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your

driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When

the warning lamp switches off, you can con-

tinue driving in a normal manner.

 Gearbox: press the brake and en-

gage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a

high temperature, this driver message will be

displayed when the gearbox has cooled

again.

Gear-change recommenda-

tion

Choosing the ideal gear

Fig. 223

Instrument panel: gear-change indi-

cat

or (manual gearbo

x).

While driving, and depending on vehicle

equipment, the instrument panel displ

ay may

Start and driving

show a recommendation with the gear num-

ber that w

oul

d be advisabl

e t

o sav

e fuel.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the

selector lever must be in the tiptronic position

›››

page 236.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-

mal gear is already engaged. The current

gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning



The optimal gear is selected.

  

Changing to a higher gear is rec-

ommended.

  

Changing to a lower gear is rec-

ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” of

the par

ticul

e filt

The e

xhaust system manager detects that

the particulate filter is nearly saturated and

contributes to self-cleaning by recommend-

ing the optimal gear. For this reason, it might

be necessary to drive for a short time at a

high rpm.

WARNING

The gear change indicator is only an auxili-

ary function and in no case should be a

substitute for car

eful driving.

●

The responsibility of choosing the correct

gear depending on the situation (e

.g. over-

taking, driving up or down a slope or towing

a trailer) lies with the driver.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the correct gear can help to save

fuel.

Note

The recommended gear indication turns off

when the clutch pedal is pressed in vehi-

cles with manual gearbo

x or when the se-

lector lever is removed from the tiptronic

position in vehicles with an automatic gear-

box.

Steering

Inf

ormation r

ed t

o vehicle

steering

Electro-mechanical power steering assists

the driv

er when st

eering.

ectr

o-mechanical po

wer steering adapts

electronically to the speed of the car, torque

and turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time or

the engine is switched off (for instance when

being towed), the car can still be steered, as

long as the key remains in the ignition. How-

ever, more effort than normal will be required

to turn the steering wheel.

Mechanical steering lock

In order to make the vehicle more difficult to

steal, you should always lock the steering be-

fore leaving the vehicle.

The steering column is locked when the key is

removed from the ignition lock and the vehi-

cle is stationary.

Activating the steering lock

●

Park the vehicle

›››

page 223.

●

Remove the ignition key.

●

Turn the steering wheel slightly until the

steering lock has engaged.

Deactivating the steering lock

●

Turn the steering wheel slightly to release

the lock.

●

Insert the key in the ignition lock.

●

Hold the steering wheel in this position and

switch on the ignition.

Power-assisted steering

Power-assisted steering helps the driver in

critical situations. It recommends the rotation

direction of the steering wheel to perform a

corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering),

241

Driving

thereby causing a small turn of the wheel in

the corr

ect dir

ection t

o av

oid skidding

›

››

WARNING

If the power steering does not work, you

will need much more strength to turn the

wheel. This has a consider

able effect on

vehicle safety.

●

The power steering only works when the

engine is running.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move when the

engine is switched off.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition

while the vehicle is moving. The steering

lock could be engaged and vehicle steer-

ing would not work.

WARNING

Power-assisted steering, together with the

ESC, helps the driver to control vehicl

steering in critical situations. However, the

driver is ultimately responsible for steering

the vehicle at all times. Power-assisted

steering does not remove this responsibili-

ty.

Note

The ignition of the vehicle being towed

must be switched on to pre

vent the steering

wheel from locking and also to allow the

use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen

wipers and washers.

Control lamp



It lights up red

The electromechanical steering is damaged.

Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely and

as soon as possible.

Have the steering checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.



It lights up yellow

The operation of the electromechanical steering is

limited.

See a specialised workshop immediately and have

the st

eering checked.

If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af-

ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travel-

led a short distance, you do not need to take it to a

specialised workshop.

Or: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has

been connected again.

Drive for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-

12 mph).



It flashes yellow

The steering column is tight.

Turn the wheel a little to both sides.

Or: Not unl

ocked or blocked steering column.

Remove the k

ey from the ignition and then switch the

ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages

displayed on the instrument panel display.

Do not drive on if the steering column remains

locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek

specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few

seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ched on. It

shoul

d go out once the engine is st

art

ed.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

messages are ignored when they light up,

the vehicl

e may stall in traffic. It could case

damage to the vehicle and cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-

sages.

●

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity

and in a safe place.

Run-in and economical driv-

ing

Running in a ne

w engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first

1500 km (900 mil

es).

or the first 1,

000 kil

ometr

es (600 miles)

–

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the

maximum speed.

–

Do not accelerate hard.

–

Avoid high engine revolutions.

–

Do not tow a trailer.

242

Start and driving

From 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to

1,500 kil

ometr

es (900 mil

es)

–

Speeds can be

adually increased to the

maximum road speed or maximum permis-

sible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the inter-

nal friction in the engine is greater than later

on, when all the moving parts have bedded

in.

For the sake of the environment

If the engine is run in gently, its life will be

increased and its oil consumption reduced.

Running-in of tyres and brake pads

New tyres should be run in carefully for the

first 500 km (300 mil

es) and ne

w br

e pads

shoul

d be run in carefully for the first 200 km

(125 miles).

During the first 200 km (125 miles) you have

to compensate for the reduced braking effect

by applying more pressure to the brake ped-

al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking dis-

tance will be longer with new brake pads

than with brake pads which have been run-in.

WARNING

●

At first, new tyres do not give maximum

grip

, and require running-in. This may

cause an accident. Drive particularly care-

fully in the first 500 km (300 miles).

●

New brake pads must be “run in” and do

not hav

e the correct friction properties dur-

ing the first 200 km (125 miles). However,

the reduced braking capacity may be com-

pensated by pressing on the brake pedal a

little harder.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in

the design, choice of mat

erial

s and manuf

ac-

e of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-

cycling

●

Joints and connections designed for easy

dismantling.

●

Modular construction to facilitate disman-

tling.

●

Increased use of single-grade materials.

●

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in

accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and

ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

●

Use of recycled materials.

●

Use of compatible plastics in the same part

if its components are not easily separated.

●

Use of recycled materials and/or materials

originating from renewable sources.

●

Reduction of volatile components, including

odour, in plastic materials.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions

dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,

hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

●

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the

protective wax for cavities.

●

Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-

cle transport.

●

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-

tems.

●

Recycling and energy recovery from resi-

dues (RDF).

●

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

●

Use of systems for the recovery of residual

heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,

etc.).

●

The use of water-soluble paints.

243

Driving

Economical and environmentally-

friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution

and wear to the engine, brak

es and tyres de-

pends in large part on your driving style. By

adopting an economical driving style and an-

ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can

easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.

Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-

tion while saving money are listed below.

Active cylinder management (ACT

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active

cylinder management (ACT

) may automati-

cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders

if the driving situation does not require too

much power. When it is switched off, no fuel is

injected into these cylinders, hence total fuel

consumption may be reduced. The number

of active cylinders can be seen on the instru-

ment panel display.

›››

page 106.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.

When you anticipate situations, you have to

brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it

is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear en-

gaged, for example, if you see a red light

ahead. The braking effect achieved in this

way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and

tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are re-

duced to zero (disconnection due to inertia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to change

quickly through the gears. Running the en-

gine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an

unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to

second gear as soon as possible. We recom-

mend that, whenever possible, you change to

a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Fol-

low the “recommended gear” indication that

appears on the instrument panel

›››

page 240.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed

permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,

exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-

crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving

at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when

waiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or at

traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel

saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater

than the amount of fuel needed to restart the

engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm up

when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-

tant emissions are also especially high during

this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best

to drive off immediately after starting the en-

gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,

before beginning a journey, you will not con-

sume more than the required amount of fuel.

A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit

of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-

mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-

ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to

10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of

polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the

exhaust gas filtration systems should reach

the optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is pro-

portionally higher. The engine does not warm

up and fuel consumption does not normalise

until having driven approximately four kilome-

tres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend

avoiding short trips whenever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ade-

quate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure

is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuel

consumption can increase by as much as 5%.

244

Start and driving

Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-

infl

ation al

so incr

eases t

e wear wear and

impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked

when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as

they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-

crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to

always check the luggage compartment to

make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-

ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of

convenience, even when it is no longer nee-

ded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and

120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about

12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind re-

sistance caused by the roof rack even when it

is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, which

produces electricity. With the need for elec-

tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-

cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-

ces when you do not need them. Examples of

devices that use a lot of electricity are: the

blower at high speeds, the rear window heat-

ing or the seat heaters*.

Note

●

If your vehicle has Star

t-Stop, it is not

recommended that you switch this function

off.

●

It is recommended that you close the

windows when driving at more than

60 km/h (37 mph).

●

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the

plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can

burn the clutch plate lining, causing a seri-

ous fault.

●

Do not hold the car on a hill with the

clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake,

using the latter to start. The fuel consump-

tion will be lower and you will prevent the

clutch plate from being damaged.

●

On descents, use the engine brake,

changing to the gear that is more suitable

for the slope. Fuel consumption will be

“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Engine management and

emission contr

ol syst

Intr

oduction

WARNING

●

Because of the high temperatures which

can occur in the e

xhaust purification sys-

tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil-

ter), do not park the vehicle where the e

haust can come into contact with flamma-

ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass or

at the forest edge). Fire hazard!

●

Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle

around the area of the exhaust system: Fire

hazard!

Control lamps



It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty

lambda sensor).

Reduce speed and drive carefully t

o the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic

converter.

Reduce speed and driv

e carefully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



It lights up

Particulate filter blocked

›››

page 246

245

Driving



It lights up

Fault in the management of the petrol engine.

Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop

as soon as possible

The warning lamp  (Electronic Pow

er Control)

lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys-

tem operation is being verified. It should go out once

the engine is started.



It lights up

Diesel engine glow plug system.

The engine glow plug system has been activat

ed.

The engine can be started straight away when the

lamp switches off.



Flashes

Fault in the management of the diesel engine.

Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop

as soon as possible

Note

While the control lamps are on , , 

or  there might be faults in the engine,

fuel consumption may go up and the en-

gine might lose po

wer.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic

converter

●

Use only unleaded petr

ol with petrol en-

gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-

verter.

●

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

●

For engine oil changes, do not replenish

with too much engine oil

›››

page 319, Top-

ping up engine oil.

●

Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump

leads if necessary

›››



page 59

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss

of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce

speed immediately and have the vehicle in-

spected at the nearest specialised workshop.

In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light

up when any of the described symptoms oc-

cur

›››

page 245. If this happens, unburnt fuel

can enter the exhaust system and escape in-

to the environment. The catalytic converter

can also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-

cause the irregularity of the fuel supply

may cause ignition probl

ems. This allows

unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system,

which could cause overheating and dam-

age the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

working perfectly, there may be a smell of

sulphur from the e

xhaust gas under some

conditions. This depends on the sulphur

content of the fuel used. Quite often the

problem can be solved by changing to an-

other brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of the

soot fr

om the e

xhaust gas syst

em. Under nor

mal driving conditions, the filt

er cleans itself.

The particulate filter is cleaned automatically

without need for indication by the warning

lamp . This may be noticed because the

engine idle speed increases and an odour

may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-

ried out (because only short trips are taken,

for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-

ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will

 switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-

ess by driving in the following manner:

●

Drive for approximately 15 minutes at a

minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or

5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range).

246

Start and driving

●

Maint

ain the engine speed at appr

ximat

ly 2,

000 rpm.

The rise in temperature causes the soot on

the filter to burn. On completion of the clean-

ing the warning lamp will switch off. If the

warning lamp does not switch off, go immedi-

ately to a specialised workshop to rectify the

problem.

Driving tips

Driving abroad

To drive abroad, the following must be taken

int

o consider

ation:

●

or v

ehicl

es fitted with a catalytic converter

ensure that unleaded petrol is available for

the journey. See chapter

›››

page 310, Fuel.

Automobile organisations will have informa-

tion about service station networks selling un-

leaded fuel.

●

In some countries, it is possible that your

car model is not sold, and therefore some

spare parts are not available or the technical

services may only be able to carry out limited

repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly

provide information about the technical prep-

aration that your vehicle requires and also

about necessary maintenance and repair

possibilities.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-

ing through water, f

or example, along a floo-

ded road, please observe the following:

●

The water should never come above the

lower edge of the bodywork.

●

Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through water, mud, sludge,

etc., the braking effect can be delayed

slightly due t

o moisture build-up on the

discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes

carefully several times will remove the

moisture and restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION

●

Driving through flooded areas may se-

ver

ely damage vehicle components such

as the engine, transmission, running gear or

electrical system.

●

Whenever driving through water, the

Start-Stop system* must be switched off

›››

page 248.

Note

●

Check the depth of the water before en-

ering the flooded zone.

●

Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,

or stop the engine in any situation.

●

Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo-

site direction may splash water that could

exceed the maximum permitted water

height for your vehicle.

●

Avoid driving through salt water (corro-

sion).

247

Driving

Driver assistance systems

-St

op syst

em*

Control lamps



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-

gine shutdown is active.



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-

ment panel displ

Start-Stop system deactivated.

Start the engine manually

This driv

er message is displ

ayed when cer

ain conditions are not met during the stop-

ping phase and the Start-Stop system can-

not restart the engine. The engine must be

started manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function

not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take

the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-

paired.

Description and operation

Fig. 224 Related video

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and

reduce CO

emissions.

In Start-Stop mode

, the engine will automati-

cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is

stopping; for example when stopping at traf-

fic lights. The ignition remains switched on

during the stopping phase. The engine auto-

matically switches back on when required. In

this scenario, the light of the   

button stays lit

As soon as the ignition is s

wit

ched on, the

art

-St

op function is automatically activa-

ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys-

tem can be found on the Easy Connect sys-

tem: by pressing the button 

/  in the Ve-

hicle status menu.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

●

Before stopping the vehicle or when it is

opped, put it int

o neutr

al and r

ease the

clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The

warning lamp  will appear on the instru-

ment panel display. The engine may stop be-

fore the vehicle comes to a halt in the decel-

eration phase (at 7 km/h).

●

When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-

gine will start up again. The warning lamp will

switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

●

Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a

stop and keep the brake pedal pressed down

with your foot. The engine will switch off. The

warning lamp  will appear in the display.

The engine may stop before the vehicle

comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at

7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’s

gearbox).

●

When you take your foot off the brake ped-

al the engine will start up again. The warning

lamp will switch off.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop

mode

●

The driver door must be closed.

Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

248

Driver assistance systems

●

The driv

er must hav

e their seat belt f

as-

ened.

●

The bonnet must be cl

osed.

●

The engine must have reached a minimum

service temperature.

●

The reverse gear must not be engaged.

●

The vehicle must not be on a very steep

slope.

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop

mode frequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch off

Before the stopping phase, the system verifies

whether certain conditions are met. The en-

gine does not switch off, in the following sit-

uations for example:

●

The engine has not yet reached the mini-

mum required temperature for the Start-Stop

mode.

●

The interior temperature selected for the air

conditioner has not yet been reached.

●

The interior temperature is very high/low.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››



page 41.

●

The parking aid* is switched on.

●

The battery is very low.

●

The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-

ing turned.

●

If there is a danger of misting.

●

After engaging reverse gear.

●

In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication  is shown on the instrument

panel display, and in addition, the driver infor-

mation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself

During a stopping phase the normal Start-

Stop mode can be interrupted in the following

situations: The engine restarts by itself with-

out involvement from the driver.

●

The interior temperature differs from the

value selected on the air conditioner.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››



page 41.

●

The brake has been pressed several times

consecutively.

●

The battery is too low.

●

High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-

matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is in

the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to when

in Triptonic mode. With the selector lever in

position P, the engine will also remain switch-

ed off when you take your foot off the brake

pedal. In order to start the engine up again

the accelerator must be pressed, or another

gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R dur-

ing the stopping phase, the engine will start

up again.

Change from position D to P to prevent the

engine from accidentally starting when

changing and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles with

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will

start up again in certain operating conditions

if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle

ahead drives off again.

WARNING

●

Never switch the engine off until the v

ehi-

cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow-

er steering functions will not be completely

covered under warranty. More force may

also be needed to turn the steering wheel

or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake

in the normal manner, there is a greater risk

of accidents and serious injury.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the

steering could lock making it impossible to

steer the vehicle.

●

To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-

Stop system is switched off when working

in the engine compartment

›››

page 250.

249

Driving

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always be

switched off when driving through flooded

eas

›››

page 250.

Note

●

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,

you can contr

ol whether the engine should

switch off or not by reducing or increasing

the brake force applied. While the vehicle

remains stopped, the engine will not stop if

the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic

jams with frequent stopping and starting

for example. As soon as strong pressure is

applied to the brake pedal, the engine will

stop.

●

In vehicles with manual gearbox, during

the stopping phases the brake pedal must

remain depressed to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

●

If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with

manual gearbox, it can be directly started

up again by immediately pressing the

clutch pedal.

●

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if

the selector lever is placed in position D, N

or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehi-

cle must be driven at a speed faster than 10

km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to

conditions in which the engine can be stop-

ped.

Manually switching on/off the

-St

op syst

Fig. 225

Centre console: Start-Stop system

butt

on.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can

wit

ch it off manually.

●

o manually s

wit

ch on/off the Start-Stop

system, press the  button

›››

Fig. 225.

The symbol on the  button remains lit up

yellow when the system is switched off, and

the following message is displayed on the

dash panel:

Start-Stop system deactivated

Note

The system is automatically switched on

each time the engine is deliberately stop-

ped during a stopping phase

. The engine

will start automatically.

Cruise control system

(CCS)*

Contr

ol l

amp



It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and

active.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is

swit

ched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Warn-

ing symbols on page 118.

250

Driver assistance systems

Cruise control operation

Fig. 226

Instrument panel display: CCS status

indications.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 38

The cruise contr

ol syst

em (CCS) is able to

maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15

mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by

ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking

the vehicle

›››

Displ

ayed on the CCS scr

een

Fig. 226:

CCS temporarily switched off. The set

speed is displayed in small or darkened

figures.

System error. Contact a specialised

workshop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is

empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is

displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch

pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-

cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot

maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle

down using the brake pedal and reduce

gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched

off automatically or temporarily:

●

If the system detects a fault that could af-

fect the working order of the CCS.

●

If you press and maintain the accelerator

pedal for a certain time, driving faster than

the stored speed.

●

If the dynamic driving control systems inter-

vene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

●

If the br

e pedal is pr

essed.

●

If the airbag is trigger

ed.

●

If the gear l

ever of the DSG

dual clutch

gearbox is removed from the D/S position.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-

dents and severe injuries if it is not possible

o drive at a constant speed maintaining

the safety distance.

●

Do not use the cruise control in heavy

traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in

front is insufficient, on steep roads, with

several bends or in slippery circumstances

(snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-

ded roads.

●

Never use the CCS when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

To avoid unexpected operation of the

cruise control system, turn it off every time

you finish using it.

●

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is

too high for the prevailing road, traffic or

weather conditions.

●

When travelling down hills, the CCS can-

not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle

tends to accelerate under its own weight.

Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

251

Driving

Speed limiter

Contr

ol l

amp



It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.



Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-

ded.



It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit-

er is active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check cert

ain functions. They will s

witch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Warn-

ing symbols on page 118.

Display indications

Fig. 227

On the instrument panel display: indi-

cations of the speed limit

er st

us.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a

speed individually pr

ogr

ammed up

ds of

approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in

forwards gears

›››

Display messages on the speed limiter

›

Fig. 227

The speed limit

er is active. The last speed

set is displayed in large figures.

The speed limiter is not active. The last

speed set is displayed in small or dark-

ened figures.

The speed limiter is switched off. The total

mileage is displayed.

WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limit-

er to prevent the speed being r

egulated

against your wishes.

●

The speed limiter does not relieve the

driver of their responsibility to drive at the

appropriate speed. Do not drive at high

speed if not necessary.

●

Using the speed limiter under adverse

weather conditions is dangerous and can

cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,

snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed

limiter when the status of the road and the

weather conditions allow it.

●

When driving downhill, the speed limiter

cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed

will increase due to its own weight. In this

case, select a lower gear or use the foot

brake to slow the vehicle.

Note

●

Different versions of the instrument panel

are av

ailable and therefore the versions

and instructions on the display may vary.

●

If when switching the ignition off, the

cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive

cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter

were switched on, then the cruise control

system or the adaptive cruise control will

automatically switch themselves on when

the ignition is back on. However, no speed

will be stored. The last set speed of the

speed limiter will be stored.

252

Driver assistance systems

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 228 On the left of the steering column:

control and buttons to operat

e the speed limit-

er.

Fig. 229 On the left of the steering column:

third lever f

or operating the speed limiter.

Function

Position of the turn signal lever

›››

Fig. 228

or the third l

ever

›››

Fig. 229

Effect

Switching on the speed limiter

Move controller

to position  and press button

of the turn signal

lever or mov

e the third lever forward and press button

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed

limiter is stored. It does not tak

e effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiter

and cruise control (CCS) or the adap-

tive cruise control (ACC) (with the

speed limiter s

witched on)

Press button

on the turn signal lever or button

on the third lever

It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the

adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter

ess the button

on the turn signal lever or button 

on the third

lever.

The curr

ent speed is stored as the maximum speed and

the limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed

limiter limitation

Place control

of the turn signal lever in position  or move the

thir

d lever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be

stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter

limitation pressing down the acceler

tor (kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to

overtake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tem-

porarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be

stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re-

turning to less than the set speed.

253

Driving

Function

Position of the turn signal lever

›››

Fig. 228

or the third l

ever

›››

Fig. 229

Effect

Switching the speed limiter on again

Press button

on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into po-

sition .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the

speed you are driving at is lower than the speed set as

maximum.

Incr

easing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button

on the turn signal lever in the  area or

move the third lever into position  to increase the speed in small

increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value

Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button

on the turn signal lever in the  area or

hold down 

 to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h

(5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button

on the turn signal lever in the  area or

ess 

on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments

of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value

ess  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button

on the turn signal lever in the  area or

hol

d down  to continuously decrease the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the speed limiter

Move control

of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lev-

er into position

.

The system switches off.

The values shown in the table in brackets, in

mph, ar

e displ

ayed only in instrument panel

with indications in mil

es.

Going do

wn slopes with the speed limiter

If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee-

ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

the warning and control lamps 

›››

page 252 flash and an acoustic warning

may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low-

er gear.

Switching off temporarily

If you wish to temporarily switch off the speed

limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control

›››

Fig. 228

of the turn signal lever into po-

sition 



or the thir

d l

ver into pressure

point  or press button

on any lever.

254

Driver assistance systems

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be

wit

ched on with the pr

viously set speed by

essing button

on the turn signal lever in

the ar







or by moving the third lever into

pressure point .

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by

pressing down the accelerator (kick-

down)

If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-

down) and the set speed is exceeded be-

cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is

temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic

signal sound once. While the limiter is off, the

warning and control lamp  flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer pressed

down and the speed is reduced below the set

value, the limiter switches on again. The con-

trol lamp  will light up and remain lit.

Automatic off

The speed limiter is automatically switched

off:

●

If the system detects a fault that could neg-

atively affect the working order of the limiter.

●

If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTION

For automatic switching off due to system

failures, for security r

easons, the limiter is

only completely switched off when the

driver stops pressing the acceler

ator at

some point or consciously switches off the

system.

Emergency braking assis-

tance system (Front Assist)*

Topic intr

oduction

Fig. 230

On the instrument panel display: ad-

ance w

arning indications.

The objective of the emergency braking as-

sist

ance syst

em is t

o pr

vent head-on colli-

sions against objects that may be in the vehi-

cle’s path or minimise the consequences of

such impacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the environ-

mental conditions and by the system itself,

the function acts in staggered fashion, de-

pending on how critical the situation is. Initial-

ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac-

tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti-

vates an independent emergency braking.

The function is oriented at avoiding the fol-

lowing situations:

●

Collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles

in the same lane travelling in the same direc-

tion.

●

Hitting pedestrians who cross in front of the

vehicle's path or who are walking in the same

lane and direction.

It may fail to activate in other danger situa-

tions.

The Front Assist function is active within a

range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)

and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on

speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour,

some of the sub-functions described below

are omitted in order to optimise the system’s

general behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistance

function that can never replace the driv-

er’s attention.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects a situation of danger

because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an

255

Driving

indication on the instrument panel display

.

The timing of the w

arning v

aries depending

on driv

er behaviour and the tr

affic sit

uation.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with

the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by

means of an audible warning and an indica-

tion on the instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 230.

The warning moment varies depending on

the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At

the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a

possible emergency braking

›››

Critical w

arning

If the driv

er f

ail

s t

o react to the pre-warning

(advance warning), the system may actively

intervene in the brakes and generate a brief

jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger

of a collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the critical

warning, the system may initiate independent

emergency braking by progressively increas-

ing the braking effect in accordance with how

critical the situation is.

Driver emergency braking assistance sys-

tem

Faced with an imminent collision, the system

may detect that the driver is not braking hard

enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it

will automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and the

limitations of its operation, there are some

cases in which the system cannot prevent a

collision, although it can significantly mini-

mise the consequences by reducing the

speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Warn-

ing symbols on page 118.

WARNING

The Front Assist system cannot change the

laws of physics or replace the driver in

erms of keeping control of the vehicle and

reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING

Following a Front Assist emergency warn-

ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-

tion and try t

o avoid the collision by brak-

ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica-

ble.

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly

intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicl

e in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-

dents and serious injuries.

●

In complex driving situations, occasional-

ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and

intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex-

ample at traffic islands.

●

If the operation of the Front Assist is im-

paired, for example, by dirt or because the

radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys-

tem may issue unnecessary warnings and

intervene inopportunely in the braking.

●

The Front Assist does not react to animals

or vehicles crossing your path or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

The Front Assist does not react to pedes-

trians walking head-on in the same lane.

●

The driver must always be ready to take

over the control of the vehicle.

Note

●

When the Front Assist is connected, the

indications on the instrument panel screen

may be concealed by w

arnings from other

functions, such as an incoming call.

●

When the Front Assist causes a braking,

the brake pedal is “harder”.

●

Automatic interventions by the Front As-

sist on the brakes may be interrupted by

256

Driver assistance systems

pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving

the wheel.

●

The Front Assist may brake the vehicle

until it stops completely. How

ever, the

brake system does not halt the vehicle per-

manently. Use the foot brake!

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes

several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Have the system checked by a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 231

On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-

er t

o det

ermine the tr

affic sit

uation

›

››

Fig. 231

The r

adar sensor

's visibilit

y may be impair

by dirt, mud or sno

w, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the

Front Assist does not work. The instrument

panel displays the following message: Front

Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary

clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

operly again, the Front Assist will automati-

cally be available again. The message will

disappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a

strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-

cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails

on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example if the suspension is lowered,

Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid

possible danger

ous situations caused by a

system malfunction. If this occurs have it

adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or

lose its settings when knocked, for ex

am-

ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis-

connect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front that is larger than the space for the

registration plate, or a registration plate

that is curved or warped can cause the ra-

dar to malfunction.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

257

Driving

Operating the Emergency braking

assist

ance syst

em (Fr

ont Assist)

Fig. 232

On the screen of the instrument panel

ont Assist s

wit

ched off message

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-

tion is s

wit

ched on.

When the Fr

ont Assist is s

wit

ched off, so too

are the advance warning function (pre warn-

ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-

ways switched on. Exceptions

›››

page 258,

Switching the Front Assist off temporarily

in the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition on, Front Assist can be ena-

bled or disabled in the Easy Connect system

with the 

/  butt

on and the SETTINGS >

Driver assistance function butt

ons

›



page 34.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-

ment panel will inform that it has been

switched off with the following indicator 

›››

Fig. 232.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning

(advance warning)

The pre-warning function (advance warning)

can be switched on or off in the Easy Con-

nect system with the 

/  butt

on and the

SETTINGS and Driver assistance func-

tion butt

ons

›



page 34.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning

function switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system instal-

led in the vehicle, the advance warning func-

tion may be adjusted as follows:

●

Advance

●

Medium

●

Delayed

●

Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in

“Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle

in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will

appear on the instrument panel display

. In this case, increase the safe distance.

The distance warning can be switched on

and off in the Easy Connect system using the



/  and the SETTINGS > Driver as-

sistance function butt

ons

›



page 34

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance

warning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tem-

porarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist

shoul

d be deactiv

ed due t

o the syst

em's

limitations:

●

When the vehicle is to be towed.

●

If the vehicle is on a test bed.

●

When the radar sensor is damaged.

●

If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for

example in a rear collision.

●

If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

●

If the radar sensor is covered temporarily

with some kind of accessory, such as an ad-

ditional headlight or the like.

●

When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,

ferry or train.

258

Driver assistance systems

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-

tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain

cir

cumstances, some of the system's reac-

tions may be inopportune from the driver's

standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-

vene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the

Front Assist not to react or to do so too

late:

●

In the first few instants of driving after

switching on the ignition, due to the system

’s

initial auto-calibration.

●

On taking tight bends or complex paths.

●

Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

●

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-

aged.

●

If the ASR has been disconnected or the

ESC activated in Sport mode manually

›››

page 228.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

●

If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

If the vehicle over-accelerates.

●

In case of snow or heavy rain.

●

In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-

bikes.

●

Misaligned vehicles.

●

Vehicles crossing the other's path.

●

Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-

tion.

●

Special loads and accessories of other ve-

hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards

or over the top.

Adaptive Cruise Control

ACC*

Introduction

Fig. 233 Related video

Fig. 234 Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an e

ension of the normal cruise contr

ol sys-

em (CCS)

›››

The ACC function all

ws the driv

er t

o pr

gram a cruise speed of between 30 and 210

km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select the dis-

tance required with regard to the vehicle in

front.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise

speed at all times, maintaining a safe dis-

tance with the vehicle in front based on its

speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the

ACC function reduces speed until it is the

same as that of the vehicle ahead and main-

tains the set distance between the vehicles. If

the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive

cruise control also accelerates, going no

higher than the target speed programmed.

259

Driving

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic

gearbo

x, the ACC can br

e the v

ehicl

e until

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it

stops.

The distance programmed should be in-

creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certain

limitations inherent in the system. In other

words, in certain circumstances the driver will

have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as

the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will

warn you to intervene by applying the brake

and a warning tone will be heard

›››

page 260.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC can-

not overcome the system's inher

ent limita-

tions or change the laws of physics. If used

negligently or involuntarily, it may cause

serious accidents and injuries. The system

is not a replacement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,

on steep roads, with several bends or in

slippery circumstances such as snow, ice,

rain or loose gravel, or on fl

ooded roads.

●

Never use the ACC when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been

designed for use on paved roads only.

●

The ACC does not react on approaching

a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic

jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-

ped at the traffic lights.

●

The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-

destrian monitoring system is available. In

addition, the system does not react to ani-

mals or vehicles crossing your path or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-

ciently, brake the vehicle immediately by

applying the pedal.

●

If you are driving using the spare wheel,

the ACC function could automatically

switch off during your journey. Switch off

the system when starting off.

●

If the vehicle continues to move involun-

tarily after a driver intervention prompt,

brake the vehicle by applying the pedal.

●

If the dash panel displays a driver inter-

vention prompt, adjust the distance your-

self.

●

The driver should be ready to accelerate

or brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC.

This will avoid possible damage. If this oc-

curs have it adjust

ed.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

Note

●

If the ACC system does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter, do not use it until it

has been check

ed by a specialised work-

shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this purpose.

●

Maximum speed with the ACC activated

is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).

●

When the ACC is switched on, strange

noises may be heard during automatic

braking cause by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument panel

displ

ay and contr

ol l

amps



The speed reduction by the ACC

to maintain the distance from the

ehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver int

ervention

prompt.

260

Driver assistance systems



The ACC is not currently availa-

ble.

With the vehicle st

ationary, switch off the engine and

start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually

›››

Fig. 236 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still unavail-

able, refer to a specialised workshop to have the sys-

tem inspected.

The symbol on the instrument panels with colour

display is in colour.



The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed

speed remains constant.



If the symbol is white: the ACC is

active.

A vehicle in fr

ont has been detected. The ACC ad-

justs speed and distance from the vehicle in fr

ont.



If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-

tive (Standby)

The system is swit

ched on, but is not adjusting.



The lamp lights up green.

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check cert

ain functions. They will s

witch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Warn-

ing symbols on page 118.

Indications on the display

Fig. 235

On the instrument panel display: (A)

ACC inactiv

e (St

andby). (B) ACC activ

Instructions on the display

›

Fig. 235

ehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-

tive and is not regulating your speed.

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is

not activ

e and is not r

egul

ating your dis-

ance

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active

and is regulating your speed.

Distance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis-

tance based on speed.

Note

When the ACC is connected, the indica-

tions on the instrument panel screen may

be concealed by warnings from other func-

tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 236

On the front bumper: radar sensor.

261

Driving

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-

er t

o det

ermine the tr

affic sit

uation

›

››

Fig. 236

The r

adar sensor

's visibilit

y may be impair

by dirt, mud or sno

w, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.

The instrument panel displays the following

message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec-

essary clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

operly again, the ACC will automatically

be available again. The message on the in-

strument panel screen will switch off and the

ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for

example, in a closed car park or due to the

presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example, if the suspension is lowered,

ACC operation may be affected. In this sce-

nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi-

ble damage. If this occurs hav

e it adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or

lose its settings when knocked, for exam-

ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may

compromise the system's efficacy or dis-

connect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

Operating the Adaptive Cruise

Contr

ol ACC

Fig. 237

On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

er f

or operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

Fig. 238

On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

er f

or operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is

connect

ed, the gr

een contr

ol l

amp

 will

262

Driver assistance systems

light up on the instrument panel, and the pro-

ammed speed and ACC st

us will be dis-

ayed

›

››

Fig. 235.

What ACC settings are possible?

●

Setting your speed

›››

page 263.

●

Setting your distance

›››

page 263.

●

Connecting and activating the ACC

›››

page 263.

●

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

›››

page 263.

●

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

›››

page 263.

●

Adjusting the driving profile

›››

page 264.

●

Conditions in which the ACC does not re-

act

›››

page 264.

Setting speed

To set your speed, move the third lever loca-

ted in position

upwards or downwards until

the desir

ed speed is sho

wn on the instrument

panel displ

ay. The speed adjustment is made

at 10 km/h (6 mph) int

erv

als.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set the

current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed

and activate the ACC, press the 

›››

Fig. 238 button. If you wish to increase or

reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6

mph), move the lever to position

›››

Fig. 237 or pr

ess the  butt

on, r

espectiv

ly.

The set speed can be changed when the v

hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.

Any modification to the programmed speed

will be shown on the bottom left part of the

instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 235.

Setting your distance level

To increase/reduce the distance level, press

the rocker switch towards the left/right

›››

Fig. 238

The instrument panel displ

ay sho

ws the mod-

ification of the dist

ance l

vel. There are 5 dis-

tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-

mends level 3. The set distance can be

changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur-

ing driving, as you like

›››

Connecting and activ

ating the ACC

o connect and activ

e the ACC, the posi-

tion of the gearbo

x selector lever, the vehicle

speed and the position of the third level of the

ACC must all be taken into account.

●

With a manual transmission, the gearbox

selector lever must be in any gear except

first, and the speed must be higher than ap-

proximately 30 km/h. With an automatic

transmission, the gearbox selector lever must

be in position D or S.

●

To activate the ACC, with the third lever in

position

press the  butt

on or mo

e the

thir

d l

ever of the ACC to position

›››

Fig. 237. At this point, the image of the

ACC on the instrument panel display will

wit

ch t

Activ

e mode

›››

Fig. 235.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicle

travels at a set speed and distance from the

vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can

be changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the

position

›

Fig. 237

(engaged). An

ACC

deactivated message appears and the

function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just

to switch it temporarily to inactive mode

(Standby), move the third lever to position

›››

Fig. 237 or pr

ess the br

e pedal.

It will al

so s

witch to inactive mode (Standby)

if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is

opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

In wet road conditions, you should always set

a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in

front than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

●

Very short

●

Short

●

Media

263

Driving

●

ong

●

ery l

ong

In the Easy Connect syst

em you can adjust

the dist

ance level that will be applied when

the ACC is connected using the 

/  but

on and the

SETTINGS > Driver assis-

tance

›



page 34.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving

profile selected can have an influence on the

ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour

›››

page 274.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-

haviour of the ACC can also be affected by

selecting any of the following drive profiles in

the Easy Connect system:

●

Normal

●

Sport

●

Eco

●

Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set-

tings using the 

/  butt

on and the SET-

TINGS > Driver assistance > ACC

›



page 34

The following conditions may lead the

ACC not to react:

●

If the accelerator is pressed.

●

If there is no gear engaged.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages

 ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar-

antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-

activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is

damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised

workshop and have the fault repaired.

 ACC and Front Assist: currently

not available. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver if

the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for

example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.

Clean the sensor

›››

Fig. 236.

 ACC: currently not available.

Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee-

ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be

guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched

on.

 ACC: only available in D, S or

Select the D/S or M position on the selector

lever.

 ACC: parking brake applied

The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is

applied. The ACC is available once again af-

ter the parking brake is released.

 ACC: currently not available.

Intervention of stability control

The message for the driver is displayed when

the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-

venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically

switched off.

 ACC: Take action!

The message for the driver is displayed if,

when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mild

slope, the vehicle rolls back even although

the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop

the vehicle from moving/colliding with anoth-

er vehicle.

 ACC: speed limit

The message for the driver is displayed if, in

vehicles with manual gearbox, the current

speed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least

30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switches

off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

 ACC: available as of the 2nd

gear

264

Driver assistance systems

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear

(manual gearbo

x).



ACC: engine speed

The message f

or the driv

er is displ

ayed if,

when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the

driver does not shift up or down a gear in

time, which means exceeding or not reaching

the permissible engine speed. The ACC

switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

 ACC: clutch applied

Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing

the clutch pedal for longer abandons control

mode.

Door open

Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle

stationary and the door open.

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when the

minimum distance to the vehicle in fr

ont is

exceeded and the speed difference be-

tween both vehicles is so great that a

speed reduction by the ACC will not suf-

fice. In this case the brake pedal should be

applied immediately.

●

The ACC may not be able to detect all

situations properly.

●

“Stepping” on the accelerator may

cause the ACC not to intervene in braking.

Driver braking will have priority over inter-

vention by the speed control or adaptive

cruise control.

●

Always be ready t

o use the brakes!

●

Observe country-specific provisions gov-

erning obligatory minimum distances be-

tween vehicles.

●

It is dangerous to activate control and re-

sume the programmed speed if the road,

traffic or weather conditions do not permit

this. Risk of accident!

Note

●

The pr

ogrammed speed is erased once

the ignition or the ACC are s

witched off.

●

When the traction control system (ASR) is

deactivated during acceleration or else the

ESC is activated in Sport* Mode

(

›››



page 34), the ACC switches off au-

tomatically.

●

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,

the engine switches off automatically dur-

ing the ACC stopping phase and restarts

automatically to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtaking

in an inside l

ane

Fig. 239

On the instrument panel display:

ACC activ

, v

ehicl

e det

ected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a

function that helps av

oid o

ert

aking whil

driving in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at a

slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed

on the multifunction display

›››

Fig. 239.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside

lane the system will gently brake, and in ac-

cordance with the speed will prevent the car

from overtaking. The driver can override this

function at any time by pressing the acceler-

ator pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-

tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in

city traffic.

265

Driving

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise

Contr

ol ACC t

empor

arily in cer

ain

situations

In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) should be deactivated due t

the system's limitations

›››

●

When changing lanes, on tight bends and

roundabouts, in acceleration and deceler

tion lanes on motorways or in sections with

road works to prevent involuntary accelera-

tion to reach the programmed speed.

●

When going through a tunnel, as operation

could be affected.

●

On roads with se

veral lanes, when other ve-

hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-

ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be

overtaken on the right.

●

In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the

vehicle in front might not be detected proper-

ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be

detected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-

tions described, serious accidents and inju-

ries may occur.

●

Always swit

ch off the ACC in critical sit-

uations.

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the

aforementioned situations, you may com-

mit a legal off

ence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 240

(A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-

clist ahead out of r

ange of the r

adar sensor

Fig. 241 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One

ehicl

e t

urning and another st

ationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer-

ain physical limit

ations inher

ent in the sys-

em. F

or example, certain reactions of the

ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex-

pected or come late from the driver's point of

view. So pay attention in order to intervene if

necessary.

For example, the following traffic situations

call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase

(only vehicles with automatic gearbox)

After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin

driving automatically when the vehicle in

front drives off

›››

266

Driver assistance systems

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. traffic

jam), the instrument panel displ

ay sho

ws the

ACC ready to start message

. If the v

ehi-

e ahead drives off again, the ACC will also

do so automatically.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again,

the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the ACC

ready to start status by operating the

third lever repeatedly towards position

›››

Fig. 237 or by pr

essing the br

e pedal. If

the

Press the brake message is sho

wn on

the instrument panel, press the brake. If you

do not, an acoustic warning will be heard and

the ACC will switch to inactive mode (Stand-

by). At this point, the vehicle may begin to

move towards the stopped vehicle ahead

›››

aking

When the t

urn signal lights up bef

ore the ve-

hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the

ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically

and thus reduces the distance from the vehi-

cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,

if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in

front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-

grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted at

any time by pressing the brake or moving the

third lever backwards

›››

page 262.

Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sensor

may stop detecting the vehicle in front or re-

acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane

›››

Fig. 240 A In these situations the vehicle

may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to

the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has

to intervene by accelerating or interrupting

the braking process by applying the brake or

pushing the third lever backwards

›››

page 262.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen-

sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-

nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow or

misaligned vehicles when they are within

range

›››

Fig. 240 B. This applies particularly

to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In

these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-

ries

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-

cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or

over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-

cles with special loads and accessories or

when overtaking them. In these cases, you

should brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distance

away from your own can only be detected

when they are within range of the sensors.

Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-

act

›››

Fig. 241 C. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objects

while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged

vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or

moves over and there is a stationary vehicle

in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

›››

Fig. 241 D. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction

and vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-

proaching from the opposite direction or ve-

hicles crossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets

used in road works, can confuse the radar

sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

267

Driving

Factors that may affect how the radar

sensor oper

If l

aser sensor oper

ation is impair

ed, due to

heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is

deactivated temporarily. The relevant text

message will appear in the dash panel dis-

play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor

›››

Fig. 236.

When the radar sensor begins to operate

properly again, the ACC will automatically

be available again. The message on the in-

strument panel screen will switch off and the

ACC will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection, for example in a

closed car park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controls

less dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example after

abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,

the ACC may be deactivated temporarily.

The relevant text message will appear in the

dash panel display. In this case, adaptive

cruise control cannot be activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated

once brake temperature has cooled suffi-

ciently. The message will disappear from the

instrument panel display. If the message ACC

not available remains on for quite a long

time it means that there is a fault. Contact a

specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-

iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If you do not heed the Press the brake

message, the vehicle may initiate an inv

ol-

untary movement and could crash into the

vehicle ahead. In any event, before driving

off, check that the road is clear. The radar

sensor may not detect obstacles on the

road. This could cause an accident and se-

rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

268

Driver assistance systems

Blind spot detector (BSD)

with parking assist

ance

(RC

A)*

Intr

oduction

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect

the traffic situation behind the vehicle

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps

the driver when backing out of a parallel

parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developed

for driving on paved roads.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking

assistance (RCT

A) included cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. Accidents and severe injury may

occur if the blind spot detection system or

the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-

gently or involuntarily. The system is not a

replacement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times

to be ready to int

ervene in the steering at

any time.

●

Pay attention to the control lamps that

may come on in the external rear view mir-

rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-

low any instructions they may give.

●

The blind spot assistant could react to

any special constructions that might be

present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high

or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-

neous warnings.

●

Never use the blind spot detector with

rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.

The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-

fic alert has been designed for use on

paved roads.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-

roundings.

●

Never use the blind spot detector or the

parking assistant if the radar sensors are

dirty.

●

The external rear view mirror control

lamps may have limited functionality due

to solar radiation.

CAUTION

●

The radar sensors on the rear bumper

may be damaged or shifted in the ev

ent of

a collision, for example, when entering or

exiting a parking space. This may result in

the system disconnecting itself, or at least

possibly having its functionality diminished.

●

In order to ensure that the radar sensors

ork properly, keep the rear bumper free of

snow and ice and do not cover it.

●

The rear bumper should only be painted

with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind

spot detector's functions may be limited or

work incorrectly if other paints are used.

Note

If the blind spot detector with parking as-

sist

ant does not work as described in this

chapter, do not use it and cont

act a speci-

alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:



It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-

tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-

cle in the blind spot.



Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the

blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in

the direction of the detect

ed vehicle

›››

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

269

Driving

check certain functions. They will switch off

aft

er a f

w seconds.

If ther

e ar

e no indications from the control

lamp in the external rear view mirror, this

means that the blind spot detector has not

detected any other vehicles in the area

›››

If the dipped beam is on, then the contr

amps in the e

ernal r

ear view mirrors will be

dimmed (night mode).

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

messages are ignored when they light up,

the vehicl

e may stall in traffic and cause

accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-

sages.

●

Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-

responding text messages when they light

up may result in damage t

o the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 242

On external rear-view mirrors: blind

spot det

ect

or displ

ay.

Fig. 243 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor

areas.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to

monit

or the ar

eas behind the v

ehicl

›

››

Fig. 243. The system does this by measur-

ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles

and its speed differential. The blind spot de-

tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-

prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-

cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to

notify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors

The control lamp (expanded view) provides

an indication in the corresponding external

mirror

›››

Fig. 242 regarding the traffic situa-

tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be

critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-

ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to

the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of

the right-hand external mirror indicates the

traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

270

Driver assistance systems

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or

windo

ws with tint

ed film, the indications of the

ernal mirr

ors may not be seen clearly or

correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of

snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-

hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located on the left and

right of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside

›››

Fig. 243. The sensors monitor

both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-

hicle

›››

Fig. 244,

›››

Fig. 245. The range to

the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the

width of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,

but is rather pre-configured in the system.

Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-

tween two lanes, the indications may be in-

correct. Furthermore, the system can detect

vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect station-

ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an

incorrect indication.

271

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 244 Schematic diagram:  Passing situa-

tion with traffic behind the vehicl

e.  Indication

from the blind spot detector in the left-hand ex-

ternal mirror.

Fig. 245 Schematic diagram:  Situation of

passing and then moving into the right-hand

ane.  Indication from the blind spot detector

in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will

be displ

ayed in the e

ernal mirr

›

››

Fig. 244

 (arrow) or

›››

Fig. 245  (arrow):

●

When being overtaken by another vehicle

›››

Fig. 244 .

●

When passing another vehicle

›››

Fig. 245

 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h

(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-

played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-

er an indication will be displayed in the exter-

nal mirror, because the blind spot detector

takes into account the speed differential with

other vehicles. Thus even though the distance

from the other vehicle is identical, the indica-

tion will appear sooner in some cases and

later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the blind spot detector

may not interpret the traffic situation correct-

ly. E.g. in the following situations:

●

on tight bends;

●

in the case of lanes with different widths;

●

at the top of slopes;

●

in adverse weather conditions;

272

Driver assistance systems

●

in the case of special constructions t

o the

side of the v

ehicl

, e

.g., high or irregular divid-

ers.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 246

Diagram of the parking assistant: de-

ect

ed ar

ea ar

ound the v

ehicle that is driving

off.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensors

on the r

ear bumper

›

Fig. 2

43 to monitor the

traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs

out of a parallel parking space or as it is be-

ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-

bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else on

the road is approaching the rear of the vehi-

cle

›››

Fig. 246, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, if the vehi-

cle is equipped with the park assist system,

the driver is also informed by means of a visu-

al signal on the radio screen. This signal is

displayed in the form of a red strip at the

back of the image of the vehicle on the radio

screen. This strip displays the side of the vehi-

cle towards which traffic is approaching.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

If the rear cross traffic alert detects that

someone else on the road is approaching the

rear of the vehicle and the driver does not

step on the brake, the system will engage the

brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-

matically engaging the brakes to reduce any

damage. The automatic intervention on the

brakes takes place when driving in reverse at

approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting

that the vehicle is stationary, the system

keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-

age, the system will not be able to automati-

cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by

stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or

the brake pedal in order to regain control of

the vehicle.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the rear cross traffic aler

t cannot over-

come the limits imposed by the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

system. The parking assistant function

should not tempt you into taking any risks.

The system is not a replacement for driver

awareness.

●

The system should never be used in limi-

ted visibility conditions or complicated

traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when

crossing multiple lanes.

●

Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-

cle's surroundings, since the system often

fails to detect things such as bicycles or

pedestrians.

●

The rear cross traffic alert itself will not

brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped

with a parking system.

273

Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)

with parking assist

ant (RC

Activating and deactivating the blind spot

detector (BSD) with parking assistant

(RCT

The blind spot detector with parking assistant

can be switched on and off by accessing the

Assistance systems menu on the dash

panel display using the steering wheel con-

trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-

function camera, it can also be accessed by

means of the driver assistance systems key

located on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

●

 Blind spot

●

 Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel is

checked

, the functionality will be automat-

ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-

erate, the indications in the external mirrors

will turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-

ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automatically

deactivated, it will only be possible to restart

the system after turning the vehicle off and

restarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot

detector (BSD)

The radar sensors of the blind spot detect

with rear cross traffic alert will be automati-

cally deactivated when, among other rea-

sons, one of the sensors is detected to be

permanently covered. This may be the case

if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice

in front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the

dash panel display.

Trailer mode

The Blind spot detector and the rear cross

traffic alert will be automatically deactivated

and it will be impossible to activate them if

the tow hitch is electrically connected to a

trailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a

trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a

message will appear on the instrument panel

display indicating that the blind spot detector

and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-

ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from

the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot

detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you

will have to reactivate them in the corre-

sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,

then the blind spot detector and the rear

cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated

manually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction

SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to

choose between four profiles or modes,

Nor-

mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that modi-

fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions,

providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configured

according to personal preferences. The other

profiles are fixed.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-

hicl

, SEAT Driv

e Pr

ofil

e can operate on the

following functions:

Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the engine

responds more spontaneously or more in har-

mony with the movements of the accelerator.

Additionally, when Eco mode is selected, the

Start-stop function is automatically activa-

ted.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

gear change points are modified to position

them in lower or higher engine speed ranges.

274

Driver assistance systems

Additionally, the Eco mode activ

es the Iner

tia function, enabling consumption t

o be fur

ther reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau-

ses the gear shift recommendations that ap-

pear on the instrument panel to vary, facilitat-

ing more efficient driving.

“Dual Ride” suspension

The “Dual Ride” suspension features a com-

fortable suspension in the Eco and Normal

profiles, suitable for daily use. Contrasting

with this it features a sporty suspension in the

Sport profile, suitable for a sporty driving

style. In the Individual profile the suspen-

sion can be switched between Normal or

Sport, depending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus-

pension, the following message is displayed

on the instrument panel screen Fault:

shock absorber regulation.

Address

Power steering becomes more robust in

Sport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate

in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-

sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The acceleration and braking gradient of the

adaptive cruise control varies according to

the active driving profile

›››

page 259.

Setting driving mode

Fig. 247 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but-

on.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco and

Individual.

ou can sel

ect the r

equir

ed mode either by

epeatedly pressing the button MODE

›››

Fig. 247, or on the touch screen, in the

menu that opens when the above button is

pressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system display

informs about the active mode.

The MODE button light remains lit up yellow

when the active mode is different to Normal.

Driving

profile

Characteristics

Normal

Off

ers a balanced driving experi-

ence, suitable for e

veryday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic per-

formance in the vehicle, enabling

the user a mor

e sporty driving style.

Eco

Places the vehicle in a particularly

low state of consumption, f

acilitat-

ing a fuel-saving driving style that is

respectful to the environment.

Individual

Enables some configurations to be

modified by pressing the Profile

settings button. The functions

that can be adjusted depend on

the equipment fitt

ed in the vehicle.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-

tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could

cause an accident.

Note

●

When the vehicle is switched off it will

ore the driving profile that was selected

when the ignition key was removed. Never-

theless, when the engine is restarted, the

engine and the gear will start by default in

the Normal setting. For engine and gear to

revert to the desired position, select the

corresponding drive profile again or press

275

Driving

the Easy Connect system button repeated-

ly.

●

Your speed and driving style must always

be adjusted to visibility, weather

, and traf-

fic conditions.

●

The Eco profile is not recommended when

towing a vehicle.

Kick-down

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-

cel

ation t

o be r

eached.

If the

eco*

›››

page 275 mode has been se-

lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the accel-

erator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en-

gine power is automatically controlled to give

your vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-

pery or wet, the kick-down feat

ure could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which

could result in skidding.

Park Assist*

Intr

oduction

The Park Assist system is an additional func-

tion of ParkPilot

›››

page 284 and helps the

driver to:

●

find a suitable parking space,

●

select a parking mode,

●

park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-

dicular and parallel spaces,

●

park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-

ular spaces,

●

exit a parking space driving forwar

ds from a

parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-

tory radio the front, rear and side areas are

represented, and the position of obstacles is

shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain

limitations inherent to the system and its use

requires special attention by the driver

›››

WARNING

The technology used in the park assist sys-

tem involves a series of limit

ations inherent

in the actual system and in the use of ultra-

sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should

never tempt you to take any risk that may

compromise safety. The system is not a re-

placement for driver awar

eness.

●

Any accidental movement of the vehicle

could result in serious injury.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Certain surfaces of objects and gar-

ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-

sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at

least correctly, these objects or people

wearing such clothes.

●

Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-

ted by external sound sources. In certain

circumstances this may prevent them from

detecting people or objects.

●

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots

in which obstacles and people are not reg-

istered.

●

Monitor the area around the vehicle at all

times, since the ultrasound sensors do not

detect small children, animals or certain

objects in all situations.

WARNING

Quick turns of the steering wheel when

parking or exiting a parking space with

Park Assist can cause serious injury.

●

Do not hold the steering wheel during

manoeuvr

es to park or exit a parking space

276

Driver assistance systems

until the system requests it. Doing so disa-

bles the system during the manoeuvre, r

sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION

●

In cer

tain circumstances, the ultr

asonic

sensors do not detect objects such as trail-

er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,

or an open (or opening) rear lid, which

could damage the vehicle.

●

Retrofitting of certain accessories to the

vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-

fere with the operation of the Park Assist

system and cause damage.

●

The Park Assist system uses as a refer-

ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-

jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels

are not damaged while parking. If necessa-

ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-

noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.

●

The ultrasound sensors on the bumper

may be damaged or shifted in the event of

a collision, for example, when entering or

exiting a parking space.

●

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-

ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do

not apply it directly unless very briefly and

always from a distance of more than 10 cm.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front with larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that is

curved or warped can cause:

–

false detections,

–

loss of sensor visibility.

–

cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or def

ective parking.

●

If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-

aged, the area corresponding to that group

of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and

cannot be activated until the fault is cor-

rected. However, you can still use the sen-

sors of the other bumper as per usual. If

there is a fault in the system, consult a spe-

cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting

a SEAT dealership for this.

Note

●

In order to guarantee good syst

em oper-

ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the

bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do

not cover them with adhesives or other ob-

jects.

●

Certain sources of noise, such as rough

asphalt or paving stones and the noise of

other vehicles can induce the Park Assist

system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-

ings.

●

In order to become familiar with the sys-

tem and its functions, SEAT recommends

that you practice operating the Park Assist

system in an area where there is not too

much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the Park Assist sys-

Fig. 248

In the centre console: button to

wit

ch on the P

ark Assist syst

em.

The components of the Park Assist system

e the ultr

asonic sensors l

ocat

ed in the fr

ont

and rear bumpers, the  button

›››

Fig. 248

to switch the system on and off and the mes-

sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-

terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or

exiting a parking space

Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for

parking or exiting a parking space in any of

the following cases:

●

Press the  button.

●

The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h

(4 mph).

●

The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.

277

Driving

●

The parking manoeuvr

e does not end within

6 minut

es fr

om the activ

ation of aut

omatic

steering.

●

There is a fault in the system (the system is

temporarily unavailable).

●

ASR is switched off.

●

ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.

●

The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that

none of these things occur and that the 

button is pressed again.

Special characteristics

The Park Assist system is subject to certain

limitations inherent to the system. For exam-

ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit

a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a

brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to

change between forward and reverse gears

(depending on the case). In successive ma-

noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to

change gears, at the latest, when the contin-

uous audible signal is given (object present at

a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-

ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-

strument panel also displays the symbol .

Keep the brake pedal depressed while the

symbol remains on the dash panel display to

turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This

way, the system will require fewer manoeu-

vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode

The Park Assist system cannot be switched

on if the factory-fitted towing bracket

›››

page 295 is electrically connected to a

trailer.

After changing a wheel

If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops

entering and exiting parking spaces correct-

ly, the circumference of the new wheel may

be different and the system may need to

adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and

takes place during driving. Making turns slow-

ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])

for a few minutes may contribute to this

adaptation process

›››

in Introduction on

page 276.

278

Driver assistance systems

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 249 Overview of reduced displays for park-

ing modes:  Parallel parking in re

verse.  Per-

pendicular parking in reverse.  Perpendicular

parking forwards.

Fig. 250 On the instrument panel display: dis-

play of the assisted parking system with de-

creased visibilit

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist

with prior st

ep in fr

ont of the space

Aft

er activ

ating the P

ark Assist system and af-

ter detecting a parking space, the display on

the instrument panel proposes a parking

mode. The Park Assist system selects the

parking mode automatically. The selected

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-

play

›››

Fig. 250. The reduced display of oth-

er possible parking modes is also shown

›››

Fig. 249. If the mode selected by the sys-

tem does not correspond to the desired

mode, you can select another mode by

pressing the  button

›››

Fig. 248.

Action

The necessary conditions to park with Park

Assist have to be met

›››

page 281.

Press the  button.

A control lamp on the 

button lights up when

the system is switched on. Additionally, the

sel

ected parking mode is shown on the instru-

ment panel display and the reduced display

shows another parking mode it can be

changed to.

Action

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards

the side of the road where you are parking.

The instrument panel displays the side corr

sponding to the road. By default, if the turn

signal is not on, it parks on the right in the di-

rection of traffic.

If necessary, press the  button again to

change to the next parking mode

Once you have switched to all possible park-

ing modes, if the  button is pressed again,

the system swit

ches off.

Press the  button again to switch the syst

back on.

Follow the instructions displayed on the in-

strument panel while paying attention to traf-

fic and drive the vehicle past the parking

space.

279

Driving

Special case of perpendicular parking

space t

o park f

orw

ds without driving

past first

Action

The necessary conditions to park with Park

Assist have to be met

›››

page 281.

Action

Drive forward towards the parking space while

paying attention to traffic and stop the v

ehi-

cle.

Action

Press the  button once.

A control l

amp on the  button lights up when

the system is switched on. Additionally, the

sel

ected parking mode is shown on the instru-

ment panel display without reduced display.

Release the steering wheel

›››

in Introduc-

tion on page 276.

280

Driver assistance systems

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 251 On the instrument panel display: per-

pendicular parking.  Finding a parking space.



Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 252 On the instrument panel display: paral-

lel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Park

ing position.  Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 251 and Fig. 252:

Message t

o mo

e f

orw

ards

Your vehicle

Parked vehicle

Parking space detected

Message to park

Message to press the brake pedal

Progress bar

Progress bars

The pr

ogr

ess bar

›

Fig. 251

and

›

Fig. 252

on the

scr

een of the instrument panel displ

ays the

ativ

e distance to be covered. The greater

the distance, the fuller the progress bar.

When driving forward, the content of the pro-

gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-

versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As-

sist

For parallel parking

spaces

For perpendicular

parking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on

›››

page 228.

281

Driving

For parallel parking

spaces

For perpendicular

parking spaces

Do not exceed approxi-

mately 40 km/h

(25 mph) when driving

past the parking space.

Do not e

xceed approxi-

mately 20 km/h

(12 mph) when driving

past the parking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when

driving past the parking space.

ength of the space:

length of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Width of the space:

width of the v

ehicle +

0.8 metres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when

parking.

Parking

Do the following:

The necessary conditions have to be met to

park with Park Assist

›››

page 281

and the

parking mode must be selected

›››

page 279.

Look at the display on the instrument panel to

see if the space has been detected as “appro-

priate” and if the corr

ect position for parking

has been reached

›››

Fig. 251  or

›››

Fig. 252

.

The space is considered “appropriate” if the

display on the instrument panel shows the

message to park

Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en-

gage the reverse gear.

Do the following:

Release the steering wheel

›››

in Introduc-

tion on page 276.

Please note the following message: Auto-

matic steering enabled. Pay at-

tention to your surroundings.

While you keep watch around you, carefully

start accelerating up to no mor

e than 7 km/h

(4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system on-

ly takes charge of the steering.

You, as the

driver, have to accelerate, engage the

clutch if necessary, change gears and

brake.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is

hear

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displ

ays

the message to go forwar

›››

Fig. 251 

›››

Fig. 252 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays

the message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar

indicates the distance to

cover

›››

page 281.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-

sist system has finished turning the steering

wheel.

OR: until the  symbol on the instrument pan-

el display switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-

nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis-

ay shows the message to r

everse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-

ward and back until it centres it in the space

››

›

Fig. 251  or

›››

Fig. 252 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each ma-

noeuvre until the Park Assist system has finish-

ed turning the st

eering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre-

sponding message is displayed on the instru-

ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic

signal sounds.

Note

If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely

during parking, the result may not be the

best.

282

Driver assistance systems

Exiting a parking space with Park

Assist (only f

or par

all

el spaces)

Fig. 253

On the instrument panel display:

driving off fr

om perpendicul

ar parking.

Key to the Fig. 253:

ark

ed v

ehicl

our vehicle in reverse gear

Progress bar to indicate the distance left

to cover

Message giving the proposed manoeuvre

to exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parking

space with Park Assist

●

Only for parallel parking spaces

●

The traction control system (ASR) must be

turned on

›››

page 228.

●

Length of the space: length of the vehicle

+ 0.5 metres

●

Do not e

ceed appr

ximat

ely 7 km/h

(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking space

Do the following:

For parallel parking spaces

The necessary conditions to exit a parking

space with Park Assist have to be met

››

›

page 283.

2. Switch on the engine

›››

page 21

Press the  button

›››

Fig. 2

48.

A control lamp on the  button lights up when

the system is switched on.

urn on the corresponding turn signal towards

the road you will enter when exiting the park-

ing space

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever

o position

For parallel parking spaces

Release the steering wheel

›››

in Introduc-

tion on page 276.

Please note the following message: Auto-

matic steering enabled. Pay at-

tention to your surroundings.

While you keep watch around you, carefully

start accelerating up to no mor

e than 7 km/h

(4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the system

only takes charge of the steering.

You, as the

driver, have to accelerate, engage the

clutch if necessary, change gears and

brake.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is

heard.

OR: go backwards until the instrument panel

display shows the message t

o go forward.

The progress bar

›››

Fig. 253

indicates the

distance to cover

›

››

page 281.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park As-

sist syst

em has finished turning the steering

wheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the 

symbol on the instrument panel display

switches off.

283

Driving

For parallel parking spaces

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig-

nal is heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis-

ay shows the message to r

everse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for-

ward and back until it can exit the space.

10.

The v

ehicle can exit the space when a corre-

sponding message is displayed on the instru-

ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic

signal sounds.

Take charge of the st

eering with the turning

angle set by the Park Assist system.

11.

aying attention to the traffic, exit the parking

space.

Automatic braking intervention by

ark Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically

aking in cert

ain sit

uations.

The driv

er is al

ways responsible for braking in

time

›››

Aut

omatic br

aking int

erv

ention t

o avoid

exceeding the speed limit

To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-

prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving

a parking space, the brakes may activate au-

tomatically. After automatically activating

the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a

parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated

once for each attempt to enter or exit a park-

ing space. If the speed of approximately

7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-

sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

Depending on certain conditions, the Park

Assist system can automatically brake the

vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly

actioning and holding down the brake ped-

›››

. Following this the driver must press

the br

e pedal.

Aut

omatic br

aking int

ervention to reduce

damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-

ishing.

WARNING

The automatic braking intervention by Park

Assist should never tempt you t

o take any

risk that may compromise safety. The sys-

tem is not a replacement for driver aware-

ness.

●

The Park Assist system is subject to cer-

tain limitations inherent to the system. In

certain situations, the automatic braking

intervention may only work in a limited way

or not work at all.

●

Always be ready to use the br

akes your-

self!

●

The automatic braking intervention will

end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-

wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-

noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

Assorted assistance systems – which vary

depending on the equipment fitt

ed in the car

– will help you when parking or manoeuvring:

–

arking Syst

em Plus.

It assists the driv

by visually and audibly warning them about

obstacles detected in front and behind the

vehicle

›››

page 286.

–

Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visual

assistant that warns about obstacles loca-

ted behind the vehicle

›››

page 290.

WARNING

●

Always pay attention, also when l

ooking

straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle

surroundings. The assistance systems are

not a replacement for driver awareness.

When inserting or removing the vehicle

from a parking space, or when performing

284

Driver assistance systems

similar manoeuvres the driver always as-

sumes the responsibility.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times t

o suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots

in which obstacles and people are not reg-

istered. Pay special attention to children

and animals.

●

Always keep visual control of the sur-

roundings: use the mirrors for additional

help.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-

fected by different f

actors that may lead to

damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-

rounds:

●

Under certain circumstances, the system

does not detect or display certain objects:

–

Objects such as chains, trailer draw

bars, fences, posts and thin trees.

–

Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.

–

Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-

der snow.

●

Certain surfaces of objects and gar-

ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-

sors' signals. The system cannot detect

these objects or people wearing such

clothes correctly.

●

Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-

ted by e

xternal sound sources. In certain

circumstances this may prevent them from

detecting people or objects.

●

Please note that low obstacles detected

by the system may no longer be registered

by the sensors as the car moves closer, so

the system will not give any further warn-

ing. In certain circumstances, objects such

as high kerbs that could damage the bot-

tom of the vehicle are not detected either.

●

If the first warning from the Parking Aid is

ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-

ble damage.

●

The knocks or damage on the radiator

grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un-

derbody can adjust the orientation of the

sensors. This can affect the parking aid

function. In this case, have the function

checked by a specialised workshop.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front with larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that is

curved or warped can cause:

–

false detections,

–

loss of sensor visibility.

Note

●

In certain situations, the system can giv

a warning even though there is no obstacle

in the detected area, e.g:

–

with rough or cobbled floors or ground

with l

ong grass;

–

with external ultrasound sources, such

as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles

equipped with ultrasound systems;

–

in downpours, intense snow, hail or

dense exhaust gases,

–

if the number plate is not perfectly se-

cured to the bumper surface,

–

or in locations such as the brow of a

hill.

●

In order to guarantee good system oper-

ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean,

free of snow or ice, and do not cover them

with adhesives or other objects.

●

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-

ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap-

ply it directly only very briefly and always

from a distance of more than 10 cm.

●

Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,

such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with

the operation of the Parking Aid.

●

Fitting certain accessories to the front of

the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-

vertising, may interfere with the operation

of the Park Assist.

●

In order to familiarise yourself with the

system, it is advised that you practice park-

ing in an area or car park that is free from

traffic. There must be good weather and

light conditions.

285

Driving

●

The volume and tone of the warnings can

be modified, in addition to the indications

›

››

page 291.

●

In vehicles without an infotainment sys-

tem, these parameters can be modified in a

SEAT Official Service or in a specialised

workshop.

●

Please observe information on towing a

trailer

›››

page 292.

●

The display on the Easy Connect screen

shows a slight time delay.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 254

Represented area.

During parking, P

arking Syst

em Plus

assists

the driv

er by visually and audibly w

arning

them about obstacles detected in front of

and behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated in

the front and rear bumpers. When they de-

tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible

warnings and visually on the Easy Connect

system.

In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au-

dible warning will be emitted. You can tell

whether the risk is in front of or behind the ve-

hicle by choosing different sound frequencies

on Easy Connect.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues and the

like, as this could affect the system's opera-

tion. Cleaning instructions

›››

page 337.

The approximate measurement range of the

sensors is:

1.20 m

1.60 m

0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-

val between the audible warnings will be re-

duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the

warning will be constant: do not continue to

move forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,

the volume of the warning begins to reduce

after four seconds (does not affect the tone

of the constant warning).

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-

hicl

, the v

ehicl

e must be mo

ved a few me-

tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing

areas are screened and obstacles at the

sides of the vehicle are displayed

›››

Fig. 254

Special f

eat

es of P

arkPil

ot with Area

View

In the following situations the screened area

on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid-

den:

●

When a vehicle door is opened.

●

When the ASR is switched off.

●

When there is ASR or ESC regulation.

●

If the vehicle remains stationary for more

than approximately 3 minutes.

286

Driver assistance systems

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 255

Centre console: parking aid button

(depending on the v

ersion).

Manual connection of Parking Aid

●

Press the  butt

once

Manual disconnection of P

arking Aid

●

ess the  button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-

play (the audible sounds remain active)

●

Press a button on the main menu of the fac-

tory-assembled infotainment system.

●

OR press the BACK

function button.

Aut

omatic connection of P

arking Aid

●

Engage r

erse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle

that is in its forwards path at a speed below

15 km/h (9 mph)

›››

page 287. The obstacle is

detected from a distance of approx. 95 cm if

the automatic connection is activated in the

infotainment system. A reduced display is

shown.

●

OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Move the selector lever to position P.

●

OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)

or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button.

Change from reduced view to full view

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-

age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and

the button symbol will light up yellow when

the system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 256

Miniature indication of automatic ac-

tiv

ation.

When the Plus P

arking Aid

connects aut

matically, a miniat

e of the vehicle and the

segments will appear on the left of the dis-

play

›››

Fig. 256.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-

proaching an obstacle located in front of the

vehicle. It only operates every time the speed

is reduced below approximately 15 km/h (9

mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the 

button, the following actions must be carried

out in order for it to automatically switch on:

●

Switch off the ignition and switch it on

again.

●

OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be-

fore reducing speed below this number again.

287

Driving

●

OR: pl

ace the sel

ect

or l

ver in position P

and then move it from this position.

●

OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-

tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aid

miniature indication can be switched on and

off from the Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 34:

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Select: Infotainment button 

SETTINGS

> Parking and manoeuvring function but

on.

●

Sel

ect the

Automatic activation option.

When the function butt

on check box is activa-

ted , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automati-

cally, an audible sound warning will only be

given when obstacles in front are at a dis-

tance of less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking

Aid only works when you are driving slowly.

If driving st

yle is not adapted to the circum-

stances, an accident and serious injury or

damage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 257

Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect syst

em scr

een.

The distance of separation from the obstacle

can be estimat

ed using the segments ar

ound

the v

ehicl

The optical indication of the segments works

as follows:

they are displayed when

the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-

cle or further if it is not within the vehi-

cle's trajectory or the direction of travel

is in the opposite direction to its location,

and also when the electronic parking

brake is activated.

obstacles located in the

vehicle's trajectory and which are more

than 30 cm away from the vehicle are

displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than

30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-

played in red.

Moreover, with the Media System Plus, Navi

System or Navi System Plus systems, a yellow

trail indicates the vehicle's expected trajecto-

ry based on the steering angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-

cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding

audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the

segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,

this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-

cles are represented in red, including those

out of the path. Do not continue to move for-

ward (or backward)

›››

in Introduction on

page 284,

›

in Introduction on

page 285 !

Adjusting the display and audible

arnings

The settings for the display and audible

arnings ar

e contr

oll

ed via the Easy Con-

nect*.

Aut

omatic activation

 on – activates the Automatic activa-

tion option

›››

page 287.

Red segments:

288

Driver assistance systems



off – deactiv

es the

Automatic acti-

vation option

›

››

page 287.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front

area.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear

area.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the active

audio/video source volume will be reduced to

the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is

wit

ched on, if a message r

eporting a P

arking

aid err

or is displayed on the instrument panel,

there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon-

necting the ignition, the next time that the

parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible

signal of the existence of a fault will be is-

sued.

If there is a fault in the parking aid system a

message will appear on the instrument panel

indicating the error.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is

displayed on the Easy Connect display in

front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is

faulty, only the obstacles in area

are dis-

ayed

›

Fig. 254

. If a front sensor is faulty,

only the obstacles in area

are displayed.

Hav

e the f

ault corr

ect

ed by a specialised

orkshop without delay.

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 258

Parking assist display on the screen

with tr

ail

er att

ached.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

vice fr

om the f

act

ory, when the tr

ailer is

connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear

sensors will not be activated when reverse

gear is engaged, when the selector lever is

turned to position R or when the button  is

pressed.

The distance to possible obstacles at the rear

of the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis-

played on the screen and will not be indica-

ted by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only

display objects detected at the front, and the

vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braking while manoeuvring func-

tion*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency br

aking function is used to

minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking

Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring

function activates emergency braking when it

detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that

could cause a collision, driving forwards or in

reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is

activated automatically. For the system to

operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-

tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6

289

Driving

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and

10 km/h (betw

een 1 and 6 mph) f

or the r

ear

ollowing an intervention, the braking while

manoeuvring function will be inactive in the

same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once

the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s

position is changed, the function will be ac-

tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function is

controlled in the Easy Connect system with

the 

button and the SETTINGS > Park

and manoeuvre function butt

ons.

●

 on – permits the use of the braking whil

manoeuvring function.

●

 off – does not permit the use of the

braking whil

e manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency

braking

●

When the function is deactivated with the

Braking while manoeuvring

button that appears

on the P

arking Syst

scr

een of the Easy

Connect syst

em.

●

Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or

bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visual

assistant that warns of obstacl

es located be-

hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear

bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you

are alerted by audible warnings and visually

on the Easy Connect system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and

the like, as this could affect the system's op-

eration. Cleaning instructions

›››

page 337.

The approximate measurement range of the

rear sensors is:

0.60 m

1.60 m

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Move the selector lever to position P.

●

OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)

or faster.

emporary suppression of sound in Park-

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button.

Side area:

Central area:

Change from reduced view to full view

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-

val between the audible warnings will be re-

duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the

warning will be constant: Do not continue to

move forward (or backward)

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 284,

›

in Introduction

on page 285 !

If you maint

ain separ

ation fr

om the obst

acl

the volume of the warning begins to reduce

after four seconds (does not affect the tone

of the constant warning).

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection

●

Engage reverse (for manual gears) or set

the sel

ect

or l

er to R (for automatic gears).

Parking Aid disconnection

●

Place the selector level in position P, N or D

(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-

verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain

the system active for approximately 8 sec-

onds before switching off. During that time,

Parking assist will switch off if:

290

Driver assistance systems

●

The sel

ect

or l

er is moved to position P.

●

OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.

15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-

play (the audible sounds remain active)

●

Press a button on the main menu of the fac-

tory-assembled infotainment system.

●

OR press the BACK

function button.

empor

ary suppr

ession of sound in P

ark

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button.

Switch from reduced to full-screen view if

the rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera

“RVC”)

●

Press the car icon in the reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-

age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the RVC function button.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 259

Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect syst

em scr

een.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima-

ed with the help of the segments at the r

ear

of the v

ehicl

The optical indication of the segments works

as follows:

they are displayed when

the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi-

cle or further if the direction of travel is in

the opposite direction to its location, and

also when the electronic parking brake is

activated.

obstacles located in the

vehicle's trajectory and which are more

than 30 cm away from the vehicle are

displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than

30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-

played in red.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-

cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding

audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the

segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,

this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-

cles are represented in red (including those

out of the path). Do not continue to reverse

›››

in Introduction on page 284,

›

Intr

oduction on page 285

Adjusting the displ

ay and audibl

arnings

The settings for the display and audible

arnings ar

e contr

oll

ed via the Easy Con-

nect*.

ear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear

area.

Red segments:

291

Driving

Adjust volume

With the parking aid s

wit

ched on, the activ

audio/video sour

ce v

olume will be reduced to

the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is

switched on, if a message reporting a Parking

aid err

or is displayed on the instrument panel,

there is a fault in the system.

If the fault disappears before disconnecting

the ignition, the next time that the parking aid

is engaged in reverse, no audible signal of the

existence of a fault will be issued.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the  symbol is

displayed on the Easy Connect display.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

vice fr

om the f

act

ory, when the tr

ailer is

connected electrically, the Parking Aid will

not be activated when reverse gear is engag-

ed (manual gears) nor when the selector lev-

er is turned to position R (automatic gears).

Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-

era”*

Operating and safety warnings

Fig. 260 Related video

WARNING

●

The Rear Assist does not make it possible

to pr

ecisely calculate the distance from

obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor

can it overcome the system's own limits,

hence using it may cause serious accidents

and injuries if used negligently or without

due care. The driver should be aware of

his/her surroundings at all times to ensure

safe driving.

●

The camera lens expands and distorts

the field of vision and displays the objects

on the screen in a different, vague manner.

The perception of distances is also distor-

ted by this effect.

●

Due to the screen resolution or insuffi-

cient light conditions, some items may be

displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or

not at all. Take special care with thin posts,

fences, railings or trees that might not be

displayed on screen and could damage the

vehicle.

●

The rear assist has blind spots wher

e it is

not possible to represent people or objects

(small children, animals and certain ob-

jects cannot be detected in its field of vi-

sion). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding

area at all times.

●

Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice

and snow, and do not cover it.

●

The system is not a replacement for driv-

er awareness. Supervise the parking oper-

ation at all times, as well as the vehicle's

surrounding area. Adapt your speed and

driving style at all times to suit visibility,

weather, road and traffic conditions.

●

Do not be distracted from the traffic by

looking at the screen.

●

The images on the rear assist screen are

only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa-

tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the

road, for example, are more difficult to de-

tect or may not be seen at all.

●

Vehicle load modifies the representation

of the orientation lines displayed. The

width represented by the lines diminishes

with vehicle load. Pay special attention to

the vehicle's surroundings when the inside

of the vehicle of the luggage compartment

is carrying a heavy load.

●

In the following situations, the objects or

other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-

tem display appear to be further away or

292

Driver assistance systems

closer than they really are: Pay special at-

tention:

–

On moving from a horizont

al plane to a

slope.

–

On moving from a slope to a horizontal

plane.

–

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the

rear.

–

When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or

are jutting out from it. These objects

may also be outside the camera's an-

gle of vision when reversing.

Note

●

It is important to tak

e great care and pay

special attention if you are not yet familiar

with the system.

●

Rear assist will not be available if the ve-

hicle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 261

On the rear lid handle: location of the

ear assist camer

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver

during r

erse parking or manoeuvring

›

Fig. 261. The camera image is viewed to-

gether with orientation lines projected by the

system on the Infotainment system screen.

The bottom of the screen displays part of the

bumper, which can be used by the driver as a

reference point.

Rear assist settings

Rear assist offers the user the possibility to

change the image's brightness, contrast and

colour settings.

To change these settings:

●

Park the vehicle in a safe place.

●

Apply the parking brake.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If necessary, switch on the Infotainment

system.

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

Press the  function button displayed on

the right of the image.

●

Make the desired adjustments on the menu

by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by

moving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-

noeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow-

ing cases:

●

If the image displayed is not very reliable or

is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty

lens.

●

If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-

played very clearly or is incomplete.

●

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

●

If the position and installation angle of the

camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-

end collision. Have the system checked by a

specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, the

orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-

ommends practising parking and manoeu-

vring with the rear assist in a place without

293

Driving

too much traffic or in a car park when there

e good w

eather and visibilit

y conditions.

eaning the camer

a lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of

snow and ice:

●

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-

based glass cleaning product and clean the

lens with a dry cloth.

●

Remove snow using a small brush.

●

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

●

Never use abrasive cl

eaning products to

clean the camera lens.

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove

ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so

could damage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with the

ear assist

Fig. 262

Display on the Infotainment system

scr

een: guidance lines.

Switching the system on and off

●

The rear assist will switch on when the igni-

tion is on or the engine running, on engaging

erse gear (manual gearbo

x) or on chang-

ing the sel

ector lever to the R position (auto-

matic gearbox).

●

The system switches off 8 seconds after

disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)

or removing the selector lever from the R po-

sition (automatic gearbox). The system will

also disconnect immediately after the ignition

is switched off.

●

The camera will stop transmitting images

above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-

verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus

›››

page 286, the camera image will cease to

be transmitted immediately when reverse

gear is disengaged or when the selector lever

is moved from the R position, and the optical

information provided by the Parking Aid sys-

tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rear

assist image can also be concealed:

●

By pressing one of the Infotainment system

buttons on the display.

●

OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that

appears on the left of the screen (which

switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-

ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist image

again:

●

Disengage reverse, or change the selector

lever's position, engage reverse again or

move the selector lever to position R.

●

OR: Press the RVC function button

WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) func-

tion button will only be activ

ated and available

when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector

lever is set to position R.

294

Towing bracket device

Meaning of the orientation lines

›

Fig. 262

Side lines:

xtension of the vehicle (the

approximate width of the vehicle plus the

rear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked in

green ends approximately 2 m behind the

vehicle on the road surface.

Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi-

mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road

surface.

Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis-

tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear

of the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

●

Place the vehicle in front of the parking

space and engage reverse gear (manual

gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-

tion (automatic gearbox).

●

Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel

so that the side orientation lines lead towards

the parking space.

●

Guide the vehicle into the parking space so

that the side orientation lines run parallel to it.

Towing bracket device

wing br

ack

et de

vice*

Introduction

The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi-

cle, be it factory-fitt

ed or a genuine SEAT ac-

cessory, meets all the national technical and

legal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector

for the electrical connection between the

trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-

ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the

corresponding adaptor, which is available as

a genuine SEAT accessory.

The maximum authorised towing load is 55

kg.

WARNING

●

Before each journey, make sure that the

det

achable ball joint is properly fitted and

secured in its housing.

●

If the detachable ball joint is not properly

fitted and secured, do not use it.

●

Do not use the towing bracket device for

towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.

●

Do not modify or adapt the towing device

connection.

●

Never unhook the detachable ball joint

when the trailer is hitched.

CAUTION

Handle the detachable ball joint with care

in order to avoid damaging the bumper

paintwork

Note

Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball

joint

›››

page 89.

295

Driving

Description

Fig. 263

Towing bracket device support / de-

achabl

e ball joint / k

ey.

Depending on the country or version, the

wing br

ack

et de

vice's detachable ball joint

is located:

●

underneath the floor panel of the luggage

compartment.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

The towing device bracket is supplied with a

key.

Key to

›››

Fig. 263

13-pin connector

Safety lug

Hook housing

Hook housing cap

Ball protective cover

Detachable ball

Locking lever

Lock cover

Release bolt

Lock

Locking balls

Key

Note

Contact an Authorised Service Partner if

you lose your key.

Placing in standby position

Fig. 264

Step 1.

Fig. 265

Step 2.

Before assembling it, place the detachable

ball in the st

andby position with the f

oll

wing

o steps.

296

Towing bracket device

Step 1.

●

Turn the key in the direction of arrow

un-

til the part of the k

ey with the hol

es r

eaches

the t

op position

›

››

Fig. 264 (arrow).

Step 2.

●

Grip the detachable ball below the protec-

tive cover.

●

Press the release bolt

in the direction of

arr

, and at the same time press lever

in the direction of arrow

as far as it will go

›

Fig. 265

The l

ever will remain blocked in this position.

Standby position

Fig. 266 Reserve position: position of the lever

and the r

ease bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly

●

Key

›

Fig. 266

is in the r

eleased posi-

tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-

ing upwards).

●

Lever

›

Fig. 266

is in the bott

om posi-

tion.

●

The release bolt

›

Fig. 266

can be

ved.

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready

for installation.

CAUTION

The key cannot be removed or turned in the

standby position.

Assembling the detachable ball -

Step 1

Fig. 267 Fitting the detachable ball / Release

bolt in the depl

oyed position.

Fitting the detachable ball

●

Remove the hook housing cap

›››

Fig. 263 do

wnw

ds.

●

Set the det

achabl

e ball to its standby posi-

tion

›››

page 296.

●

Grip the detachable ball from below

›››

Fig. 267 and insert it into the hook housing

297

Driving

following the direction of arrow

until it en-

gages audibly

›

turns aut

omatically in the direction

of arr

upwards, and the release bolt

moves outwards (the red and green part will

be visibl

›

If l

does not turn automatically or the

ease bolt

does not come out, the de-

achabl

e ball shoul

d be r

emo

ved by turning

the lever as far as possible downwards from

the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's

support surfaces and the cavity should then

be cleaned.

WARNING

●

When attaching the detachable ball,

keep your hands w

ell away from the reach

of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your

fingers caught.

●

Never try to pull the lever upwards by

force to turn the key. The detachable ball

would not be secured properly!

Assembling the detachable ball -

ep 2

Fig. 268

Locking the lock.

Fig. 269 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step

›

page 297, As-

sembling the det

achabl

e ball - Step 1!

●

Turn key

in the direction of arrow

until

the part of the k

ey with the hol

es r

eaches the

bott

om position

›

››

Fig. 268.

●

Remove the key in the direction of arrow

●

Place cover

in the lock in the direction of

arr

›

Fig. 269

›

››

●

Check that the detachable ball is securely

att

ached

›

page 299, Checking pr

oper at-

tachment.

CAUTION

●

After removing the key, al

ways place the

cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-

comes soiled it will be impossible to insert

the key.

●

Keep the towing bracket device's housing

cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-

vent the detachable ball from being prop-

erly secured!

●

If the detachable ball is removed, always

place the cap on the hook's housing.

298

Towing bracket device

Checking proper attachment

Fig. 270

Detachable ball properly attached.

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,

mak

e sur

e that it is pr

operly att

ached first.

Det

achable ball properly attached.

●

The detachable ball will not fall out of the

housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.

●

Lever

›

Fig. 270

is fully r

aised.

●

The release bolt

›

Fig. 270

is sticking

fully out (the r

ed and green part is visible).

●

The key has been removed.

●

Cover

›

Fig. 270

is pl

aced over the

lock.

WARNING

●

When removing the detachable ball,

eep your hands well away from the reach

of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your

fingers caught.

●

The towing bracket de

vice should only be

used if the detachable ball has been prop-

erly locked!

Removing the detachable ball -

Step 1

Fig. 271 Removing the lock cover.

Fig. 272 Releasing the lock.

●

emo

e co

from the lock in the direc-

tion of arr

›

Fig. 27

●

Insert k

into the lock in the direction of

arr

›

Fig. 27

●

urn the key in the direction of arrow

un-

til the part of the k

ey with the hol

es is f

acing

ards.

WARNING

Never remove the detachable ball joint

when the trailer is hitched.

Note

Before you remove the detachable ball,

you are advised to place the prot

ective

cover on the ball coupling.

299

Driving

Removing the detachable ball -

ep 2

Fig. 273

Releasing the detachable ball.

Do not omit this first step

›

page 299, R

ving the detachable ball - Step 1!

Releasing the detachable ball

●

Grip the detachable ball from below.

●

Press the release bolt

in the direction of

arr

as far as it will go, and at the same

time pr

ess l

in the direction of arrow

as far as it will go.

In this position, the det

achabl

e ball is l

oose

and will f

all/dr

op freely downwards. If this

does not occur when you release it, press it

with the other hand from above.

The detachable ball locks into the standby

position at the same time and is therefore

ready to be reinserted into the hook housing

›››

●

Fit the cap

›

Fig. 263

ont

o its housing.

WARNING

Never leave the detachable ball loose in

the luggage compartment. It could cause

damage in the luggage compartment in the

case of abrupt braking, and e

ven jeopard-

ise passenger safety!

CAUTION

●

If you hold the lever and do not pr

ess

down on it as far as you can, after you re-

move the detachable ball, the latter will

continue upwards and will not lock into the

standby position. The detachable ball

should be placed in this position before the

next assembly.

●

Keep the detachable ball in the standby

position, with the key inserted into the box

while you place it facing downwards with

the side opposite to the one where the key

is inserted. The key could get damaged!

●

When operating the lever, do not apply

too much pressure (for example, do not

stand on it)!

Note

Remove any dirt from the detachable ball

before you put it away with the vehicl

tools.

Operation and care

Put the cover on the housing cavity so that

dirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer

, always check the

ball coupling and apply suitable grease if

necessary.

Use the protective cover when putting the de-

tachable ball away to keep the luggage

compartment clean.

Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-

faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

CAUTION

The top part of the hook housing is

greased. Make sure that the grease has not

been r

emoved.

Trailer towing

What do you need t

o bear in mind

when t

wing a tr

ail

er?

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer

when fitt

ed with the corr

ect equipment.

If you wish t

etrofit a towing bracket, con-

sult

›››

page 305.

300

Towing bracket device

Connectors

our v

ehicl

e is fitt

ed with a 13-pin connect

for the electrical connection between the

trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to

use an adapter cable. It is available at any

Technical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If

you do not load the trailer up to the maximum

permitted trailer weight, you can then climb

correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only

applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above

sea level. With increasing altitude the engine

power and therefore the vehicle climbing

ability are impaired because of the reduced

air density. The maximum trailer weight has to

be reduced accordingly. The weight of the

vehicle and trailer combination must be re-

duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or

part thereof). The gross combination weight

is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus

the actual weight of the laden trailer. When

possible, operate the trailer with the maxi-

mum permitted drawbar load on the ball

joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed

the specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbar

loads that are given on the data plate of the

towing bracket are for certification purposes

only. The correct towing bracket figures for

your specific model, which may be lower

than these figures, are given in the vehicle

documentation or on

›››

page 346, Techni-

cal specifications.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy

objects are as near to the axle as possible.

Loads carried in the trailer must be secured

to prevent them moving.

Tyre pressure

The maximum permissible tyre pressure val-

ues are shown on the sticker on the rear part

of the left front door frame. Set the tyre pres-

sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the

trailer manufacturer's recommendations.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of the

road behind the trailer with the standard rear

vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you

should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.

Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on

hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors

to give sufficient vision to the rear.

Tow rope

Always use a cable between the vehicle and

the trailer

›››

page 301.

Trailer rear lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply with

the statutory safety regulations

›››

page 301.

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer. This

could result in fatal accidents.

Note

●

Towing a trailer pl

aces additional de-

mands on the vehicle. We recommend ad-

ditional services between the normal in-

spection intervals if the vehicle is used fre-

quently for towing a trailer.

●

Find out whether special regulations ap-

ply to towing a trailer in your country.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 274 Diagram: assignment of the pins of

the tr

ail

's el

ectrical sock

et.

301

Driving

Key of the Schematic diagram

›››

Fig. 274:

Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pin 9

Electrical socket for trailer

The v

ehicl

e is fitt

ed with a 13-pol

e po

wer

socket for the electrical connection between

the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-

tects that a trailer has been connected elec-

trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer

will receive voltage through this connection.

Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for

example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 is

only powered when the engine is running. The

charge wire (pin 10) charges, for example, a

caravan battery.

Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to

each other to avoid discharging or damaging

the vehicle's battery.

The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13, should

never be connected to each other to avoid

overloading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you

will need to use an adapter cable. In this case

the function corresponding to pin 10 will not

be available.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

Side lights (total) 100 Watts

Rear lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note

●

If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor

rectly connected, the vehicle electronics

may be damaged.

●

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric

current, the vehicle electronics may be

damaged.

●

Never connect the trailer

's electric sys-

tem directly to the electrical connections

of the tail lights or any other power sour-

ces. Only use the connections intended for

providing electric current to the trailer.

Ball coupling of towing bracket de-

vice*

The ball coupling is provided with instructions

on fitting and removing the ball coupling of

the towing br

acket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be

stored securely in the luggage compart

ment to prevent them being flung through

the vehicle and causing injury.

Note

●

By law, the ball coupling must be re-

mov

ed if a trailer is not being towed if it ob-

scures the number plate.

302

Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 275

Turn the 13-pin connector.

Before driving

●

Grip the 13-pin connector at area

and

emo

e it in the dir

ection of the arr

›››

Fig. 275.

●

Remove the protective cover

›

Fig. 263

ards.

After driving

●

Grip the 13-pin connector at area

and

insert it in the opposit

e dir

ection t

o the arr

›››

Fig. 275.

●

Fit the protective cover

›

Fig. 263

the ball coupling.

Saf

ety lug

The safety lug

›

Fig. 275

is used t

o hook

up the trailer's retainer cable.

On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retainer

cable should have slack in all the trailer po-

sitions with respect to the vehicle (sharp

bends, reverse gear, etc.).

Headlights

The front part of the vehicle may be raised

when the trailer is connected and the light

may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the

headlight range adjuster

›››

page 143

WARNING

●

Never use the safety lug t

o tow!

●

Adjust your speed to suit the road and

traffic conditions.

●

All work on the electrical system must be

carried out only by specialised workshops.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem to the electrical connections of the

rear lights or any other power sources.

●

After hooking up the trailer and connect-

ing the socket, check that all the trailer's

rear lights are working properly.

Note

●

If there is any fault in the trailer

's lighting,

check the fuses in the instrument panel

fuse box

›››



page 50.

●

The contact between the retainer cable

and the safety lug may give rise to me-

chanical wear in the lug's surface protec-

tion. This wear will not prevent the safety

lug from operating properly or cause any

fault and is excluded from the warranty.

●

When connecting and disconnecting the

trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake

should be applied.

Anti-theft alarm

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-

ger

ed when the el

ectrical connection be-

een v

ehicl

e and trailer is interrupted.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system

before connecting or disconnecting a trailer

›››

page 133.

Conditions for the integration of a trailer in

the anti-theft alarm system.

●

The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an-

ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket

device.

This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED

xenon headlights.

303

Driving

●

The tr

ail

er is connect

ed el

ectrically t

o the

towing vehicle by the trailer connector.

●

The electrical system of the vehicle and the

trailer are prepared for operation.

●

The vehicle is locked with the ignition key

and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTION

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with

rear LED lights are not integrat

ed in the an-

ti-theft alarm system.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra

car

eight distribution

The w

eight distribution of a l

oaded trailer with

an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.

However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra

slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight

distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-

duced with increasing speed. For this reason,

it is advisable not to drive at the maximum

permissible speed in an unfavourable road,

weather or wind conditions. This applies es-

pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediately

if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-

ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-

creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer has

an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at

first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerk-

ing that can be caused by locking of trailer

wheels. Select a low gear in due course be-

fore going down a steep downhill. This ena-

bles you to use the engine braking to slow

down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and during pro-

longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high

engine speed, always monitor the coolant

temperature gauge

›››

page 114.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle

and trailer

The stabilisation of the towing vehicle and

ail

er t

ogether is an additional function of the

ectr

onic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is sway-

ing, it intervenes automatically with the driver

steering recommendation to reduce the

swaying of the trailer.

Requirements for the stabilisation of the

towing vehicle and trailer

●

The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-

ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a

compatible towing bracket.

●

The ESC and ASR are active. The control

lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument

cluster.

●

The trailer is electrically connected to the

towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-

et.

●

The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h

(approx. 37 mph).

●

The maximum vertical load technically per-

missible is being utilised on the coupling de-

vice.

●

The trailer has a rigid draw bar.

●

If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped

with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNING

The enhanced security provided by the

electric stability control of the t

owing vehi-

cle and trailer should not lead you to take

any risks that could compromise your safe-

ty.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Accelerate with caution when the road is

slippery.

304

Towing bracket device

●

When adjusting any settings, stop accel-

erating.

WARNING

The electric stability control for the towing

ehicle and trailer may not corr

ectly de-

tect all driving conditions.

●

When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-

sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-

so switched off.

●

The stability system does not always de-

tect light and unstable trailers, so it may

not stabilise these correctly.

●

When driving on slippery surfaces with

poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with

the stability system.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity can

tip even without having previously swayed.

●

If a trailer is not attached, but the trailer

power socket is connected (e.g. installation

of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated au-

tomatic braking may occur in extreme driv-

ing conditions.

Retrofitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 276

Attachment points for towing bracket.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-

hicl

e is pur

chased, this must be compl

accor

ding to the instructions of the towing

bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket

are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The dist

ance betw

een the centr

e of the ball

coupling and the gr

ound shoul

d never be

lower than the indicated value, even with a

fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-

mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing brack-

et:

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehi-

cle)

1,033 mm

322 mm

338 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

●

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort

or the v

ehicl

. Ther

efore, before fitting a tow-

ing bracket, please contact a Technical Serv-

ice to check whether your cooling system

needs modification.

●

The legal requirements in your country

must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-

rate control lamp).

●

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear

bumper, must be removed and reinstalled.

The towing bracket securing bolts must be

305

Driving

tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-

er sock

et must be connect

ed t

o the v

ehicl

electrical system. This requires specialised

knowledge and tools.

●

Figures in the illustration show the elevation

value and the attachment points which must

be considered if you are retrofitting a towing

bracket.

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a

specialised workshop.

●

If the towing br

acket is incorrectly instal-

led, there is a serious danger of accident.

●

For your own safety, please observe the

tow bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION

●

If the power socket is incorrectly inst

al-

led, this could cause damage to the vehicle

electrical system.

Note

●

SEAT recommends that the towing hooks

be fitted at a specialised w

orkshop. Con-

sult your SEAT dealer in case additional

modifications to your vehicle are necessa-

ry.

●

Due to the specific design of the exhaust,

the fitting of a conventional towing hook is

not recommended for some sportier ver-

sions. Please consult your Technical Serv-

ice.

306

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Practical tips

Accessories and modifi-

cations t

o the v

ehicl

Accessories and modifica-

tions t

o the v

ehicle

Accessories, replacement of parts

and modifications

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-

d of activ

e and passiv

e saf

Before purchasing accessories and parts,

and before making technical changes to your

vehicle, we recommend that you consult your

Technical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide

you with the latest information about the use,

legal requirements and recommendations

from the manufacturer regarding accessories

and spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Ap-

proved Accessories

and SEAT Approved

Spare Parts

. This way, SEAT can guarantee

that the product in question is suitable, relia-

ble and safe. SEAT Technical Services have

the necessary experience and facilities to en-

sure that parts are correctly and professio-

nally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the mar-

ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,

safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has

not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot

assume responsibility for any non-genuine

parts used, even if these parts have been ap-

proved by an official testing agency or are

covered by an official approval certificate.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-

rect impact on the driver's control of the vehi-

cle, such as a cruise control system or elec-

tronically-controlled suspension, must be ap-

proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and

bear the e mark (the European Union's au-

thorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-

ted which do not serve to control the vehicle

itself, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or

ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark

(European Union manufacturer conformity

declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone hold-

ers or cup holders, should never be fitt

on the covers, or within the working range,

of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger

of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-

dent.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-

cording to our specifications. Unauthorised

modifications to the electr

onic components

or software in the vehicle may cause mal-

functions. Due to the way the electronic com-

ponents are linked together in networks, other

indirect systems may be affected by the

faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead

to excessive wear of components, and also

invalidate your vehicle registration docu-

ments.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held lia-

ble for any damage caused by modifications

and/or work incorrectly performed. For this

reason, we recommend having all work per-

formed by a SEAT Technical Service using

SEAT

Original Spare Parts.

WARNING

Any type of work or modification performed

incorrectly on your vehicle can lead t

o mal-

functions and can cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office

equipment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any r

etr

ofit inst

all

ations of r

adio transmitters

in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT

307

Practical tips

generally authorises in-vehicle installations

of appr

ed t

ypes of r

adio transmitters provi-

ded that:

●

The aerial is installed correctly.

●

The aerial is installed on the exterior of the

vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-

gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).

●

The effective transmitting power does not

exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-

shop will be able to inform you about options

for installing and operating radio transmitters

with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radio

equipment might interfere with the electron-

ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.

This may be due to:

●

No external aerial.

●

External aerial incorrectly installed.

●

Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable

mobile telephones or radio equipment inside

the vehicle without a properly installed exter-

nal aerial

›››

ease not

e al

so that the maximum r

ange of

the equipment can only be achie

ved with an

external aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or private

equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-

ded the equipment cannot interfere with the

driver's immediate control of the vehicle and

that any such equipment carries the  mark.

Any retrofit equipment that could influence

the driver's control of the vehicle must have a

type approval for your vehicle and must carry

the e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment

which is operated inside the vehicle without

a pr

operly installed external aerial can

create excessive magnetic fields that

could cause a health hazard.

Note

●

The posterior fitting of electric and elec-

tronic equipment in this v

ehicle affects its

licence and could lead to the withdrawal of

the vehicle registration document under

certain circumstances.

●

Please use the mobile telephone/radio

operating instructions.

Checking and refilling lev-

efuelling

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 46

If the automatic fill

er nozzle is operated cor-

rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the

tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this

point, as this will fill the expansion chamber.

Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are

warm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-

en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank

flap.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-

brids

Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-

rol until the control lamp switches off  and

then the tank must be refilled. This is neces-

sary to ensure that the system works proper-

ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-

ing with petrol.

308

Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

●

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause

serious burns and other injuries.

–

Never smok

e or come into contact with

sparks when filling the fuel tank of the

vehicle or a spare fuel canister with

fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

–

Follow legal requirements for the use of

spare fuel canisters.

–

For safety reasons we do not recom-

mend carrying a spare fuel canister in

the vehicle. The canister could be dam-

aged in an accident and leak.

●

If, in exceptional circumstances, you

have to carry a spare fuel canister, please

observe the following:

–

Never fill the spare fuel canister inside

the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic

charge could build up during filling,

causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This

could cause an explosion. Always

place the canister on the ground to fill

it.

–

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of

the canister as far as possible.

–

If the spare fuel canister is made of

metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-

tact with the canister during filling. This

helps prevent an electrostatic charge

building up.

–

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the

luggage compartment. Fuel vapours

are explosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION

●

Fuel spills should be remov

ed from the

paintwork immediately.

●

Never run the tank completely dry. Irreg-

ular fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a

result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalyt-

ic converter and cause damage.

●

When filling the fuel tank after having run

it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel

engine the ignition must be switched on for

at least 30 seconds before starting the en-

gine. Subsequently, when you start the en-

gine it may take longer than normal to start

firing (up to one minute). This is due to the

fact that the fuel system has to purge itself

of air before starting.

For the sake of the environment

Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto-

matic filler nozzle has swit

ched off, this

may cause the fuel to overflow if it be-

comes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for the

manual release of the fuel tank flap

. If nec-

essary, request assistance from special-

ised personnel.

Refuelling with natural gas

Fig. 277

Open tank lid: gas filler mouth

, fill-

er mouth r

ainer

Before r

efuelling, the engine and the ignition,

mobil

e t

ephone and heating must be

witched off separately

›››

ead the instructions on ho

w t

o use the nat

al gas pump carefully.

The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with

liquefied natural gas (LNG)

›››

. Before refu-

elling with nat

al gas, mak

e sur

e you add

the appr

opriate type of fuel

›››

page 312.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel

tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.

●

Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the

central locking button  situated on the driv-

er door

›››

page 129.

309

Practical tips

●

ess on the r

ear ar

ea of the fl

ap and open

it.

efuelling

Special feature: If the ambient temperature

is very high, the natural gas pump protection

against overheating disconnects this auto-

matically.

●

Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth

›››

Fig. 277

●

Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas

fill

er mouth.

●

The fuel t

ank will be

full

when the pump

compr

essor automatically cuts the supply.

●

If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,

press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Check that the mouth retainer

of the gas

fill

er is not tr

apped with the fill

. If necessary,

ace it in the filler mouth again.

●

Insert the plug in the filler mouth.

●

Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it

click into place.

WARNING

Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily

flammable substance. Incorr

ect handling

of the natural gas can cause accidents se-

rious burns and other injuries.

●

Before refuelling with natural gas, en-

gage the filling mouth correctly. If you can

smell gas, stop refuelling immediately.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied

nat

ural gas (LNG), and this fuel must not be

added under any circumstances. Liquefied

nat

ural gas can cause the natural gas tank

to explode, resulting in serious injury.

Note

●

The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps

can diff

er in the way they are operated. If

you do not know, ask a qualified employee

at the petrol station to do the refuelling.

●

Noises heard when refuelling are normal

and do not indicate the presence of a fault

in the system.

●

The vehicle natural gas system is pre-

pared both for refuelling with a small com-

pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-

sor (fast refuel) in natural gas service sta-

tions.

Fuel

Identification of the fuel

Fig. 278 Identification of fuels according to

Eur

opean Union (EU) Dir

ectiv

e 2014/94/

Fuels are identified with different symbols.

Depending on the fuel, the diff

ent symbol

e on the pump and the t

ank lid of your vehi-

cle. The identification serves to prevent con-

fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-

nol). The number indicates the percent-

age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,

for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.

Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-

diesel). The number indicates the per-

centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

Depending on country

310

Checking and refilling levels

means, for example, a proportion of bio-

diesel of max. 7%.

Nat

al gas

: “CNG” means

ompressed

Natural Gas.

Type of petrol

3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine

The correct grade of petrol is list

ed inside the

fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-

verter and must only be run on unleaded

petrol. The petrol must comply with the

standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels

with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled

(E10)

. The types of petrol are differentiated

by using the octane numbers (RON) or via

the anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor-

mation included in the corresponding stickers

on the tank lid (examples):

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or

normal 91 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-

tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power

oss).

Super unl

eaded petr

ol, 95 oct

anes at

east

You should use super 95 octane petrol (91

AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or

super 95 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super plus 98

octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super

95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

●

Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.

E30 - E100 butt

on must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception:

vehicles with Totalfl

ex engine

›››

page 312,

Ethanol fuel.

●

A single refuelling with leaded fuel or

other metal additives entails a permanent

deterioration of the effectiveness of the

catalytic converter.

●

Only use fuel additives that have been

approved by SEAT. The products that con-

tain substances to increase the octane rat-

ing or decrease knocking may contain met-

al additives that damage the engine and

catalytic converter. This type of products

must not be used.

●

Do not use fuels shown in the pump as

containing metals. LRP (lead replacement

petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Risk of engine damage!

●

High engine speed and full throttle can

damage the engine when using petrol with

an octane rating lower than the correct

grade for the engine.

Note

●

Fuel with an octane rating higher than the

one required by the engine can be used.

●

In countries in which ther

e is no sulphur-

free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-

phur content fuel.

Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.

311

Practical tips

Ethanol fuel

3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can recognise vehicl

es with Totalflex en-

gines

by label on the fuel tank lid with with

the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with

unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-

ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high

percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-

led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that

›››

page 311, Type of pet-

rol

Note

SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-

sively with petrol every 10,

000 km to de-

crease impurities that using E100 ethanol

fuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel

3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine

Please not

e the information on the inside of

the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to

standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-

tures, thus affecting the start or oper

ation of

the engine. To ensure that you can continue

to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in

gas stations is provided -depending on the

station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em-

ployee of the petrol station whether their die-

sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited

for current and future temperatures.

CAUTION

●

Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,

heating oil, other fuel

s or thinning agents

as they can cause severely damage the

fuel system and the engine.

●

If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not

start the engine under any circumstances.

Risk of damaging the fuel system and the

engine! Obtain technical assistance.

Natural gas

3 Applies to vehicles: with a natur

al gas engine

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid

form, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)

Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only

be working with CNG (Compressed Natural

Gas CNG ), or with a mixture of biomethane

if it complies with Regul

ation EN 16723-2.

Do not use fuels such as liquefied natural gas

(Liquefied Natural Gas), liquified petroleum

gas (LPG = Liquefied Petroleum G) or hy-

thane (hydrogen mixed with methane)

›››

Ther

, v

ehicles with a natural gas engine

must only be refuelled using compressed

natural gas (CNG).

Natural gas quality and consumption

Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L

depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power and

inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content

than type L. The higher the heating power of

the natural gas, the lower the consumption

will be.

However, the heating power and the propor-

tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc-

tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve-

hicle consumption can also vary when using

a single type of gas only.

The engine management automatically

adapts to the natural gas used according to

its quality. Therefore, different quality gases

can be mixed in the tank, without the need for

comprehensive draining before applying a

different quality gas.

This motor is only available in some markets.

312

Checking and refilling levels

Updated information relating to natural gas

qualit

y is displ

ayed on the instrument panel

›

page 108.

Natural gas and safety

If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a

leak

›››

●

Stop the vehicle immediately.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the doors to appropriately ventilate

the v

ehicl

●

Extinguish cigar

ett

es immediately.

●

Move away from the vehicle or switch off

objects that may cause sparks or a fire.

●

If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-

ue driving!

●

Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault

repaired.

Regular checks of the natural gas system

The natural gas tanks may be damaged or

corroded by external factors. The walls of the

gas tanks are weakened by deformations,

damage or corrosion. As a result, the tanks

could burst and result in serious injuries or

even death. For this reason, the vehicle owner

must have a specialised workshop check (vis-

ual check) the gas system every 4 years at

least. The vehicle owner must have a speci-

alised workshop replace the natural gas

tanks before they reach the end of their serv-

ice life. For further information about the serv-

ice life of gas tanks, go to a SEAT dealer serv-

ice or a specialised workshop

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in the

vehicle or when refuelling can cause seri-

ous injuries.

●

Carry out the necessary operations.

●

eave the danger zone.

●

If necessary, warn the emergency serv-

ices.

WARNING

The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-

ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),

so LNG or LPG should not be used under

any circumst

ances. Liquid gas can cause

an explosion of the natural gas tanks and

cause severe injuries!

WARNING

Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-

sult in serious injury or even death.

●

Have the natur

al gas deposits checked at

least every 4 years (visual check).

●

Natural gas tanks have a limited service

life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced

when required. You can obtain further infor-

mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-

alised workshops.

WARNING

If the vehicle underbody touches the

ground or in the event of a rear collision,

ther

e could be damage to the natural gas

tanks.

●

Check whether there is a smell of gas.

●

If you notice a smell of gas, take the vehi-

cle to a specialised workshop immediately

and have the natural gas system checked.

Note

Have the natural gas system checked regu-

larly by a specialised workshop, according

o the Maintenance Programme.

AdBlue

Inf

ormation on AdBlue

Fig. 279 Related video

The consumption of AdBlue

depends on

your personal driving st

, the t

emper

ature

of the system and on the outdoor tempera-

ture when the vehicle is used.

313

Practical tips

AdBlue

eezes at temperatures of -11°C

(+13°F). The syst

em has heating el

ements

that guar

ant

ee its operation even at low tem-

peratures.

The AdBlue

tank level capacity is approxi-

mately 10.4 litres.

The AdBlue

tank should never be empty.

When the distance to empty drops below

2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue

tank

will appear on the dash panel display

›››

page 314. If this information is ignored, lat-

er on it will not be possible to re-start the en-

gine. If this warning does not appear, it is not

necessary to refill the AdBlue

tank.

AdBlue

is a registered brand of the German

Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)

and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel

Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION

Filling the AdBlue

tank excessively can

cause damage t

o the tank.

Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 280

AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling

ark the v

ehicl

e on a fl

at surf

ace. If the vehi-

cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-

ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, the

level indicator may not detect the load prop-

erly.

If a warning message about AdBlue

levels

appears on the dash panel display, fill at

least the minimum amount required (ap-

prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount

will the system detect that AdBlue

has been

added and you will be able to start the en-

gine again. The maximum amount that can

be refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not

switched off during refilling, the warning to re-

fill may continue to appear on the instrument

panel display.

Fill with a refill bottle

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Open the tank cover

›››

Fig. 280.

●

Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-

ti-clockwise direction.

●

Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-

tions, indicated on the refill bottle.

●

Check the expiry date.

●

Remove the cap of the refill bottle.

●

Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler

neck vertically and screw the bottle on by

hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.

●

Press the refill bottle in the direction of the

filler neck and hold it in this position.

●

Wait until the contents of the refill bottle

have been poured into the AdBlue

tank. Do

not compress or break the bottle!

●

Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-

rection and gently pull it upwards

›››

●

The AdBlue

ank is full when no mor

e liquid

comes out of the bottl

●

Scr

ew on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-

tion until it is tightly closed.

●

Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving

●

After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-

nition.

314

Checking and refilling levels

●

eav

e the ignition on f

or at l

east 30 sec-

onds f

or the system to detect the fluid load.

●

Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds

before starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue

Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-

duction.

●

Open the tank cap.

●

Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise

›››

Fig. 280.

●

Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the

first time.

●

Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise

until you hear a click.

WARNING

AdBlue

should only be stored in the origi-

nal container

, which should be tightly

closed and kept in a safe place.

●

Never keep AdBlue

in empty food con-

tainers, bottles or other similar containers.

Other people may confuse it for other

products.

●

Keep AdBlue

out of the reach of chil-

dren.

CAUTION

●

When refilling, the nozzle grip should be

aligned do

wnward. Otherwise the nozzle

will not connect automatically.

●

Do not try to add any more additive after

the nozzle has stopped for the first time.

The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue

could spill out.

●

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Never mix AdBlue

with water, fuel or ad-

ditives. Any type of damage caused by

such a mixture will not be covered by the

warranty.

●

Never pour AdBlue

into the fuel tank.

This could result in engine damage.

●

Do not carry the refill bottle inside the

vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-

ture changes or damage to the bottle), the

AdBlue

may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-

ment-friendly manner.

Note

You can buy refill bottles that are adequate

for AdBlue

use at SEAT dealerships.

Working in the engine com-

par

tment

Saf

y not

es f

or work in the engine

compartment

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 17

Bef

ore starting any work on the engine or in

the engine compartment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the se-

lector lever to position P, depending on the

case.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet

›››



page 17.

You should not do any work in the engine

compartment unless you know exactly how

to carry out the jobs and have the correct

tools! Have the work carried out by a special-

ised workshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool-

ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, are

under constant development. SEAT provides

a constant flow of information to Technical

315

Practical tips

Services concerning modifications. For this

eason, w

e r

ecommend you hav

e service flu-

ids and consumabl

es replaced by a Techni-

cal Service. Please observe the relevant in-

structions

›››

page 307. The engine compart-

ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area

›››

WARNING

All work on the engine or in the engine com-

partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids,

invol

ves the danger of injury and burns, ac-

cidents and even fire.

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam,

smoke or coolant escaping from the engine

compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of

sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam

or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine

to cool before carefully opening the bon-

net.

●

Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition.

●

Apply the handbrake and move the gear

lever to neutral or selector lever to position

●

Keep children away from the vehicle.

●

Never touch hot engine parts. There is a

risk of burns.

●

Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a

hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire haz-

ard.

●

Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-

trical system, particularly at the points

where the jump leads are attached

›››



page 59. The batt

ery could explode.

●

Never touch the radiator fan. It is temper-

ature controlled and could start automati-

cally, even when the engine has been

switched off and the key removed from the

ignition!

●

Never cover the engine with additional in-

sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of

fire!

●

Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant

expansion tank when the engine is hot. If

the coolant is hot, the cooling system will

be pressurised!

●

Protect face, hands and arms by cover-

ing the cap with a large, thick cloth to pro-

tect against escaping coolant and steam.

●

Always make sure you have not left any

objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in

the engine compartment.

●

If you have to work underneath the vehi-

cle, you must use suitable stands addition-

ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of

accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for

securing the vehicle and there is a risk of

injury.

●

If any work has to be performed when the

engine is started or with the engine running,

there is an additional, potentially fatal,

safety risk from the rotating parts, such as

the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,

and from the high-voltage ignition system.

You should also observe the following:

–

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition syst

em.

–

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-

tating engine parts. Danger of death.

Before starting any work remove jewel-

lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear

tight-fitting clothes.

–

Never accelerate with a gear engaged

without taking the necessary precau-

tions. The vehicle could move, even if

the handbrake is applied. Danger of

death.

●

If work has to be carried out on the fuel

system or on electrical components, you

must observe the following safety notes in

addition to the above warnings:

–

Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network. The vehicle must be

unlocked when this is done, otherwise

the alarm will be triggered.

–

Do not smoke.

–

Never work near naked flames.

–

Always have a fire extinguisher on

hand.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it

could suddenly open while driving leaving

the driver without visibilit

y. This could re-

sult in a serious accident.

316

Checking and refilling levels

●

After closing the bonnet, always check

that it is pr

operly secured by the locking

mechanism in the lock carrier piece. The

bonnet must be flush with the surrounding

body panels.

●

While driving, if you notice that the bon-

net is not correctly closed then stop imme-

diately and close it correctly.

●

Only open and close the bonnet when

there is nobody within its range.

CAUTION

When topping up service fluids, make sure

not t

o mistake them. Using the wrong fluids

coul

d cause serious malfunctions and en-

gine damage!

For the sake of the environment

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-

ronment. For this reason you should mak

regular checks on the ground underneath

your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other

fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a

specialised workshop.

Checking levels

Fig. 281

Diagram for the location of the various el-

ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different

fluids in the v

ehicl

e must be check

ed. Ne

fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious

damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Engine oil level dipstick

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery

Windscr

een w

asher r

eserv

oir

The checking and r

efilling of service fluids are

carried out on the components mentioned

317

Practical tips

above. These operations are described in

›

page 315

erview

You will find further explanations, instructions

and restrictions on the technical specifica-

tions as of

›››

page 346.

Note

The layout of parts may vary depending on

the engine.

Engine oil

Gener

al not

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade

oil that can be used all year r

ound.

Because the use of high-qualit

y oil is essen-

tial f

or the corr

ect oper

ation of the engine

and its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that comply

with VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change indicated

in the Maintenance Programme, be per-

formed by a technical service or specialised

workshop.

If the engine oil level is too low

You can get information about the correct en-

gine oil for your vehicle at your specialised

shop. If you have to change your engine oil,

use that oil.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-

ble, in the event of an emergency you can

add oil once up to a maximum of 0.5 L of the

next oil until the next oil change:

●

Valid for vehicles with petrol engines:

standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00,

VW 508 00, ACEA C or API SN.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash

formation, may be used in diesel engines

equipped with particulate filter. Using other

types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-

tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-

fore:

●

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

●

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the

engine oil level is too low

›››

page 319 and

you cannot obtain the oil specified for your

vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil

(once) conforming to the specifications

VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,

VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)

›››



page 47.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding

an engine oil that conforms to the corre-

sponding VW specifications and recom-

mend k

eeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available

for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp



It lights up red

 Do not continue driving!

Engine oil pressure too lo

If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accom-

panied by three

audible warnings, switch off the en-

gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more

oil

›››

page 319.

If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level

is corr

ect, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at

idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.



It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.

Top up the oil at the next opportunity

›

››

page 319.



It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.

Take the vehicle t

o a specialised workshop to have

the system inspected. Until then it is advisable to

check the oil level every time you refuel.

318

Checking and refilling levels

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 282

Engine oil dipstick.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 46

Checking oil l

vel

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the

operating temperature is reached and then

stop.

–

Wait for about two minutes.

–

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with

a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it

in as far as it will go.

–

Then pull it out again and check the oil lev-

el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-

sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil

consumption is likely to be higher for the first

5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level

must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-

bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine com-

partment or on the engine must be carried

out cautiously.

●

When working in the engine compart-

ment, al

ways observe the safety warnings

›››

page 315.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area

›››

Fig. 282

do not start the engine. This could r

esult in

damage to the engine and catalytic con-

verter. Contact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 46

Bef

e opening the bonnet, read and observe

the warnings

›››

in Safety notes for work

in the engine compar

tment on page 315

The position of the fill

er neck is sho

wn in the

corr

esponding engine compartment image

›››

page 317.

Engine oil specification

›››



page 47.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil

comes into contact with hot engine compo-

nents when topping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area

›››

Fig. 282

do not start the engine. This could r

esult in

damage to the engine and catalytic con-

verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above zone

›››

Fig. 282

. Otherwise oil can be drawn

in through the crankcase breather and l

eak

into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-

tem.

Changing engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 46

The engine oil must be changed at the int

vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oil

changed by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in the

Maintenance Programme.

319

Practical tips

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if you

have the specialist knowledge requir

ed!

●

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the warnings

›››

page 315, Safety

notes for work in the engine compartment.

●

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil

may cause burn injuries.

●

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,

such as acid burns, caused by splashes of

oil.

●

When removing the oil drain plug with

your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to

help prevent oil from running down your

arm.

●

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into

contact with engine oil.

●

Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oil

must be stored in a safe place out of the

reach of children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.

This could result in engine damage. Any

damage caused by the use of such addi-

tives w

ould not be covered by the factory

warranty.

For the sake of the environment

●

Because of disposal problems and the

special tools and specialist kno

wledge re-

quired, we recommend that you have the

engine oil and filter changed by a Techni-

cal Service.

●

Nev

er pour oil down drains or into the

ground.

●

Use a suitable container when draining

the used oil. It must be large enough to hold

all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Topping up coolant

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 47

op up cool

ant when the level is below the

MIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Switch the ignition off.

–

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-

pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the

coolant level should be between the marks.

When the engine is hot, it may be slightly

above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant

–

Wait for the engine to cool down.

–

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with

a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left

›››

–

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-

ant in the e

xpansion t

ank

, otherwise you

coul

damage the engine. If there is no

coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-

tinue driving. You should obtain professional

assistance

›››

–

If there is still some coolant in the expansion

ank

, t

op up t

o the upper mark

–

Top up with coolant until the level becomes

stable.

–

Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a

leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle

straight to a specialised workshop to have

the cooling system examined. If there are no

leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of

coolant can only occur if the coolant boils

and is forced out of the system as a result of

overheating.

WARNING

●

If your vehicle is immobilised for techni-

cal r

easons, move it to a safe distance from

traffic. Switch off the engine, switch on the

blinkers and place the emergency trian-

gles.

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam,

smoke or coolant escaping from the engine

320

Checking and refilling levels

compartment, there is a risk of burns. Wait

until you can no longer see or hear escap-

ing steam or coolant.

●

The engine compartment is a danger

ous

area. Before carrying out any work in the

engine compartment, switch off the engine

and allow it to cool down. Always note the

corresponding warnings

›››

page 315.

WARNING

●

The cooling syst

em is under pressure. Do

not unscr

ew the cap on the coolant expan-

sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of

burns!

●

The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a

health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze

should be stored in the original container in

a safe place out of reach of children. Fail-

ure to comply could result in poisoning.

●

If working inside the engine compart-

ment, remember that, even when the igni-

tion is switched off, the radiator fan may

start up automatically, and therefore there

is a risk of injury.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the

coolant system, the engine may fail lead-

ing t

o serious damage.

●

Please make sure that the percentage of

additive is correct with respect to the low-

est expected ambient temperature in the

zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

●

When the outside t

emperature is very

low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-

cle would be immobilised. In this case, the

heating would not work either and inade-

quately dressed passengers could die of

cold.

CAUTION

Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-

ant fluid if it is empt

y! Air could enter the

cooling system. In this case

, stop driving.

Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise,

there is a risk of engine damage.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be

mixed with coolants which are not ap-

pro

ved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk

of causing severe damage to the engine

and the engine cooling system.

●

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not

purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-

cates that the G13 additive has been mixed

with an inadequate coolant. The coolant

must be changed as soon as possible if this

is the case! This could result in serious

faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate

the environment. If any fluids are spilled,

they should be coll

ected and correctly dis-

posed of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid lev

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 4

The position of the br

ake fluid reservoir is

shown in the corresponding engine compart-

ment image

›››

page 317. The brake fluid res-

ervoir has a black and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the

vehicle is being used as the brake pads are

automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes down noticeably in

a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,

there may be a leak in the brake system. A

display on the instrument panel will warn you

if the brake fluid level is too low

›››

page 118.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to check the

brake fluid lev

el, read and observe the

warnings

›››

page 315.

321

Practical tips

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicates

brake fluid change interval

We recommend that you have the brake fluid

changed by a Technical Service.

Before opening the bonnet, please read and

follow the warnings

›››

in Safety notes for

work in the engine compartment on

page 315 in section “Safet

y notes for working

in the engine compartment”.

In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hy-

groscopic and absorbs water from the ambi-

ent air. If the water content in the brake fluid is

too high, the brake system could corrode.

This also considerably reduces the boiling

point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the

brakes may then cause a vapour lock which

could impair the braking effect.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.

Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the

VW 501 14 standard.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in

a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service.

If none is available, use only high-quality

brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4

standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT

Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that

is not of a high quality may affect operation

of the brake system and reduce its effective-

ness. Never use a brake fluid if the container

does not state that it complies with VW 501

14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA

andards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-

pairs the braking effect.

●

Before opening the bonnet t

o check the

brake fluid level, read and observe the

warnings

›››

page 315.

●

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed

original container in a safe place out of

reach of children. There is a toxic risk.

●

Perform the brake fluid change accord-

ing to the Maintenance Programme. Heavy

use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock

if the brake fluid is left in the brake system

for too long. This would seriously affect the

effectiveness of the brakes and the safety

of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.

Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork

immediat

ely.

For the sake of the environment

The brake pads and brake fluid must be

collected and disposed of according the

applicable r

egulations. The SEAT Technical

Service network has the necessary equip-

ment and qualified personnel for collecting

and disposing of this waste material.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind-

screen washer reserv

oir water

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 48

The

windscreen washer is supplied with liq-

uid from the windscreen washer reservoir in

the engine compartment. It has a capacity of

approximately 3 litres.

The tank is in the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-

screen and headlights. We recommend that

you always add a product to the windscreen

washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning

products exist on the market with high deter-

gent and anti-freeze properties, these may

be added all-year-round. Please follow the

dilution instructions on the packaging.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine com-

partment or on the engine must be carried

out cautiously.

322

Checking and refilling levels

●

When working in the engine compart-

ment, alw

ays observe the safety warnings

›››

page 315.

CAUTION

●

ver put radiator anti-fr

eeze or other

additives into the windscreen washer fluid.

●

Always use approved windscreen cleans-

ing products diluted as per instructions. If

you use other washer fluids or soap solu-

tions, the tiny holes in the fan-shaped noz-

zles could become blocked.

Vehicle battery

Symbol

s and w

arnings on handling

the batt

ery

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 49



Wear eye protection



Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-

ective glov

es and eye protection!



Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are

prohibited!



A highly explosiv

e mixture of gases is released

when the battery is under charge.



Keep chil

dren away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury

and chemical burns as well as the risk of

accident or fire when working on the bat-

ery and the electrical system:

●

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,

skin and clothing from acid and particles

containing lead.

●

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear

protective gloves and eye protection. Do

not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid

through the vents.

●

Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately

for several minutes with clear water. Then

seek medical care immediately. Neutralise

any acid splashes on the skin or clothing

with a soapy solution, and rinse off with

plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mis-

take, consult a doctor immediately.

●

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking

are prohibited. When handling cables and

electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks

and electrostatic charge. Never short the

battery terminals. High-energy sparks can

cause injury.

●

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-

leased when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well-

ventilated room only.

●

Keep children away from acid and bat-

teries.

●

Before working on the electrical system,

you must switch off the engine, the ignition

and all electrical devices. The negative ca-

ble on the battery must be disconnected.

When a light bulb is changed, you need on-

ly swit

ch off the light.

●

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-

locking the vehicle before you disconnect

the battery! The alarm will otherwise be

triggered.

●

When disconnecting the battery from the

vehicle on-board network, disconnect first

the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

●

Switch off all electrical devices before

reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first

the positive cable and then the negative

cable. Never reverse the polarity of the

connections. This could cause an electrical

fire.

●

Never charge a frozen battery, or one

which has thawed. This could result in ex-

plosions and chemical burns. Always re-

place a battery which has frozen. A flat

battery can also freeze at temperatures

close to 0°C (+32°F).

●

Ensure that the vent hose is always con-

nected to the battery.

●

Never use a defective battery. This could

cause an explosion. Replace a damaged

battery immediately.

CAUTION

●

Never disconnect the battery if the igni-

tion is swit

ched on or if the engine is

323

Practical tips

running. This could damage the electrical

system or electronic components.

●

Do not expose the batt

ery to direct sun-

light over a long period of time, as the in-

tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the

battery housing.

●

If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-

ditions for a long period, protect the bat-

tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be

damaged.

Warning lamp



It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is

wit

ched on. It shoul

d go out when the engine

has st

art

ed running.

If the control lamp  lights up while driving,

the alternator is no longer charging the bat-

tery. You should immediately drive to the

nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment

that is not absolutely necessary because this

will drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte

level

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-

ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-

tries and in ol

der batteries.

–

Open the bonnet and open the battery

cover at the front

›››

in Safety notes for

work in the engine compartment on

page 316

››

›

in Symbols and warnings

on handling the battery on page 323. For

vehicl

es with the battery under the spare

wheel, open the rear lid and lift the floor

covering. The battery is located next to the

spare wheel.

–

Check the colour display in the "magic eye"

on the top of the battery.

–

If there are air bubbl

es in the window, tap

the window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the

corresponding engine compartment diagram

›››

page 317.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top

of the battery changes colour, depending on

the charge state and electrolyte level of the

battery.

There are two different colours:

●

Black: correct charge status.

●

Transparent/light yellow: the battery must

be replaced. Contact a specialised work-

shop.

Charging or changing the battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is

checked during the inspection service. All

work on the vehicl

e battery requires specialist

knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-

hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery

should be checked by a specialised work-

shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have

problems starting the vehicle, the battery

might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-

ommend you have the vehicle battery

checked by a Technical Service where it will

be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a

specialised workshop only, as batteries using

special technology have been installed and

they must be charged in a controlled environ-

ment.

324

Wheels

Replacing a vehicle battery

The batt

ery has been de

oped t

o suit the

conditions of its location and has special

safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-

nance, performance and safety specifica-

tions of your vehicle.

WARNING

●

We recommend you use only mainte-

nance-free or cycl

e free leak-proof batter-

ies which comply with standards T 825 06

and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of

2001 August or later.

●

Before starting any work on the batteries,

you must read and observe the warnings

›››

in Symbols and warnings on handling

the battery on page 323.

For the sake of the environment

Batteries contain toxic substances such as

sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis-

posed of appropriately and must not be

disposed of with ordinary househol

d waste.

Wheels

Wheel

s and t

Gener

al not

–

When driving with new tyres, be especially

car

eful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

–

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as

possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

–

Check from time to time if the tyres are

damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or

dents). Remo

ve any foreign objects em-

bedded in the treads.

–

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-

placed immediately.

–

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

–

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as

possible.

–

Mark the wheels before taking them off so

that they rotate in the same direction when

put back.

–

When removed, the wheels or tyres should

be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark

place.

New tyres

New tyres do not give maximum grip straight

away and should therefore be “run in” by

driving carefully and at moderate speeds for

about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will

also increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the type and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

Low profile tyres

Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and

tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and

a greater rim diameter along with a lower

height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a

more agile driving behaviour. However, on

roads that are in poor condition, this might af-

fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres, for instance due to

strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and

kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre

pressure is particularly important

›››

page 326.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive

with special care when driving on roads in

poor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-

garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on

the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on

the rims.

325

Practical tips

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy

impact or hav

e been damaged, hav

e them

check

ed and, if r

equir

ed, replaced at a speci-

alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily

visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the

car pulling to one side, this may indicate

that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce

speed immediately if there is any reason to

suspect that damage may have occurred. In-

spect the tyres for damage. If no external

damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully

to the nearest specialised workshop and

have the car inspected.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-

rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-

ways note the direction of rotation indicated

when mounting the wheel. This guarantees

optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-

ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessories

If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or

wheel trims, we recommend that you consult

with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice

regarding current techniques.

WARNING

●

New tyres do not have maximum grip dur

ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly

carefully to avoid possible accidents.

●

Never drive with damaged tyres. This

may cause an accident.

●

If you notice unusual vibrations or if the

vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop

the vehicle immediately and check the

tyres for damage.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Fig. 283

Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

The maximum tyre pressure values are shown

on a stick

er st

uck t

o the back of the l

eft fr

ont

door frame

›››

Fig. 283.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure

from the sticker. The values refer to Sum-

mer tyres.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked

when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised

pressures of warm tyres must not be re-

duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are

carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially impor-

tant at high speeds. The pressure should

therefore be checked at least once a month

and before starting a journey.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can

be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-

ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When

driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-

sumption may increase slightly.

WARNING

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too

low, causing an accident!

●

At continuously high speeds, a t

yre with

insufficient pressure flexes more. In this

way it becomes too hot, and this can cause

tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always

observe the recommended tyre pressures.

326

Wheels

●

If the tyre pressure is t

oo low or too high,

the tyres will wear prematurely and the ve-

hicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

Service life of tyres

Fig. 284 Tyre tread wear indicators.

Fig. 285 Diagram for changing wheels.

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre

essur

, driving st

e and fitting.

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have

1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”

›››

Fig. 284, running across the tread. De-

pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of

them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark-

ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let-

ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po-

sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-

mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm

(measured in the tread grooves next to the

tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be

replaced. Different figures may apply in ex-

port countries

›››

e pr

essur

Incorr

ect tyre pressure causes premature

wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this

reason, the tyre pressure should be checked

at least once per month

›››

page 326.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard

braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more

than the rear ones it is advisable to change

them around as shown

›››

Fig. 285. The useful

life of all the tyres will then be about the

same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.

However, various factors encountered in nor-

mal driving can cause them to become un-

balanced, which results in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,

as they otherwise cause excessive wear on

steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must

also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-

cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the

vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you

should have the wheel alignment checked by

a Technical Service.

327

Practical tips

WARNING

There is a serious danger of accidents if a

tyre bursts during driving!

●

The tyres must be r

eplaced at the latest

when the tread wear indicators are worn

›››

page 327. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion could result in an accident. Worn tyres

do not grip well at high speeds on wet

roads. There is also a greater risk of “aqua-

planing”.

●

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with

insufficient pressure flexes more. This cau-

ses it to overheat. This can cause tread

separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of acci-

dent. Always observe the recommended

tyre pressures.

●

If tyres show excessive wear, you should

have the running gear checked by a Tech-

nical Service.

●

Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and

brake fluid away from tyres.

●

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-

placed immediately!

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential

part of the v

ehicl

e's design. Those appr

by SEAT are specially matched to the char-

acteristics of the vehicle and make a major

contribution to good road-holding and safe

handling

›››

es shoul

d be r

epl

aced at least in pairs and

not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both

rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des-

ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-

rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa-

tions marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/55 R16 91V

This contains the following information:

Tyre width in mm

Height/width ratio in %

Tyre construction: Radial

Rim diameter in inches

Load rating code

Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following infor-

mation:

●

A direction of rotation symbol

●

“Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on

the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer

side of the wheel).

195

“DOT ... 1116...” means, for example, that the

tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016.

We recommend that work on tyres and

wheels be carried out by a Technical Service.

They are familiar with the procedure and

have the necessary special tools and spare

parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-

posing of the old tyres.

Any technical service has full information on

the technical requirements when installing or

changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

WARNING

●

We recommend that you use only wheels

and tyr

es which have been approved by

SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could

impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.

●

Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that

are more than 6 years old. If you have no

alternative, you should drive slowly and

with extra care at all times.

●

Never use old tyres or those with an un-

known “history of use”.

●

If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must

ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is

not restricted. This could cause the brake

system to overheat.

●

All four wheels must be fitted with radial

tyres of the same type, size (rolling circum-

ference) and the same tread pattern.

328

Wheels

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of according to

the laws in the country concerned.

Note

●

A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-

ted t

o find out whether wheels or tyres of

different sizes to those originally fitted by

SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about

the combinations allowed between the

front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

●

For technical reasons, it is not generally

possible to use the wheels from other vehi-

cles. This can also apply to wheels of the

same model. The use of wheels or tyres

which have not been approved by SEAT for

use with your model may invalidate the ve-

hicle's type approval for use on public

roads.

●

If the spare tyre is not the same as the

tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.

winter tyres) you should only use the spare

tyre for a short period of time and drive with

extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as

soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the

rims. If diff

ent wheel rims ar

e fitt

ed, the cor

rect wheel bolts with the right length and cor-

rectly shaped bolt heads must be used. This

ensures that wheels are fitted securely and

that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not use

wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it

is the same model

›››

page 307.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened cor-

rectly, the wheel could become loose while

driving. Risk of accident.

●

The wheel bolts must be cl

ean and turn

easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

●

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the

wheel.

●

If the prescribed torque of the wheel

bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst

the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If

the tightening torque is too high, the wheel

bolts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel

bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Tyre monitoring indicator*

Fig. 286

Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-

em butt

on.

Control lamp



It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the

value set by the driver

›››

Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.

The tyre pressure loss indicator compares the

olutions and thus the wheel diamet

er of

each wheel using the ESC. If the wheel diam-

er of a wheel changes, the control indicator

of the tyres informs of this fact . The wheel

diameter changes when:

●

Tyre pressure is insufficient.

●

The tyre structure is damaged.

●

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load.

329

Practical tips

●

The wheel

s of one axl

e ar

e under mor

essure (for example, driving with a trailer or

on steep slopes).

●

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.

●

The temporary spare wheel is fitted.

●

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

After modifying tyre pressure or changing any

wheels, the new tyre pressure must be stored

in the Easy Connect system with the 

/ 

butt

on and the

SETTINGS function butt

›



page 34.

In vehicles without a radio, press and hold

down the  

›››

Fig. 286 button, with the

ignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-

ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),

the tyre pressure must be increased to the

recommended value for a full load (see the

sticker on the back of the left front door

frame). If the tyre monitor system button is

pressed down, the new tyre pressures are

confirmed.

WARNING

●

When the tyre pressure contr

ol lamp

lights up, reduce speed immediately and

avoid any sudden turning or braking ma-

noeuvre. Stop when possible, and check

the tyre pressure and status.

●

The driver is responsible for maint

aining

correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre

pressure must be regularly checked.

●

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when

driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-

tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control

lamp may light up belatedly or may func-

tion incorrectly.

Note

If the battery is disconnected, the yellow

arning lamp  lights up aft

er turning the

ignition on. This should turn off after a brief

journey.

Spare wheel (temporary

spar

e wheel)*

ocation and use of the t

empor

ary

spar

e wheel

Fig. 287

In the boot: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under

the fl

oor panel in the luggage compartment

and is att

ached by a thumbnut.

w t

o use the t

emporary spare wheel

If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of

pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only

intended for temporary use until you reach a

workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon

as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when

using the temporary spare wheel. This

330

Wheels

temporary spare wheel has been specially

designed f

or your v

ehicl

, thus, it cannot be

changed with the t

emporary spare wheel

from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-

ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tem-

porary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must not

be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front

wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-

porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear

wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel

that you have removed and replace the

punctured front wheel with this wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles

with the Beats Audio

sound system (6

speakers with 1 subwoofer)*

Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel

(carpet) as follows:

●

Pull the carpet upwards to remove it.

●

Disconnect the cable for the subwoofer

speaker

›››

Fig. 287

●

Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise

●

Remove the sub

oof

speak

er and the

spare wheel.

●

When replacing the spare wheel, place the

subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated

by the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac-

ing forward.

●

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-

tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in

place.

Removing the 16” temporary spare wheel

(without subwoofer)

●

Remove the luggage compartment varia-

ble floor to access the wheel and the tools

›››

page 158.

●

Loosen the strap that secures the box by

pressing on the buckle.

●

Remove the toolbox.

●

Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise and

remove it.

●

Press the thread and turn it 90° clockwise

or anti-clockwise and remove it.

●

Pull on the front part of the spare wheel to

remove it.

WARNING

●

After fitting the temporary spare wheel,

check the t

yre pressures as soon as possi-

ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-

dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back

of the left front door frame.

●

Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)

when the tempor

ary spare wheel is fitted

on the vehicle: risk of accident!

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering: risk of accident!

●

Never use more than one temporary

spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-

dent.

●

No other type of tyre (normal summer or

winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact

temporary spare wheel rim.

Winter service

Wint

er t

In winter conditions winter tyres will consider-

ably impr

e the v

ehicl

e's handling. The de-

sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice

and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure

of 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the

pressures specified for summer tyres (see the

sticker on the back of the left front door

frame).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizes

can be found in the vehicle's registration doc-

umentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All

331

Practical tips

tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentation

so apply t

o wint

er t

es.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the

tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code

›››

page 328, New

tyres and wheels determines the following

speed limits for winter tyres:

›››

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 180 km/h (

12 mph)

max. 190 km/h (

18 mph)

max. 2

10 km/h (130 mph)

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed

the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have

an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of

view. These stickers are available from your

technical service. The legal requirements of

each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-

rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres

handle better when the roads are free of

snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the

notes on the spare wheel

›››

page 328, New

tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres

must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this

could l

ead to damage and risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment

Fit your summer tyres again as soon as

possible. They are quieter

, do not wear so

quickly and reduce fuel consumption.

332

Service

Maintenance

Service

Service int

erv

Servicing and Digit

al Maint

enance

Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-

tenance Plan”)

The SEAT dealership or a specialised work

shop records Service receipts in a central

system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-

mentation of the service history, it is possible

to reproduce the services performed any

time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service

receipt after every service carried out con-

taining all the services carried out on the sys-

tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is

replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-

able in some markets. In this case, your

SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-

rent documentation of the work.

Service works

In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT

authorised service or specialised workshop

documents the f

ollowing information:

●

When each one of the services was carried

out.

●

Whether a specific repair has been sugges-

ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near

future.

●

If you have expressed a special request for

the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will

write the work order.

●

The components or fluids that were

changed.

●

The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until

the next inspection. This information is docu-

mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may

vary from one vehicle to another. A special-

ised workshop will be able to provide specific

information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service intervals ar

e not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic cause an accident and severe in-

juries.

●

Make sure that any repairs are carried

out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-

alised w

orkshop.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

o the vehicle due to insufficient w

ork or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Note

Regular services on the vehicle not only

maintain its value, but also its corr

ect oper-

ation and road safety. For this reason, con-

duct the services in accordance with SEAT

guidelines.

Fixed Service or Flexible Service

Services are classified as oil change service

and inspection. The service int

erv

al displ

on the instrument panel displ

ay serv

es as a

reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and

the conditions of use of the car, either the

Fixed service or the Flexible service will be

applied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needs

to his vehicle

●

Check the tables below:

333

Maintenance

Oil change service

PR No.

Type of

service

Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after

1 year

QI2

Every 7500 km or after

1 year

QI3

Every 10000 km or aft

1 year

QI4

Every 15000 km or aft

1 year

QI6 Flexible

Accor

ding to the service in-

erv

al displ

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Whatever happens first.

Inspection Service

According to the service interval display

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the inf

ormation about the speci-

fications of the engine oil accor

ding t

o the

VW st

andar

›››



page 46.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible

Service

Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil

change service only has to be performed

when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into

account the individual conditions of use and

personal driving style. A major component of

the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-

stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-

fications of the engine oil according to the

VW standard

›››



page 46.

If you do not want to the flexible service

you can select the fixed service However,

a fixed service may affect service costs

The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals display

At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-

ted by the service interval display on the in-

strument panel

›››

page 115 or in the Vehi-

cle settings menu of the infotainment sys-

tem

›››



page 34. The service interval dis-

play gives information for service dates that

involve an engine oil change or an inspection.

When the time for the corresponding service

comes, additional work required, such as the

change of brake fluid and the spark plugs,

can be carried out.

Information on the conditions of

use

The service intervals and groups are usually

based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-

erse conditions of use

, some of the w

ork

must be carried out bef

e the next service

period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

●

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.

●

Frequent short trips.

●

Letting the engine idle for a long period of

time, as in the case of taxis.

●

Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.

●

Frequent driving with a trailer (depending

on equipment).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a

lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following

parts (depending on equipment):

●

Dust and pollen filter

●

Air Care allergen filter

●

Air filter

●

Toothed chain

●

Particulate filter

●

Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialised

workshop will gladly inform you about the

need of performing service work between

334

Service

normal service intervals, always considering

the conditions of use of your v

ehicl

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service intervals ar

e not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic and cause accidents and severe

injuries.

●

Have the services conducted at author-

ised SEAT services or specialised work-

shops.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

to the vehicle due to insufficient w

ork or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maint

enance

orks

needed t

o ensur

e the safety and the

smooth running of the vehicle (depending on

the conditions of use and the features of

the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or

operating fluids). Maintenance services are

divided into inspection and review services.

Consult the details of the jobs required for

your vehicle at:

●

Your SEAT authorised service

●

Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-

opment of components) the sets of services

may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or

specialised workshop is always receiving up-

dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-

ceiv

ed f

or their v

ehicl

es and appr

oved by

SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.

These parts correspond exactly to the manu-

facturer's requirements in terms of design,

accuracy of the measurements and materi-

als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been

conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this

reason, we always recommend the use of

Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be

held liable for the safety and suitability of

parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-

act

's r

equirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,

gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical

components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the

same as the factory parts, which are also ap-

proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original

Accessories and SEAT approved accessories

for your v

ehicle. The reliability, safety and

suitability of these accessories have been in-

spected specifically for this type of vehicle.

SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and

suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT

Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT

ehicl

e you will be abl

e t

o enjoy the benefits

and co

verage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,

your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-

ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-

ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-

od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as

you carry out the recommended Inspection

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-

ised Service.

335

Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a

ault or an accident, our assist

ance services

will help you k

eep mo

ving.

ake into account that the SEAT Mobility

Service differs depending on the country in

which the vehicle was purchased. For further

information ask your SEAT dealership or the

SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect

condition of ne

w v

ehicl

es. Check the pur

chase agr

eement or complementary addi-

tional documentation provided by your Tech-

nical Service to see the conditions and the

terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-

mation in this regard in your SEAT Official

Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maint

enance and cl

eaning

Basic consider

ations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain

the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may

become a pr

erequisite to demand the war-

ranty in the event of corrosion damage and

deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-

work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary

care products. Please follow the instructions

for application on the packaging.

WARNING

●

Cleaning products and other materials

used f

or car care can be damaging to your

health if misused.

●

Always keep care products in a safe

place, out of the reach of children. Danger

of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment

●

When purchasing car care products,

chose products that ar

e compatible with

the environment.

●

The waste from car-care products should

not be disposed of with ordinary household

waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.

remains of insects, bird excr

ements, tree resin

or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the

more damage it can cause to the surface.

High temperatures, for instance strong sun-

light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using

plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird

droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and

a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-

ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaners

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-

sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-

structions for the equipment. This applies

particularly to the operating pressure and the

distance between the spraying water. Do not

aim the jet directly to the side window gas-

kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-

roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-

ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or

camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least

40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-

pressure cleaner.

336

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out

in a dir

ect str

eam or one that has a r

ating

jet f

or forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed

60°C.

Automatic car wash tunnels

Spray the vehicle before starting the car

wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-

amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen

wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-

structions of the car wash tunnel operator,

especially if your vehicle has detachable

parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a

soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-

ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by

hand

To prevent damage to the vehicle when

washing it, first remove the thicker dust and

dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and

fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner

for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To

avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do

not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with

a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-

bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water

and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of

water with a leather cloth.

WARNING

●

Only wash the vehicle with the ignition

swit

ched off or according to the specifica-

tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk

of accident!

●

When cleaning the underbody or the in-

side of the wheel arches, protect yourself

from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of

cut!

●

After cleaning the brakes could act more

slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice

on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-

dent! In this case the brakes should be

dried by pressing the brake pedal several

times.

CAUTION

●

Before washing the vehicl

e in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-

ployed electrically!

●

Do not wash the vehicl

e in direct sunlight.

Risk of damaging the paint job!

●

Do not use sponges, abrasive household

sponges or similar to clean insect remains.

Risk of damaging the surface!

●

Vehicle parts with matte paint:

–

Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!

–

Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-

age the appearance of matte paint.

–

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts

with matte paint, as removing them

may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment

The car should only be washed in special

wash bays. These places are prepar

ed to

prevent oily water from getting into the

public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-

tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual

components of the v

ehicl

e can be check

ed in

the f

oll

owing tables. The contents should be

understood merely as a recommendation. Go

to your specialised workshop if you have

337

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.

e he gener

al consider

ations int

o account

›››

in Take special care with... on

page 341.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Sensors / Camer

a l

enses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean-

ing product which does not

contain sol

vents

Camera lenses - soft cloth with

cleaning product with no alco-

hol content

Snow/ice

Hand brush/Anti frost spray

with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasion

dust

Acid-free special cleaning

product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-

uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, if a

steel cleaning product is re-

quir

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

aint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paint

Check the paint's colour code

in an authorised service and re-

store with a touch-up pencil

Spill

ed fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust

tank

Apply rust remover and then

apply har

d wax. Go you your

specialised workshop if you

have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion

Have your specialised work-

shop take care of this

The wat

er does

not create drop-

lets on the cl

ean

paint

Maintain with hard wax (at

least 2 times a year)

No shine de-

spite sober main-

tenance/paint

Treat with suit

able wax and ap-

ply paint preservative after

wards if the wax used does not

contain preservative ingredi-

ents

Tanks, e.g. insect

remains, bird

droppings, tree

sap

, road salt

Immediately soften with water

and remove with a microfibre

cloth

Fat-based dirt,

e.g. cosmetic

products or

sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-

tral soap solution

and a soft

cloth

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Carbon fibr

e par

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-

ted parts

›››

page 336

338

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water

Interior cl

eaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and

then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

astic par

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution

, if pos-

sible solvent-free plastic clean-

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Displ

ays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal

display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with

neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, al-

lowed t

o dry before retracting

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

abrics, ar

tificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Dirt particles ad-

hered to the sur-

face

acuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

ood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral

soap solution

Problem Solution

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, make-

up, et

Apply a neutral soap solution

Absorb the dissolved grease

and paint particles drying with

an absorbent cloth, in case you

must treat it with water after-

wards

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Special stain remo

ve: dry with

an absorbent cloth, if applica-

ble, apply neutral soap solution

afterwards

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Nat

al leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap

solution

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

Dry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, make-

up, et

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

and leather cleaner

Dry stains: grease dissolving

spray

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Stain remo

ver suitable for

leather

339

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-

larly to protect fr

om sunlight.

Use a colour preservative if re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water

Carbon fibre par

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights

●

Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with

a dry cl

oth or sponge

●

Do not use cl

eaning pr

oducts that cont

ain

alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels

●

Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive

products.

●

If the protective coating on the paint of the

rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,

scratches, etc., the damage should be re-

paired immediately.

Camera lenses

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of

cracking the lens!

●

To clean the camera lens, never use abra-

sive cleaning products or products with alco-

hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows

●

Remove snow and ice from windows and

exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches, the scraper should only be

pushed in one direction and not moved to

and fro.

●

Never remove snow or ice from windows

and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.

Risk of cracks on the windows!

●

To prevent damage to the heating of the

rear window, do not put stickers over the

heating elements.

Covers/trims

●

Do not use cleaning products or chrome

based cleaning agents.

Paint

●

The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust

before applying wax or care products. Risk of

scratches!

●

Do not apply wax or care products if the

vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of

damaging the paint job!

●

The ambient rust deposits must not be re-

moved through friction. Risk of damaging the

paint job!

●

Remove cosmetic products and sunlight

immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel

●

The screens, the instrument panel and the

trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of

scratches!

●

Make sure that the instrument panel is

switched off and cooled down before clean-

ing.

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks between the

instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-

age!

Control panels

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-

trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts

●

Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.

●

Seat belts and their components must nev-

er be cleaned with chemical products, nor

should they be allowed to come into contact

with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-

jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!

●

If you find any damage to the belt webbing,

belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

ask your specialised workshop to replace the

belt in question.

340

Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-

●

Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara

eather with l

eather cl

eaning pr

oducts, sol

vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers

or similar products.

●

If the stain is very hard to remove, take the

vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it

removed there. This will prevent damage.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage

the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro

fasteners are closed.

Natural leather

●

Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,

spot removers or similar products on leather.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for

long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose

some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to

cover the leather.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the

windscreen. In bad visibility conditions

such as humid weather, darkness or when

the sun is in its l

owest point, visibility may

be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-

ings can also cause the windscreen wiper

blades to make noise.

Note

●

Remains of insects can be removed much

mor

e easily with previously treated paint.

●

Regular car care treatments can prevent

deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary

or a l

ong period of time

, cont

act a qualified

orkshop. They will gladly inform you about

the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-

sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding

the vehicle's battery

›››

page 323.

341

Information for the user

Inf

ormation f

or the user

ent Dat

a R

ecorder

Description and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder

(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record dat

a in the

event of a mild or serious accident. These da-

ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-

ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range

(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-

ing data and data from the restraint systems,

such as:

●

How different vehicle systems worked.

●

Whether the driver and the occupants were

wearing their seat belts.

●

How hard the acceler

ation or brake pedal

was pressed.

●

Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also

recorded. This includes data such as whether

the systems were inactive or active and if

such action had an impact on the vehicle’s

dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the

aforementioned situations, accelerating or

decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-

cludes data from systems such as:

●

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

●

Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist).

●

Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specific

accident situations. No data are recorded in

normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the

vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-

ces are personal data such as name, age, or

gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties

(such as criminal proceedings authorities)

may relate the contents of the EDR data to

other data sources and create a personal

reference in the context of an accident inves-

tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary

to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-

face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless

the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee

or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-

tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related

products, SEAT may use the EDR data for

field research and in order to improve vehicle

system quality. Any data used for the purpo-

ses of research will be treated anonymously

(in other words, no reference will be made to

the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Recycling of electrical or electron-

ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that

e not permanently fitt

ed in the v

ehicl

e must

be mark

ed with the following symbol:



This symbol indicates that EED must not be

discarded as home waste but through selec-

tive waste collection.

342

Information for the user

Information about the EU Di-

ectiv

e 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance decl

tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-

ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-

are that they comply with Directive

2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration

is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo



Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to

associat

e the name of the de

vice in the dec-

ation of compliance with the f

eatures of

the vehicle and the terminology used in the

on-board documentation.

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radiofrequency re-

mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS14

77,

FS94

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxili-

ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -

50000914

elestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as-

sistance syst

ems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-

ernal antenna of the

car

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in

dashboard module

instrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big

family

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG

720166002

8S7.035.503.B

343

Information for the user

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225

6F9.035.225

3V5.035.577.A

7N0.

035.552.J

7N0.035.552.K

7N0.035.552.Q

5F4.035.225

5F4.035.225.A

5F4.035.225.B

5F9.035.225

5F9.035.225.A

5F9.035.225.B

575.035.225

575.035.225.A

575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all

relevant components must include the ad-

ess of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-

nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

include a sticker are listed below, as long as it

is legally required:

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicle

Addresses of the

manuf

acturers

Radiofrequency remote

control key

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co

Rixbecker Straße 75

59552 Lippstadt,

GERMANY

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicle

Addresses of the

manuf

acturers

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxiliary

heater)

Digades gmbH

Äußere W

eberstraße 20

02763 Zittau, GERMANY

ebasto Thermo &

Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str. 9

82205 Gilching, GERMANY

adar sensors for as-

sistance systems

ADC Automotive Dist

ance

Control Systems GmbH

Peter

-Dornier-Straße 10

88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH

Postfach 16 61

71226 Leonber

GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

344

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Auxiliary heating

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

Bluethooth

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems

76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

345

Technical data

echnical specifications

Impor

ant inf

ormation

Impor

tant

The information in the vehicle documentation

always takes pr

ecedence over the informa-

tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this

documentation are valid for the standard

model in Spain.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models, for special vehicles and for

other countries.

Abbreviations used in the technical speci-

fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly

used to denote engine power

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Cetane number, indication of the die-

sel combustion power.

RON

Resear

ch octane number, indication of

the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 288 Chassis number.

Chassis number

The VIN is l

ocat

ed in the Easy Connect and

under the windscr

een, on the driv

er side

›

››

Fig. 288. Additionally, the chassis number

is located in the engine compartment, on the

right-hand side. The number is engraved on

the top side rail, and is partially covered.

VIN in the Easy Connect

●

Select: 

/  butt

on > function button

SETTINGS > Service > Chassis number.

Identification pl

The identification pl

e is located on the rear

pillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles for

certain export countries do not have an iden-

tification plate.

Identifying letters

The identifying letters of the engine can be

viewed on the instrument panel when the en-

gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

●

Hold down the button  on the dash

panel for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel con-

sumption

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived

om measur

ements perf

ormed or supervised

by certified EU l

abor

atories, according to the

346

Technical specifications

legislation in force at the time (for more infor-

mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-

opean Union on the EUR-L

x w

ebsit

e: © Eu-

ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and

apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and

emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-

cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO

emissions de-

pend on the equipment/features of each indi-

vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,

road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-

mental conditions, load or number of passen-

gers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factors

mentioned here, consumption values can

differ fr

om those calculated in the current

European regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a

fuel t

ank fill

ed t

o 90% capacit

y and without

optional e

xtras. The figure quoted includes 75

kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittings

or retro-fitting accessories will increase the

weight of the vehicle

›››

WARNING

●

Please note that the centre of gravit

may shift when transporting heavy objects;

this may affect vehicle handling and lead

to an accident. Always adjust your speed

and driving style to suit road conditions

and requirements.

●

Never exceed the gross axle weight rat-

ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the

permissible axle load or the permissible to-

tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac-

teristics of the vehicle may change, leading

to accidents, injuries and damage to the

vehicle.

Trailer mode

ail

er w

eights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-

ed ar

e sel

ected in intensive trials accord-

ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-

proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in

the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50

mph) (in certain circumstances up to

100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif-

ferent in other countries. All data in the official

vehicle documentation takes precedence

over these data at all times

›››

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitt

ed dr

awbar l

oad on the

ball coupling of the t

wing bracket must not

exceed 55 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend

that you always tow approaching the maxi-

mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-

er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar

load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load

cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and

light-weight single axle trailers or tandem

axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1

metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer

weight is legally required for the drawbar

load.

WARNING

●

For safety reasons, you shoul

d not drive

at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when

towing a trailer. This also applies in coun-

tries where higher speeds are permitted.

●

Never exceed the maximum trailer

weights or the drawbar load. If the permis-

sible axle load or the permissible total

weight is exceeded, the driving character-

istics of the vehicle may change, leading to

accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi-

cle.

347

Technical data

Wheels

e pr

essur

e and wheel bolts

Tyre pressure

The sticker with the tyre pressur

e values can

be found on the back of the left front door

frame. The tyre pressure values given there

are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly

raised pressures of warm tyres

›››

The pressure for winter t

yres is 0.2 bar higher

than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the

tightening torque of the wheel bolts should

be checked as soon as possible with a torque

wrench

›››

. The tightening torque for steel

and all

oy wheel

s is

120

Nm.

WARNING

●

Check the tyre pressure at l

east once per

month. Checking the tyre pressure is very

important. If the tyre pressure is too high or

too low, there is an increased danger of ac-

cidents - particularly at high speeds.

●

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel

bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your Techni-

cal Service for information about appropri-

ate wheel, t

yre and snow chain size.

348

Technical specifications

Engine data

etr

ol engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 85 (115)/5,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/2,000-3,500 200/2,000-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 173 (IV) 182 (V) 182 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 6.6 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.4 9.8 10.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,615-1,700

1,625-1,710

1,655-1,740

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,180 1,189 1,212

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850 860 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900

815-900

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 590 600

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,100 1,100

Varies depending on the features.

Varies depending on the rear spring.

349

Technical data

Petrol engines

1.5 TSI Evo Start-Stop 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 155/3,800-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,498 4/1,598

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 205 (V) 181 (IV) 181 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.8 7.1 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.3 11.1 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,665-1,750

1,595-1,680

1,635-1,720

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,222 1,156 1,194

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 830 870

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900

815-900

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 570 590

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,100

Varies depending on the features.

Varies depending on the rear spring.

350

Technical specifications

Natural gas/petrol engines

1.0 TGI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 66 (90)/4,500-5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,900-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 3/999

Fuel

CNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual

Top speed (km/h) 169 (4)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,301

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg)

Data not available as this edition goes to print.

351

Technical data

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/2,750-4,600 85 (115)/3,250-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-2,600 250/1,500-3,200

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,598 4/1,598

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG manual

Top speed (km/h) 172 (5) 174 (6) 185 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.9 8.4 7.1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 12.8 10.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,715-1,800

1,745-1,830

1,725-1,810

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,297 1,320 1,303

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 950 980 960

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900

815-900

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640 660 650

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,200

Varies depending on the features.

Varies depending on the rear spring.

352

Technical specifications

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 289 Dimensions and angles.

353

Technical data

›››

Fig. 289 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Front

track (mm) 1,503

F Back

track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at k

erb weight (mm) 1,552

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5°

Turning radius (m) 11.0

This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Dimension to the roof bars.

354

Index

ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

contr

ol l

amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

259

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 259

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

function for preventing overtaking in an in-

side lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

instructions on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

AdBlue

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Adjust

Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Adjusting

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 149

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Adjusting the front seats

adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Adjusting the head restraints

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Adjustment

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 74

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 76

functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 77

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 77

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Air recirculation

air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Alcantara leather: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Anchoring

the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 228, 229

Anti-locking system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 85

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 85

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

emergency braking assistance (Front As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

355

Index

parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

parking syst

em Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

ear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

speed limit

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Audible warning signal

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . 40

selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . 236

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 236

Automatic transmission

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

indication in the external rear view mirror . . 270

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Bluetooth®

connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317

close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 321

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 243

Brakes

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

new Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 231

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Braking

brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

BSD

see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Bulbs

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Central locking

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . 129

central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

self-locking system to prevent involuntary

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Changing bulbs

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

DRL (daytime running light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

356

Index

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

number pl

e light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 82

Child seats

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 81

securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Cleaning

Alcantara leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 340

control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

sensors/camera lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 339

washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

fan regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Clocks

analogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

set time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Communication between the Infotainment

system and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

WLAN point of access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ABS anti-blocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

357

Index

Control lamps

engine cool

ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel r

eserv

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

refuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Controls and displays

general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 136

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Coolant

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Coolant temperature

safety recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Cooling system

checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Cylinder deactivation

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . 106

Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 22

Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Detachable ball

assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 298

checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300

standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Diesel

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Diesel fuel

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Digital instrument

panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Digital SEAT Cockpit

navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Display indications

compass indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

driving recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

status of active cylinder management

(ACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Disposal

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Distance control

see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Doors

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 64, 65, 66

Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driving

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 247

driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 303, 304

with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Driving abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

358

Index

EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

ectrical po

er sock

et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

154

Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 136

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 138

Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . 226, 228, 229

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 219

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . 231

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

automatic gearbox emergency program . 240

bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 58

emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Emergency braking assistance system

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Emergency operation

front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Emission control system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Engine and ignition

automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 222

stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Engine breakdown

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 350

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 318

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319

checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 318

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Engine oil pressure

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Enlarging

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Environment

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

environmentally-friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . 244

Environmental tip

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

359

Index

Exhaust filtering system

cat

alytic conv

ert

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Exhaust purification system for vehicles with

diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . 283

Exterior lighting

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8

External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Fabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Faulty bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Fog

lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 142

Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 142

Frequency band

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Front Assist

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front seats

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 310

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 246

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 91

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . 232

kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . 236

General

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

General instrument panel

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . 140

General overview of the engine compart-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

360

Index

Handbr

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 143

HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . 71

Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Headlights

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

demisting the windscreen and side win-

dows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 164

Heating and fresh air system

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Heating or cooling the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Hydraulic Brake Assist

automatic hazard warning lights activa-

tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Identification of the fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Identifying letters on the engine

show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 217

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 217

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Emergency braking assistance system

(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

identifying letters of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 110

Indications on the screen

doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

on-screen keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

update navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

changing the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

general panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

proximity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

scroll knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

scroll (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

search in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

sharing a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

361

Index

Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

ouchscr

een . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

verification boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 333

Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

instructions shown on the screen . . . . . . . . . . 107

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 118

use with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . 117

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . . 174

Interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

ISOFIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Key by remote control

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless Access

Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless Access locking and ignition system

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keys

replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 125

vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 238

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 139

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . . 98

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

lighting of instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Load compartment in the luggage compart-

ment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 155

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 155

Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

362

Index

Locking and unlocking

in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with K

eyl

ess Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130

with the centr

al lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 16

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 155

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . 158

manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

stowing the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Seat Arona 2018

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Seat ARONA 2018 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Klarstein 52046250 Lil'Loo removable children's toilet seat

Maxi-Cosi VB024OXPE Oxford Modular Stroller with 180° Rotating Infant Seat for Versatile Travel

Maxi-Cosi VB023OXMI Oxford Modular Stroller with Mico Pro Infant Car Seat in Black

Maxi-Cosi VB022OXAM Oxford Modular Stroller with Ambra Ultra-Lightweight Infant Car Seat for Easy Travel and Convenience

Maxi-Cosi Andi 360° Rotating All-in-One Convertible Car Seat with Vehicle Seat Protector Features Safety and Comfort

Vevor XF8W217 Shop Stool Adjustable Garage Seat 300 lbs Load with Backrest & Wheels